Grammar of Greek La 00 Fisk

^^ -Ik':
4hft «" V
Digitized by tine Internet Arcinive
in 2010 witin funding from
University of Pittsburgii Library System
littp://www.arcliive.org/details/grammarofgreeklaOOfisk
GRAMMAR
OF THE
GREEK LANGUAGE.
BY
BENJAMIN FRANKLIN FISK.
Kec m^nore curil

\
Graeca studia secutus est, amorem
,
praestantiamqae llnguse
occasione omni professus Sueton.
STEREOTYPE EDITION»
BOSTON:
HILLIARD, GRAY, AND COMPANY.
1836.
DISTRICT OF MASSACHUSETTS, «•
District Clerk^s Office.
Be it remembered, That on 'he eighteenth day of June, A. D. 1830, and in the
year of the Independence of the United States of America, Bexjamim
fifty -fourth
Franklin Fisk, of the said district, has deposited in this office the title of a boolc,
the right whereof he claims as author, in the words following, to wit:
" A Grammar of the Greek Language. By Benjamin Franklin Fisk.
ra Eurip.
Nee minore curft. Grteca sttidia secutus est, amorem praestantiamque lingute
occasione omni professus Sueton."
In conformity to the act of the Congress of the United States, entitled, " An Act for
the encouragement of learning, by securing the copies of maps, charts, and books,
to the authors and proprietors of such copies, during the times therein mentioned ;"
and also to an act, entitled, " An Act supplementary to an act, entitled, An Act for '
the encouragement of learning, by securing the copies of maps, charts, and books, to
the authors and proprietors of such copies, during tlie times therein mentioned ;' and
extending the benefits thereof to the arts of designing, engraving, and etching histori-
cal and other prints-"
JXO. W. DAVIS,
Clerk of the Districi of jMasaachusetti.
STEREOTYPED AT THE
BOSTON TYPE AND STEREOTYPE FOUNDRT.
PREFACE TO THE FIRST EDITION.
Perhaps no elementary work has so long and so justly

been the subject of complaint, as the grammars employed
for the purpose of introducing beginners into a knowledge of
the Greek language. Those most esteemed for copiousness
and methodical arrangement, fail either by the omission of
much important matter, or by the incommodious disposition

and defective exemplification of what they contain.
With the hope of remedying these faults the following
work was undertaken, the extreme difficulty of which the
compiler was by no means aware of; but he soon discovered
that, without a famihar acquaintance with the principal
writers of the Greek lano;uao-e, and whatever has been
published to elucidate them, no one could be qualified to
compose a full, clear, and accurate system of its grammar,
wherein the rules and observations sliould be properly ex-
emplified, and their respective importance attached to them ;
and accordingly, with a labor to be appreciated by those

only who are conversant with such studies (to say nothing
of extraneous impediments of no ordinary character), he
collected and perused every work which seemed likely to
afford any thing of service to his undertaking.
In particular he read over all the more popular Greek

authors, most of them many times, especially those from
Homer to Demosthenes, as also their different commentators,
besides having constant recourse to the invaluable lexicons
and indexes of single authors by Damm, Seberus, Schweig-
IV PREFACE.
haeuser, Sturze, Schleusner, Sanxay, Beck, Reiske, and

others. He also availed himself of the labors of Vigerus,
Hoogeveen, Bos, Fischer, Matthiae, Buttmann, and the
other grammarians before the public, with the principal
general lexicons, from the smallest up to the voluminous one
of Stephanus. In perusing these works, all of which were

constantly before him, he copied whatever might be of use
in any part of the grammar, and thus accumulated a mass
of materials, from which he was enabled to deduce the
general principles of the language, with the particular ob-
servations and exceptions, and to illustrate them by a selec-
tion from a large number of the most pertinent examples that

are to be found in all the Greek writers. And here he
would observe, without further acknowledgment, that he
has borrowed from other grammarians whatever answered his
purpose^ retaining their language wherever greater clearness
would not be produced by an alteration of it.
The parts preceding the Syntax required less attention

than most of the others ; nevertheless much pains have been
beslowed on these, and it is hoped that many deficiencies
have been supplied, and that the whole has been consider-
ably simplified? The modern division of nouns into three
declensions was adopted, because it appeared most con-
venient, and had in its favor the suffrages of nearly all the
later grammarians ; but as the ancient division is preferred by
many, and as a knowledge of it is necessary in perusing
those writings in which it is exclusively referred to, this also
is subjoined in a smaller character. It was discovered that
when baryton verbs are divided into four conjugations, the

them are far less complex than when they
rules concerning
are reduced to one. The tenses universally called the
perfect and pluperfect middle, until they were lately trans-
ferred by the German grammarians to the active voice^ undex
PHEFACE, V
the denomination of the second perfect and second plu-

perfect, are here retained in the middle voice ; because the
advantage of a more philosophical classification, even if it
be incontestably so, seemed not in this case a sufficient rea-

son for disturbing the nomenclature so generally recognised
by philologists, and for destroying the symmetry which has
hitherto existed in the three voices. The List of Defective
Verbs, with some slight modifications from Matthise, Busby,
and others, was derived from Fischer, by whom unques-
tionable authorities are given for the use of the tenses here
inserted.
But the chief cause of the complaints made by teachers
and learners has always existed in the Syntax, and to pre-
sent the Greek student with one as complete as possible,
was, in all his researches, the great object of the compiler,
in the attainment of which he flatters himself that he has not
wholly failed. His design was, b}^ its copiousness, to adapt
it to the student at any stage of his studies, and accordingly
here, as also elsewhere, the parts first to be learned are
printed in the largest character, and those last of all in the
smallest. The rules and observations, for the ease of the
learner, are expressed as concisely as possible, and those
which the Greek lano;ua2;e has in common with the Latin,
generally in the words of Adam's Latin Grammar ; but
where they would still have been too long to be cited on
every occasion, the inconvenience is obviated, either by
comprising so much only in the principal part as is of most
fi'equent use, 'and after the exemplification subjoining the
remainder, or by dividing the rule into several parts, of
which that only is to be taken which is immediately applica-
ble. Moreover the use of difficult or abstract terms was
studiously avoided, although in so doing it was sometimes
necessary to employ others hardly so precise or expressive.
a*
;
VI PREFACE.
The Prosody also, which next to the Syntax demanded

most attention, is the resuk of much labor and reflection
and, it is beheved, is as full and satisfactory as the limits
allowable to its relative importance will admit of its being
made. The prosodists from whom it was drawn are Maltby,
Leeds, and others of the highest authority, and from it may
be ascertained, in almost every case, whether the doubtful
vowel of any word be long by the usage of the poets. It is
presented in the form which seemed most convenient for
reference ; and that every proper facility might be afforded

to the younger student, derivâtives and compounds, partic-
ularly from less obvious primitives, are often given, for
which the more advanced student may have httle occasion.
Considerable pains likewise have been taken with the

rules for the Accents ; and they will be found to comprise
nearly all those delivered on this subject in much larger
treatises by the earlier grammarians, but which later ones
have been able, with scarcely any loss, greatly to condense,
and which perhaps admit of little further simpli6cation. As
the omission of these marks involves many passages in need-
less obscurities, which often require the aid of adscititious
light, where their presence alone would have rendered the
sense perfectly clear and obvious, it is to be hoped that no
Greek will hereafter be printed without them.
The Dialects it was thought advisable to take from the
Gloucester Greek Grammar, in consequence of the great
and unexpected difficulties experienced in the execution
of the more important parts. They have been altered and
corrected, however, in many places, and the accents inserted
throughout.
The compiler cannot dismiss his performance, without
returning his thanks to those gentlemen who so kindly aided
him in procuring the books necessary to be consulted ; and he

;
PREFACE. Vll
regrets that its appearance should convey so inadequate an

idea of the labor bestowed upon it, particularly to the super-
ficial or casual reader, that it would hardly protect him
against the charge of ostentation, should he acknowledge in
detail the obligations laid upon him. He must, however, be

permitted to express his gratitude for the use he was allowed
to make of the literary treasures of Harvard University, from
the Librarian of which he experienced every kindness con-
sistent wdth the duties of his important charge.
It has long been the opinion of the compiler, and one

which he finds pretty generally to prevail among others,
that a considerable portion of the time usually allotted to the
study of Greek, might be employed to much greater advan-
tage in the writing of exercises in this language ; not such
exercises, indeed, as have been drawO up for ihis purpose by
Neilson and Huntingford, w^hich, from the difficulties they
present, fail altogether of the end they were designed for
but such as, by the simplicity and pertinency of the exam-

ples to be written, by the gradual transition from the easiest
rules of construction to those more difficult, and, above all,
by their not presupposing a knowledge of what has not

already been learned, shall render the progress of the student
more rapid, than any method hitherto devised. Such a vol-
ume he is endeavoring to prepare ; and, as most of the ma-
terials necessary had previously been collected, it is already
in such a state of forwardness, that, should no unforeseen ob-
stacle prevent, it will appeal' not long after the publication
of this Grammar.
Waltbiim, Massachusetts, June, 1830.

PREFACE TO THE SECOND EDITION.
The compiler of this Grammar, by a maturer consideration

of the subject, and by the suggestions of several respectable
teachers, has been enabled in the Second Edition to make
various improvements, which he flatters himself will be founc
considerably to enhance its value.
To render the inflection of words more easy to the under-
standing of the pupil, new declensions of substantives and
adjectives have been inserted, and examples for the exercise
of the learner subjoined to each declension ; transpositions
have been made in the declensions of adjectives, by which
they have been better arranged ; the four conjugations of
baryton verbs have been exhibited at length, through all the
voices, and the contract verbs have been conjugated in a
form better adapted for use ; complete synopses of the mod^^s

and tenses have been given, of the four conjugations of bary-
ton verbs, and of the three forms of contract verbs, and the
synopses of the verbs in have been more conveniently dis-
posed ; and numerous other additions and simplifications have

been interspersed throughout the whole.
The penultimate quantity of polysyllables has been indi-
cated by the usual signs, wherever it might otherwise have
'
been doubtful, that the beginner may be enabled to give
each word its proper accent from the first time he has occa-
sion to pronounce it. This was deemed of so much impor-
tance, that whenever the marks of quantity would have been
excluded by the Greek accents, the latter have been sacri-
PREFACE. IX
ficed without hesitation ; as we have no regard to them in

'
our pronunciation of the language, but observe the same
rules that we do in Latin, in which we accent the penultima
of dissyllables, whether it be long or short, but the penultima
,
of polysyllables only when it is long, and when it is short, the
antepenultima. Of the polysyllables not marked, compara-

tives in lojy, as have the accent on the penultima,
except in writers not Attic ; and the words which have a
short vowel in the penultima, rendered common by a mute
and liquid following, as uduy.ovg, p. 48., are to be accented
on the antepenultima in prose.
The Exercises promised in the Preface to the first edition
have been duly published, and the compiler has the assur-
ance of experienced teachers, that they fully answer the pur-
pose for which they were intended. It is believed that, if
the Grammar be first committed to memory, and a portion

of easy Greek be next read, they may then be written wuth
the greatest profit. Although the Notes appended to the
Exercises refer to the pages of the first edition of the Gram-

mar, which do not correspond with those of the second, yet,
by means of the Table at the end of this volume, they may
be used alike with both editions.
Waltham, Massachusetts, October, 1831.

CONTENTS.
Page
Letters 1
Breathings 3
Accents 4
Marks of Reading 4
Change of Final Syllables on the Meeting of two Words.. 5
Farts of Speech 6
Article 6
Noun 7
Gender 7
Declension 8
First Declension 9
Second Declension 12
Third Declension 14
Gender 15
Genitive 16
Accusative 20
Vocative 21
Dative Plural 21
Contracts 22
[The Ten Declensions] 26
Irregular Nouns—Î. Defective Nouns 34
II. Redundant Nouns 35
Derivative Nouns — I. Patronymics 36
II. Diminutives 37
III.Amplificatives 38
IV. Verbals 38
Adjectives 39
Irregular Adjectives 49
Comparison of Adjectives 50
Irregular Comparison 51
Numerals — Cardinal Numbers 53
Ordinal and other Derivative Numbers 54
Methods of representing Numbers 55
Pronouns 56
Verb 58
Modes 60
Tenses 61
.
CONTUNTSiT xi
I'age
Conjugation 62
Characteristics 63
Active Voice 63
Augment 71
Augment of Compound Verbs 74
Formation of the Tenses in the Active Voice 75
Passive Voice .......<...«........< 80
Formation of the Tenses in the Passive Voice 89
Middle Voice 92
Formation of the Tenses in the Middle Voice 95
Deponent Verbs 97
Contract Verbs , 98
Verbs in ui 103
Irregular Verbs in ui 113
Defective Verbs 125
Impersonal Verbs 138
Particles r.. < . . . 139
Adverbs 139
Comparison of Adverbs , 141
Prepositions 142
Conjunctions 142
SYNTAX 143
Concord 143
Agreement of one Substantive with another 143
an Adjective with a Substantive 144
a Verb with a Nominative 146
Accusative before the Infinitive 147
The same Case after a Verb as before it 149
The Construction of Relatives 150
Agreement of an Adjective, Verb, or Relative, with Sub-
stantives coupled by a Conjunction 152
The Use of the Article 153
as a Pronoun 155
Government 156
Government of Substantives 156
Adjectives taken as Substantives 157
Government of Adjectives 158
Adjectives governing the Genitive 158
Adjectives governing the Dative 161
Government of Verbs 162
Verbs governing the Genitive 162
the Dative
'
166
the Accusative 169
the Dative and Genitive 170
the Accusative and Genitive 170
the Accusative and Dative 171
two Accusatives 172
The Government of Verbs having a Causative Signification 173
The Construction of Passive Verbs 173
Impersonal Verbs 174
the Infinitive 175
Participles 177
—— Verbals in *>• 180
—
XU CONTENTS.
Page
The Construction of Circumstances ...».* t 181
Price 181
Crime and Punishment 181
Matter, and Part taken hold of. 182
Cause, Manner and Instrument 182
Measure and Distance 182
Place 183
Time 183
Part and Circumstance referred to 184
The Construction of Adverbs 1 84
Conjunctions 187
Prepositions 190
Grammatical Figures 203
PROSODY 206
Quantity .'. 206
Syllables long by Nature 206
by Position 207
The Doubtful Vowels in the First and Middle Syllables—
1. Before Vowels and Diphthongs 207
2. Before Single Consonants 209
The Doubtful Vowels in Final Syllables 214
The Quantity of Derivative and Compound Words
1. Derivatives 216
2. Compounds 216
Verse 217
Scanning 217
DiflFerent kinds of Verse— I. Hexameter 217
II. Pentameter 218
III. Iambic 218
iV. Trochaic 219
V. Anapestic 219
VI. Anacreontic 220
*"
VII. Sapphic and A donian 220
Accents 221
Enclitics 226
Dialects 228
Attic Dialect 228
Ionic Dialect 236
Doric Dialect 242
JEoYic Dialect 249
Boeotic Dialect 252
Dialects of the Pronouns 255
Dialects of the Article 257
Dialects of the Verb Substantive iiul 258
DiGAMMA 259
Abbreviations 260
GREEK GRAMMAR.
LETTERS.
The Greek Language is written by means ol

twenty-four letters.
Figure.
;
A LETTERS.
The diiTerent characters for tlie same sound are used indiscriminately,
with the exception of a and c. of which the former is used only at the be-
ginning and in the middle of words, and the latter only at the end. By
some modern editors, however, is used at the end of syllables, when
they form an entire vord, with which another is compounded as, (^Lgiml ,
,
;
c'?(/ too). Also in a vord \\'here the last A'ôwel is cut off, a is retained be-
fore the apostrophe ; as, »;' ^^-,.
/'before ,, c, /, is pronounced like ng in angle ; as, anggelos
*^^, Angchises.
When
sented by
by } or ,
Greek words
c
Sfvijooc Severus.
and y ; as, ,
are written in Latin, y. and
cijcnus.
and sometimes by alone ; as,
are generally repre-
The Latin is expressed in Greek
or 2(, .?,
Servitis
The old Greek alphabet consisted of sixteen letters only, a (i d t
/. Q V, which were sufficient to express all the sounds of the

Greek language. The remaining eight were afterwards added, for the
sake of convenience rather than from necessity.
The divided into seven vowels and

letters are
seventeen consonants.
The vowels are , , short long ; and a, ; ,,
i, 1', doubtful.
The
doubtful vowels are long in some syllables,
short in others, and either long or short in others.
The ancient Greeks used
forJ(iiriTQog,
There are twelve diphthongs

for , t for
HEFOJO
»;, and
for
for
.
;
or on •
as,
six proper, ai,

JEMETPOS
av,
tiy.EV, Gi, ov and six improper,
• a, i], >, ', cot', vi.
All diphthongs end with t or hence these vowels are •
The iota subscript, in the diphthongs n, ,
practised
times by ,
;
,,.
called subjunctive, and the others prepositive.
At is commonly represented in Latin by a;, as,

is not sounded,
but serves only to indicate the derivation of the word. It was

anciently written in the line, and in capital letters this is still
as, Till [, ^'^}
or ndrj.
Fhtedrvs, some-
as, DJuui, Maia ; ti by i long, as, Kti/.oc, JVtIus, sometimes by
e long, as, iW/^'ifiu, Medea ; oi by ce, as,
as AJovnu, Mfisa.
Baiotia y and ov by u long,
,
The
consonants are divided into mutes, semivowels,
and double consonants.
The mutes are nine ;
Three smooth^ , , •
Three middle^ , , •
Three aspirate, , /, ^.
; ;
BREATHINGS. 8
Each smooth mute has corresponding middle its
and aspirate, into each of which it is frequently

changed thus, has for its middle, and
; for
its aspirate.
,
When two mutes come together, the former must be of the
^, ,
same breathing with the latter a smooth must stand before a
;
smooth, a middle before a middle, and an aspirate before an
2^ ^ -, .
aspirate; thus, not tTvndîjV ex-
cept when the same aspirate would be doubled, and therefore,
the into
not
The poets often drop the final vowel of the preposition

before
those letters respectively
/.,
The semivowels
,
,
into y. before
as, y.uy./tvnai for
y.aSdi'vauiv for
;
are five,
,
and into , , d, jt,
y.a?.?.siipw
,
for
^.'
u, v, (>,
,
,
,
and change
u, v, , before
for y.axi~
the four
first of which are also called liquids.
,
.
ip •
as, iyyqacpb) for
The
ischanged into / before /, , I, / into
^^
before , ,«,
and into , , and , before those letters respectively
double consonants are three

for , •
for -
,
'
for
for ,, •
for ,,.
These double letters are universally used instead of their
.
,
corresponding simple ones
for from
as, for ; from •
except where the two simple letters

belong to two different parts of a compound
•
as, not
/,
; '&,
BREATHINGS.
There are two breathings, the smooth or soft ('),
and the rough or aspirate ('), one of which is
placed over every vowel or diphthong beginning a
^
word.
The aspirate breathing has the force of the English h aspi-
rate as, //, historia ; "
; it Homeros. The smooth is
;
4 ACCENTS. MARKS OF READING.
, ^
used where, in modern languages, we begin with a vowel
ego ; omos.
; as,
as, '^
In diphthongs the breathing is placed over the second vowel
except when it is silent ; as,
• "^ .
rate ,.
;
and
as, When
.
g at the beginning of a word have always the aspi-
> is doubled, the former has the
TON was written for

as the soft, and
and finally
.
smooth, and the latter the aspirate as, ;
The ancient mark for the aspirate was H, as in Latin thus, HEKA-
This was afterwards divided, and «i used
as the aspirate. These were next altered to -^ and ^
rounded into their present form, ' and ^
;
The Cohans, who avoided the aspirate, used another sound, similar to
a I? or a %c, to prevent the hiatus occasioned by the meeting of vowels in
different syllables this was called the d/gamma, because its figure re-
^
:
for ianiqa, / ,
sembled two gammas, one above the other, thus, F or f. Thus ftaniqa
for
vespera, ovum, video, &c.
for idot. Hence the Latin
ACCENTS.
There are three accents, the acute (
' ), the
grave, ), and the circumflex (" ).
'
(
The acute stands over one of the three last syl-

lables of a word the grave over the last syllable
;
only and the circumflex over one of the two last.

;
The
circumflex stands only over long vowels and
diphthongs ; the acute and the grave, also over short
vowels.
Words accented on the last syllable are called oxytons or
acutitons ; those not accented on the last syllable, barytons or
gravUons.
MARKS OF READING.
The Greek comma ( ,
) and period ( . ) are the
same the colon ( ), which is not
as the English
; •
distinguished from the semicolon, is a point at the

top of the line and the note of interrogation ( ) is
;
,*
the English semicolon.

The diastole or hypodiastole is a comma, used to
distinguish certain words from others consisting of
the same letters; as, ,^, which, to distinguish it
from oTt, that.

;;
CHANGE OF FINAL SYLLABLES. 5
as, '
The
The
apostrophe denotes that a vowel
for /.
placed over the latter of two
dicBresis is
is cut off;
vowels, to show that they do not form a diphthong

as, , pronounced o-is,
CHANGE OF FINAL SYLLABLES ON THE MEET-

ING OF TWO WORDS.
The Greeks have three methods of preventing the meeting
of vowels in different words by cutting off the last vowel of
;
the former word, by adding a consonant to it, and by drawing

the two words into one.
1. The final vowel of some words is often cut

off when the next word begins with a vowel, and
the omission denoted by an apostrophe ; as,
tleyov for tleyov. If a smooth mute be left
before an aspirate vowel, it is changed into its coN
responding aspirate ; as, a(f ov for ov.
The vowels thus cut off are «, f, i, o, and the diphthongs «

and 01but ttsqI and
'
never, and datives of the third de-
clension seldom lose their final vowel.
The Attics and Dorians sometimes cut off these vowels and
diphthongs at the beginning of words as, for ;
^^ ^.
,
for
2.
verbs of the third person in
Avord begins with a vowel
, ,
tint
,
is added to the dative plural in ai, and to
as,
and i, when the next
tiitivog. Also
;
to tixoai, nt()vai,
In like manner
;. ^ ), &,
f^^/Q'j and
nQOoot,
take c before a
xt, and vv.
vowel as,
and
)•.
;
before an aspirate.
becomes before a smooth vowel,
is often added before a consonant in verse as, Si ; &

3. When
a word ending with a vowel or diph-
thong precedes another beginning with a vowel or
diphthong, they are sometimes drawn into one
1*
6
" PARTS OF SPEECH.
,^ ,^
,
as,
for
£;^ ,
m,
&
for
for
for
avriQ,
for
xai
.
tha,
for
for xal
Some of the most learned critics omit i, when in the former

of the two words thus drawn together, and subscribe it when
£, /^
for xai
for
^,
in the latter, as in the examples above; but others subscribe
it in both cases, writing as well as .
PARTS OF SPEECH.
The parts of speech in Greek are eight, viz.
article, noun, pronoun, verb, participle, adverb,
preposition,and conjunction ; the interjection being
reckoned as an adverb by the Greek grammarians.
The article, noun, pronoun, and participle, are
declined with gender, number, and case.
There are three genders, masculine, feminine, and
neuter.
There are three numbers ; the singular, which
speaks of one ; the plural, which speaks of more
than one ; and the dual, which speaks of two, or a
pair.
The dualnot used in the iEolic dialect any more than in the Latin,
is
which was derived from it } nor is it found in the New Testament, in the
Septuagint, or in the Fathers. It is used most frequently by the Attics,
who, however, often employ the plural instead of it.
There are five cases, nominative, genitive, dative,

accusative, and vocative.
ARTICLE.
The article 6,
the in English.
, , generally answers
When no
English indefinite article a is signified.
a man, or man in general and
declined :
; && to the definite article
article is expressed in
Thus
the man.
Greek, the
It is
means
thus
NOUN.
Singular. Dual. Plural.

. F. . . F. . F. ..
. , ., , ,
G.»,
,
, ,
TTJsj ,
,
.., , ,
' «', G., ?,
, ^, ',
,
. ?, , .
D. Tif, G. D. TO?i' D.
. ', /', .
There no form of the article for the vocative, for is an adverb.
is
The
, ], ,
vith if or annexed to it has the signification of a demon-
article
strative pronoun. The declension remains the same j as,
&c.
i^Se, rode, ,
NOUN.
GENDER.
To
indicate the gender of the noun, use is made of the ar-
ticle for the masculine, for the feminine, and for the
neuter.
The gender of nouns is determined partly by their signifi-
,.
cation, and partly by their termination the following are the :
rules concerning the former those concerning the latter will

;
be given with each declension.

I. The names of male persons or animals, of months, and
rivers, are masculine as, 6 ; 6 ),

.
Exc. The gender of some names of rivers depends on the
^
, ,
termination
Exc.
,•
as,
1.
^^^^, the river Lethe.
;
II. The names of female persons or animals, of trees, coun-

"^, -
,,
tries, islands, and towns, are feminine
Diminutives in
as,
•
are neuter
;
as, from
,,
;
, ,
wife.
, ,Exc.
wild fig-tree
Some
2. Some names
lotcrtree
;
are masculine or feminine

of trees are masculine
cork-tree
cytisus.
;
; 6
as, ,
; as,
cherry-tree
papyrus
;
& \4. ", ,

,
,
0, ^ &LQ,.
Many names
wild olive-tree.
-
Exc. 3. Several names of towns are masculine as,
Others are either masculine or feminine
•
, ]
• ^.
of islands and cities are of both genders
,
is neuter.
;
;
6,
as,
when
III.
ox or cow
Nouns used
the female
; 6 and
is
as masculine
,
spoken of,
when
are
horse or mare.
common
the male, and feminine
; as, and ,
NOUN.
Ohs.
,/,
sexes,
In most names of animals one gender
called the epicene gender ; as,
whether masculine or feminine.
^ is used
wolf,
for
and
both
DECLENSION.
There are three declensions of nouns, correspond-
ing to the three first declensions in Latin.
GENERAL RULES OF DECLENSION.
The iiominative and vocative are mostly the

same in the singular, and always in the dual and
plural.
The dative singular always ends in t, either in
the line, as in the third declension, or subscribed, as
in the firstand second.
The genitive plural always ends in .
The nominative, accusative, and vocative of neu-
ters are alike, and in the plural end in a.
The dual has but two terminations, one for the
nominative, accusative, and vocative, and the other
for the genitive and dative.
View of the Three Declensions.

I. Decl.
N. a,
FIRST DECLENSION. 9
FIRST DECLENSION.
Nouns of first declension end in «, , feminine and in
,
the ;
«?, ^7?» masculine.

muse.
. -,
Singular. Dual. Plural.
,-,
N. a-u^
G. //-/;;, of a
-}^
N.
G. -^
-^
two
of two j;, G.-^
-^ of «;
. -,
to a D. D. 2
D.
A.
V,
-uy, a
-^ A.
V.
-,-u^
to two
two
two
^
S
V. -ui^
to
S
^
, ,
In like manner decline
^
contest, tempest.
^
^
names,
Nouns
., ^^ ^ ^
,
as
in
tongue.
thirst.
viper.
sea.
>«, « pure, and

^ ^^«
contracted, with
-u^
bee.
root.
table.
outer garment.
some proper
make the
^
genitive in «c, and the dative in « •
thus,
friendship.
10 NOUN.
1^ /, honor.
FIRST DECLENSION. 11
,
in
All nouns in
shameless;
as,
geometrician.
^/,
,
, -, )., ,
, .
Also
,
^, ^,
and compounds of
^^, -, S
«•
;,
, ^,
poetical
7»!/)
nouns
«,
,
in
prophet;
ythian ;
^Tl•^ûl^l,;,
make . Nouns in
national names in
make the vocative
But
make « or »?
]^,
as, ^^, and robber.
12 NOUN.
SECOND DECLENSION.
Nouns of the second declension end in og, generally mascu-
line, but sometimes feminine, and ov neuter.
TO ,
SECOND DECLENSION*
hone.
13
N.
Sing.
6-•,
-, ovi'^
Dual,
N. ', ,
Plur.
-,
G.
D. -, ,,
. -'^ ',
N. A. V.
G. D.
-^,
-^
,
olf.
G.
D.
A.
-,
-, ,
iavy
oig,
V. -'^ '. V. -'^ .

In like manner decline ^'^ basket, dish.
j'ooc, understandhig.
14 NOUN.
THIRD DECLENSION. 15
-
;
16 NOUN.
«; -^ ,
Nouns -;, and wc with nouns of qualify
in ^
2.
^,
in
are feminine
persuasion ;
; as,
«c, o)
-ooc,
-oo;^
modesty;
torch; grace:
, sweet-
ness.
Except some adjectives -^ of the common gender,
^^ ^ ^ ^ ^
in
and the following nouns in •
serpent ; f//c,
adder; bug; a certain measure ; 6 weevil
Arc, lion; dolphin; , bird; ,
-, -, , ,
,
,
tiger ; and îc, bank, shore.
3. Nouns in «, , , oo, oô, oc, and with
honey; , -,
city; ,-,
contracts in eug -j](), are neuter; as, io
^», breast;
body;
water ;
wall ;
,,, miracle ; cup ; ^«»,
,,, ,
liver; heart.
Except starling; , lymph ; ulcer;
-, stone; and or head.
There
except
dough.
, , , ,
are no other neuter substantives of this declension,
fire; light ; ear ; and
Those in , therefore, are generally masculine, when they

feminine, when they make it in
make
'
the genitive in
and neuter, when they make it in and
•
.
GENITIVE.
The
genitive of the third declension always ends in , and
,,, , ,
admits of a great variety of formations.
- From the vowels a, t, v, .
a
•
—
—
—
,, ,
,
, ,
pepper.
thing ;
body ;
mustard ;
honey, the only substantive of this

mouth.
thought
gum ;
;
form but there are several neuter adjectives,

;
which may be said, however, to derive their
V — , , ,,
genitive rather from the masculine termination
in .
manner yow, knee, and
tear; mustard. In like
spear ; but
—
•
,, .
these two sometimes take
and
, -,
from the obsolete
— ^,
] Jr/TCj,
] '>), echo.
city ;
Latona;
fiock.
persuasion;
THIRD DECLENSION. 1(7
From the consonants v, g, , , ,

V
', ;,
—
—
aro;
,
,
';, pcean ; 6 ',
having struck, neuter
ciples, which follow their masculine,
Titan.
parti-
sv —
— ,
evog
^ , " ,"
in ,
':, tender, neuters of adjectives
Greek ; month ; ^îQrii',
', ,
— ^,
,
Siren.
shepherd; ^^ harbor;
,
6
intellect.
—
IV
, ^ . nose. The
dolphin; ray ;
nominative of these nouns
qIv,
fre-
ov —
— ,,^, ,- quently ends in
in .
, as, 6
greater, neuters of adjectives
striking, neuters of parti-
,
ciples in o)v.
w — vvog wooden tower and those end-
,
,
;
ing in vv or , as, or
^ ,
—
—
,, ,
,. ,
,
Phorcys, the name of a sea
of verbs in
joining, neuter participles
deity.
,,
fov Plato ; branch ;
——
, '^
poppy,
swallow; cheek;
,, ,
saw.
—
—
,,
,
in ail), as,
, ,
(>,
and
), tendon.
second
êndpho7i. In like man-
ner the present participles of contracted verbs
aorist
honoring.
dragon;
So the present,
active of participles, as,
striking.
first
lion;
future,
—
—
,
,',
of contracted verbs in
^^
, making,
neuter compounds of
from
going
future active of participles
, ,,
and
two-footed.
as,
to
also the present
as,
neuter participles.
strike,
:
^
the second
2*
18 NOUN.
ag
,,
— , ,
—
—
—
idog
idô;
irog
-^
,
^ ,
oqvig^
^^ ^,
;fa?t?,
^^
spot.
'^, bird
hope
a favor.
;
;
Ilagig^ Paris
cord,
;
— ivog ,
^ , ^
7/c, Tti'oc, any.
and
So words
right.
in tg which often
og — sog
——OTog
—
,, ^,
end
,
,
,,
, & ,
ciples.
,
in iv, as,
part ;
icall
oQog, ?nountain
;
dolphin,
having struck, neuter

uvd-og^ flower;
; Up.
parti-
vg
—
— ,
vog
,
,
sog
, , , mouse;
pine.
sharp ; 6
, Jish
sweet.
; 'î
oak;
,
Att. axe; ell.
— military robe ,
, &,
-f]
;
' ,
& stranger.
—
—
—
— ,
,,
vpog . .
, , ^
t]
ciples of verbs in
or
helmet.
shame
, , joining, and the like parti-
?,
Phorcys.
dawn.
,,
— love ;
;
laughter ;
— ,),
,
man
ciples
;
from
standing.
?,
, light
red spot on the legs, occasioned

by being too near the fire, the only word of
as,
; and contracted parti-
from
,
—
—
—
6
,,
,
this form.
,
6 riQcog, rjowoc, hero ;
Trojan.
participles.
--, jackall ;
having struck, and such
,
like
aig
— , ,
,,
dough.
,
meal,
child,
entertainment ;
,,,
^,
uvg — aog ^, old woman,
—
— , key.
,
—
'
comb; hbg, one.
Simdis, a river of Troas
Opus, a city of Greece , -
;
, ^,
;
comely. Likewise the participles, as,
—
—ôg ,
)•,
,, , having been struck,
foot.
or cow ; , skin,
;
^ ,^ ,
20 NOUN.
—
-:
,,^
'
in /Mt, as,
'
tracted from oeig.

tooth and participles of verbs
;
having given.
Opus, and other nouns con-
,.
—
,, &,
olg, ear, is contracted from
,,,
&, sea.
— vdôc earth-worm, helly-worm ;
the name of a city.

—
,,,^,
OTOC happy.
—
quail;
grasshopper
flame;
;,
,,, , trumpet;
—
- ,, ,^
-, ^,
,
, ^
, ,, ,
raven;
phalanx,
breastplate
cup;
changing
;
into
ant
e, flox.
- ^, king
cough ;
;
nail,
night.
claw ;
,, ,
rank.
— ,,
,,,
—;
—
,
Cyclops.
"^, "^, Arab
steel.
visage;
;
storm;
Cinyps, a river of Africa

vein ;
, , ,,,, ,, ,, ,,
;
stair.
Obs. Some "nouns form their genitive from an obsolete

nominative as, from milk;
^,
;
from icoman ; from

water; from filth; Zfvg, Jiog from ^,
and from Jupiter.
, ,, , ,
ACCUSATIVE.
The accusative singular of masculine and feminine nouns

generally ends in « as, Tnuv, • Titan.
,,
^, , ,. , , .
Exc. 1. Nouns in
tive,
bunch of grapes ;
having
change c of the nominative into ^ as,
pure in the geni-
vavv, ship.
>) Also
•
/,
^/«, and
,,
stone, makes But JL•,
skin, commonly
Jupiter, makes
frequently use the regular termination in «, as

or vrâ.
The poets
;
Exc.
tive,
strife;
2.
, -,
make both
Barytons in
«
-
, ,
and
, , ^,
tg
^
and
•
as,
fc, having
^;, ^;,
and
o? impure
helmet.
in the geni-
and
^,
Also the
/,
, ,
compounds of •
as, and
Oedipus; with key. favor, has
but Grace, XaqXzu.
VOCATIVE.
The
Exc,
vocative of nouns generally, and of participles univer-
sally, is like the nominative
barytons in
Adjectives in ,
;
-ovog and -ojtoc,

as, ,.)
,, ,', ,",,,",
1.
,, and nouns in -eog, form the vocative by shortening

the long vowel of the nominative tender
, ^^,
as,
,,
;
compassionate; Seljlojp, better;
^^,
Hector ;
Hon ; mother;
Demosthenes. Also
^,
\476, ''\4,
,
tune; Lvr^,
father;
, , ^,,,man;
;
brother-iji-law
savior, though we
^,
;
Nep-
meet
)\.
, , ,,,, ,
also with
Exc. 2. All nouns in
and barytons in ig, and bary-
tons, contracted nouns, and adjectives in drop to form the ,
,,,,
vocative as, king ;
;
-
,
Simois, a river of Troas;
, , ,'^-/,
serpent;
,, '^,
6, sharp.
bunch of grapes;
,,
Likewise
foot ; and
,mouse;
old looman; ,
tooth.
child: but
Other words
,,
also lose , among the poets; as, Ama-
ryllis, the name of a woman. zooman, makes yvvui, from
king, in addressing a deity, ''«.
,
the obsolete yvvai^, and
-• -^
-,
'^ .
tive
.
,
Exc.
,
dropping
;
,
,
^-ihtr,
as,
Ajax ;
,,-,
3. Barytons in and
from the nominative

and adjectives in
form the vocative by dropping og or
wretched ;
Some
from the geni-
,
comely. So
of these also form the vocative by
as, -'il'ag^
^,
Aia •
,,
g ;
Exc. 4. Feminines in o) and ) form the vocative in oi •

as,
Sappho; t]
^, , daicn.
DATIVE PLURAL.
^ , , /,
The dative plural is formed from the dative singular by
6 ,
inserting
yvnl,
before t
(for
•
as,
the double consonant
savior
being put
;
;
^' ^^( ^,.^

22 NOUN.
for ,
by page 3), vulture.
sake of softness
But ^, ^, »', , are dropped for the
as, ; for from
torch for from ylyug,
^ ^
;
giant.
Words ending
singular as,
been struck.
; ^
,,
is
^
Except , ^changed
^
^ , ^,
in c after a
into •
diphthong add
horseman ;
comb;
as,
t to the nominative
having
. , , .^ ,
runner; son; otic, ear; foot
which are regular from
, . , ,, , , ^
three, makes
,, .
Syncopated nouns in make the dative in «at as, •
father, Also 6 star; 6 ^
lamb But
,
; son. belly ^
makes
, hand, makes from the poetic .
Contracts of the Third Declension.
Contracted nouns of the third declension are very numerous,
and are divided into five forms.
I. Nouns in and ,, og, are contracted in all the cases

where two vowels meet.
^-,
Sing.
, Dual.
galley.
-, , .
Plur.
N.
G. -,
-, ,
^
ovg, . . V. -, -, , G. >,
D.
. -, ,
-. G. D. -, . .-,
-,
-, ,. olf.
D.
V.
, wall.
V.
. -,
-, ,,
Sing.
. . V.
Dual.
-, , -, ,,
-, .
Plur.
-, . .. -,
G. G.
D.-,
. -, -, D.
-. G. D.
-, ,.
V.
&,
Obs. 1. Proper names have sometimes the accusative and
vocative according to the
'^, first declension ,
, '^. ; as,
THIRD DECLENSION. •23
Obs. 2. Proper names in are doubly contracted ; thus,
. -,
-^
1st Contraction.
^
2d Contraction.
?,
. -^
G.
D. ^
QaL•Bf'^
,,
V."-^ , iu^
.
Obs. 3. The termination «,
, ,.
contracted into «, and not into
•
when preceded by
•
as, ^,
a vowel,
and ^ is
II. Nouns in ; and contract u, , , of the singular and

plural, into *.
b, serpent.
24 NOUN.
TO ^ horn.
Sing.
^-,
N.
G. '^-?, (by syncope)
D. -UTt^
-,
-. (by crasis) -;,
A. -('?,
V. -uc.
Dual.
'-,
. . V.
G. D. -, -are,
Plur.
. -,
G.
-,
. -^
D.
xeQ-ccjo)v,
V.-^
26 NOUiV.
singular, and the dative plural, ^- inserting , because g is

never immediately preceded by r.
Sing, Sing.
N. d --^ . '-,
G. ^^-;, S^vyuj-oog^ G.-;, -,
D. ^^-^ -&(-, D.-, -,
. -^ ^-.
^-. &-,
. -^-,
V. V. '-.
. . V.
G. D.
--, Dual.
--, ^-^
-)^-.
. . V.
-, -,
G. D.
Dual.
-,
^-, --,
'-^ Plur.
. -^ ~^
-
Plur.
,
G.^-
---, G.-)^ -^
D.
. -'-, ^-,
--^ -&-.
D.
. -^
-:. -.
af-uoui
V.
, ,, ,^, V.
, ^,
After this manner also lamb, and ,
}, dog, are syncopated, the latter dropping in
all the cases. To these may be joined father,
, , , ,
mother, and belly; but they are not syncopated in
the accusative singular, and the genitive and accusative plural,
to distinguish them from one's native country,
matrix, and bottom of a vessel, of the first declen-
sion. differs
VL in the dative plural.
from and by making (^-
*„* [The old Greek Grammarians made ten declensions, five of simple,
and of contracted nouns. Of these declensions the four first are pari-
five
syVabic, or have an equal number of syllables in all the cases the rest are;
imparisyllabic, or have a greater number of syllables in the oblique cases

than in the nominative.
I. SIMPLES.
FIRST DECLENSION.
Nouns of the first declension of simples end in , -, masculine.
.
gen.
^• ,
Some nouns
and
in
JTi'Su'/o{>ov ,
[the ten declensions.]
•, .
make
\>^
Some keep a exclusively
gen.
in a were the Doric form.
•
; as,
gen.
gen.
27
the genitive in a as well as ov as, ITvSic/vQug,
',
•
gen. nuTQuXotov and tiutqw

Bofjoag, gen.
•
These genitives
2S [the ten declensions.]
Obs. 1. A vowel is called pure, when it immediately follows a vowel or

diphthong, with which it is not mixed or united in sound.
Obs. 2. The
ancient Latins followed this manner of making the geni-
tives in as ; terras, escas, Latonas, for terree, esccB, Latonce.
as, Pater-
familias continued always in use.
, Dual.
hoTlOr.
Plur.
N.
G.
-,
-, . . V. -.
. -,
-,
D.
A.
-,
-, G. D. -.
G.
D.-,
. -,
V. •. . -.
Some nouns of the second declension are contracted, by dropping the
vowel preceding the termination a, t]• except ta not preceded by a vowel
q, which is contracted into ij thus, •
, a,
Sing.
mina. i(yia, ,
Sing•.
wool. ,, Sing.
earth.
. -,
-, , a, .
G.
ip-fa,
-, , a, N,
G.
-,
-, ,,
-,
-, a, D. ig-ia, a, D• y-i«;
-, , &C. V>
-, ,, &e.
.
A. ip-iav, av, A.
,
,
, , iceasel.
Sing-.
V. ip-ia, a, &C.
. -6,
,
Sing.
V. -,
simplicity.
,
. \-, , ,
G. \-, , '-, ,
D. \-, ,
. -,
,
G.
D. -,
. -, ,
ig,
V. -, , &C. V. \-, &C. ,
THIRD DECLENSION.
Nouns of the third declension of simples end in o?, generally masculine,
but sometimes feminine, and ov neuter.
h \6, word, speech.

Sing. Dual. Plur-
N. \6-, N. \-,
G. \-, N. A. V. \:, G. \-,
\-, \-,
D.
A.
V.
\-,
-.
G. D. -. D.
A.
V.
^-,
\-.
vocative like the nominative ; as,

heus tu.
,
Obs. In a few instances the common dialect, like the Attic, makes the
, whence the Latin d Deus ; and
rb \, wood.
Sing. Dual. Plur.
\-, N. \-,
N.
G.
D.
^-,
-, N. A. V. \-, G.
D.
-,
-,
A. ^v\-ov, G. D. '\-. A. |'-,
V. \b\-ov. V. \•.
[the ten declensions.] 29
Some nouns of tlie third declension are contracted, by changing fo, oo,
into Of, and ea, ou, into and dropping t and before a long vowel or
,
'a,
diphthong.
bone.
Plur.
-, Sinff. Dual.
. -,
-, ,
N.
G.-, ,,
-,
oTiv,
. . V. -, -,
Ct. ,
,
. -, ,
D.
V.-, .
G. D. -, D.
. -, ,
V.-(, .
, understanding.
Dual. .
Sing.
.
G.
-6,,
-, , . . V. -6, ,
. -6, 7,
G. -6, ,
, . -, ,
-, . . -. ,
D. v-(<Cf),
. -, •, G. D.
, ,,.
So
V. -(5, .
compounds &c. Also ,
V. -6, .
stream; ,-
,.
its
voyage; doicn ; 6
,
skin; with their compounds. But the
neuter plural in a of compounds remains uncontracted ; as, si'roa,
Even in the genitive we rather say , .,
than '',
To the contracted of this form may
the dative only, which ends in
triptots) diminutives in
&c.
and (with more propriety than to the

as, 6 Jiovvg, •
Kauvg,
•
"
be referred, differing in
.
Sing.
. ^-, .
-,
-,
G.
.^
D.
-.
V.
-orv,
30
-,Sing.
,
Dual.
hall.
Plur.
-»^
.
G.
-^ -, . . V. -, .
G.-,
-,
D.
. -biVf G. J), -, . -,
D.
-).
V.
Obs. 1.
-ur.
There is one neuter in , viz.. ro , V.
>, debt.
,
, , . , ,'-&.
Obs. 2. The Attics frequently omit
So
in the accusative ; as,
Sometimes in the nominative; as,
TO ctytlQw, for uyt'i^wv.
,
Obs. 3. The Attics often decUne after this form words
belong to the fifth declension; as,
vrise for from , ' which olher-
,
, .
for from • and the later Greeks decline words in
which belong to the fourth, according to the fifth declension ; as,
for from
FIFTH DECLENSION.
Nouns belonging to the fifth declension of simples end in a,
neuter, and ,, -, of genders, and increase in the genitive.
,
v, q, all
savior.
-
6
N.
(
Sing.
-, . . V.
Dual.
-, . -,
-,
Plur.
G.
D. -,
-, -.
G.
-,
. -,
D.
A.
V. -. G. D.
V.-.
rb , body.
. -,
-,
Sing.
..
Dual.
-, -,
Plur.
-,
G.
D.-,
. -,
V.
-. -,
-,
-. G. D.
-.
V.
b , pcean.
.
Sing.
-aVf
-, ..
Dual.
-, . -,
-,
Plur.
G.
D.
Ttai
-,
nai-avi,
V.
-.
G.
-,
. -,
D.
.
-. G. D.
-.
V.
Sing.
, Dual.
storm.
V.
'-, Plur.
•
G.
«-, -,
-, .. V. -, .
G.\-,
/-,
-, . -,
D.
D.
. G. D. \-. V.\-.
[the ten declensions.] 31
32
'
fir'iTQa, matrix, and
sion. differs
?,
^
accusative plural, to distinguish them from
/, ,
bottom of a vessel,
from and
,»^
by
one's native country,
the second declen-
making in the
dative plural.
For the formation of the genitive, accusative, and vocative singular,
and dative plural, of this declension, see pages 16—22.
II. CONTRACTS.
FIRST DECLENSION.
- masculine and femi-
,
Nouns of the first declension of contracts end in
nine, and £c, , neuter.
galley.
34 NOUN.
Obs. 1. The dual and plural are formed like nouns in of the third of
the simples.
Obs. 2. The only nouns in
,, ,.
of this form are and 7], and the
use of these scarcely extends beyond the singular.
Obs. 3. In the same manner are declined the Attic farms in for
-otog as,
'
for
FIFTH DECLENSION.
Nouns of the fifth declension of contracts end in ag pure and qa?, and
are of the neuter gender.
rb , horn.
JM.
G.
D.
-,
Ktp
-,
-,
(by syncope) -,
-, (by crasis) -,
^
.
V.
-,
-.
-tf,
.. V.
G. D.
-,
-,
Dual.
-,
-, -,
-.
. -,
-, -,
Plur.
-, -,
-,
G.
D.-,
. -, -, -,
V.-, -, -. ] *^*
IRREGULAR NOUNS.
Irregular nouns may be divided into two classes, defective
and redundant.
I. DEFECTIVE NOUNS.
The following are indeclinable the names of the letters of
the alphabet nouns shortened by apocope, as
; for
;
^
-^ and some foreign names, as
or for TO •
,
fates
^
Some have only one case, as ?5
gods.
gift ; ai ),
^ --,
;
Some are used in two cases only, as Ug, ibv Itv, Hon
,. ,, ,, ,
oi from cpdôteg, from
a sort of cake.
The following neuters have the nominative, accusative, and
vocative singular only ;
ovuq,
IRREGULAR NOUNS. 35
.^
^.
Some have no
nvQ, and others the sense.
The following have no singular; ju
trade icinds ; the names of festivals, as,
feast of Bacchus; and some names of cities, as,
plural,
known by
entrails; ol
ui
Jiopvata^
as o, uriQ, t)
,
,, j'ij,
^^
II. REDUNDANT NOUNS.
; '^ ;),/,
1. Some nouns have different terminations in the
', nomina-
, ,'
tive;
,
and ^,
;,
and
as, jVojaijC and
and
and ^
and
and , and
6
^^,
'-
;, , ';.
1^
, , and Nouns ^,
', ^,
r]
] &LC. in ^'o;^
.
in particular, are declined by the Attics in
for ) So ]
,
for
ov; •
as,
for
;^
Frequently a
oblique case of the old form
^-,
•
-;,
,
;,
), ;, ;,
•
;,
new form of
,
and
,-, &. ;
the nominative
as,
and
and
';
, arises from
,
In like manner
and
^-
an
qrt-
,'^ ^;^ whence

-;^ ^^ ^;.
the dative plural •
tive/, dative plural

a new nominative
So from the accusa-
-,
2.
;^ ;
has arisen.
; ; , ^ ,;^
tive
; ^
; '"^;,"_-4,''\^;
;
Some admit
as,
different inflections from the
and
"'^^
•
];,
;,
same nomina-
and ).~
andTO ^;,
;• ;
•
and •
;,
^; ;^ ^
and ;^ o/ou, and
:,
• •
(^; ;^
- •
^;^
and
-, ^
and
;; . ;;
• 6 and
;^ •
>'o?c, • and •
;^ and 6; •
and •
go)c, and :: • ?'
'/'; and •
,^^?, 7]'; and ^'; ^;, •
]
^^(o;, -;, and ^;. "
and all compounds
,^
of nov; make and Some nouns in /,; are declined
'^ ^;
after the first and third declension in the accusative and voca-
tive thus,
; of tiie third declension makes
after the first.

after the third, and *' ,•^'
,,, ;
3. Some
are regularly declined, and have besides, in the
^,
natives; as, viod,
from
and ;,
;
from
•
^
oblique cases, other forms, which descend from obsolete nomi-
also ;^
and from
;^
;.
86 NOUN.
^ ,, ^ • , ,,
, ,.,
Likewise
,
from
<5
•
and
,,
and
from
from ?| •
and
)|
,
,, , ., , ,
-/;
plural
and
•
and
In the same manner
from
and
from
from
from
and
dative
Some nouns, without having two forms in use in any case,

•
^
from /g •
and
^^',
•
^/,
from
and
,, ,, ,,^
borrow their oblique cases from obsolete nominatives as, ;
TO from from • •
from from^« • •
&,
VOC. Zev, makes ^,
Jit, Jlu, from and ^,
from Zrji'.
A'aCc, Ionic ,, , , , .(, ,makes, in the sing., vavv, vav,
and in the plur.,
,, ,, From
, ,, , , , , , .
the
Ionics have, in the sing., and and in
the plur., •
also in the sing., gen.
ace. and in the plur., nom. gen. ace.
,
4.
plural.
Masculine
-a.
Some have
The
different genders in the singular
and neuter in the plural

in the singular,
following are commonly added, but they some-
times occur in the neuter singular; -• -,
and
^-, -
-in the
-,
•
-.
. Masculine
plural ; -,
-, -
in the
-ol and -a
singular, masculine
•
-,
-, -
and neuter
and - d •
--,
-,
in the
-ol
and -a
and -a
and -u
'
•
-,
&-,
and -«
-ol and -a
-nl and -a
•
'
-, --,
and -a
-ol and -"
-ol and -a •
•
-,
•
-, -oi
-ot,
-oi
-, --
and -.
-,
The following are
and
and
-a
-«.
•
-, more rare
-ol and -a
in
•
the neuter plural
-, - and -« *
Feminine in the singular, feminine and neuter in the plural

&-, - and -.
DERIVATIVE NOUNS.
I. PATRONYMICS.
Masculine patronymics are derived from the genitive
,, .
1.
singular of their primitives, by changing the termination into
- or
If the primitive be of the first declension, or in
-. ", -,
the second, the change is into
•
as,
pure of
"
-, •
' ", -,
-^
- ,
DERIVATIVE NOUNS. 37
But when the penultima of the genitive is long, of whatever
',
declension it be, the change is into as,
,
•
':;,''-^ -}^;.
-. ,
'
Under every other circumstance, the change

•
as, 6 jflan-ov, ^- •
6
is always into
NiaxoQ-og^
for
The
; /;, for ,
Ionics form their patronymics in
from
from"T^^«-\
'
2. Feminine patronymics end in Ig,

The vEolics in
^, or
'.
,
;
lotv •
, .
•
as,
as,
.
'
-
-,
Those in I; and u; are formed from their masculines by
'^ ;, cast-
ing ?/ •
as,
Those in 7/tc, from the nominative of the primitives, by
•
^
,, ,'
-
•
changing the termination into ?//; as, 6 •
6 )^, Kuduiîg.
Those
;, ,
o; impure,
in
.
', from nominatives of the second declension
and of the third in fv; as, 'Sixtafug,
'
in
•
,
•
Those
in o;,
ceded by
from nominatives of the second declension
in
and of the third in oyr, when these terminations are pre-
t or i-»
•
as, , • ^^
- ^ ^^ : , , -
^
II. DIMINUTIVES.
Masculine diminutives end in «c, nunnXag, from
1.
•
,
;
;^;^
from from
,
• •
from from •
Dor. for
from
^
from
;
• •
). <&>»', •
from
';
;,
from
, ;^
from^
2. Feminine diminutives end in «c,
rrltfo;
trâo;
i/H/, from
•
', from
from
•
from "
•
•
, 7(;.
&' ^;^
(
\
3. Neuter diminutives end in lor, from 6
^
•
fiOi', ayyelov from «jjo^
,
atoy, yvruior from yvvii^ • •
. ^
i^
from yij from • •
from eldo;' from , ]

^
;•
, .. One
from
One primitive has sometimes a variety of diminutives as,
from is derived
diminutive
comes
sometimes generates
,^ , another
',
; as,
;
from
4
38 NOUN.
III. AMPLIFICATIVES.
, }, ,
Amplificatives increase the signification of their primitives,
, ,,
and generally import something contemptible in the person.
;^They end in
head, from
•
having a large belli/,
•
over-rich, from
current, especially of lava, from QOog.
IV. VERBALS
Are generally formed by casting off the augment of their

primitives, and changing the termination,
in the rst person of the perfect passive,
, as TO
into
, — ^^ ^
i
into
ADJECTIVE. 39
in the first person of the perfect middle,
as
— )•^
.
. from
—
*"^^ ^ — ^/
— . —
—
Xiloya.
,
few are formed from other tenses ; as,
?, from the present •
.
•
from the perfect
^-
^
-^-^^ from the first aorist
from the second aorist
•
ADJECTIVES.
Adjectives are declined like substantives.
Some adjectives have different terminations for
all the three genders some have one for the mas-
;
culine and feminine, and another for the neuter

others have only one for all the genders.
I. Adjectives of three terminations end in

M.
40 ADJECTIVE.
Among these terminations are included those of

participles, the last seven being peculiar to them.
In adjectives of three terminations, all feminines

are of the first declension; all masculines in og,
Avith their neuters in ov, of the second ; and all
other masculines and neuters, of the third.
^
^
^ smooth.
like.
easy.
DECLENSION.
^
^ small.
hard.
manifest.
41
Some adjectives in eog, , ,

-, ,,
and oog, 6, gov, are con-
-,
tracted
-, ,
as,
into ovg,
tj, ovv •
(,
,ovv • as,
likewise some in
oj^ silver, -,,, .,
?,
into
^«, into
golden, into
u, •
^.-;, , ,
Sing. Dual.
-,
-, , ,
, , . . V.
G.
^,
-, , , r^g,
D.
-,
. -, ^ ,
'],
-^,
^,
\
-,
-, ,, ,
.
-, , .
42 ADJECTIVE.
^
&,
,
,
^
,
deep,
heavy,
slow.
sweet. ,
6^
broad,
half,
sharp,
swift.
, ,
Adjectives of this termination, in the poets, often make the accusative
singular in instead of vr as, tvQia II. '. 291.
,
•
Sometimes they are nsed as common ; as, ijdvg Odys. '. 369.
-
.-,
G.
).-,
.-,
, , -,
,
, ,
\.- , . .
.
, ,
^.[-, , ^
.-
Sing.
^
,
, .).-- .-, , ,
or
).-,
],
, , .-, , .
,
,,
, ,
graceful.
Dual.
. V.
Plur.
,
/,
-6,
hairy.
rocky.
flowery.
,
, snowy,
shady.
mouldy.
, ,, ,, ,
,,
From adjectives declined after this form arise several con-
,,
tracts,
[,
into
, ?, .
being contracted into -^c,
honored.
thus,
,
•
,
and
,
full of honey.
. -,
-, ,
Sing.
-, ^,,,
r^v,
-,
-, ,
, ,
,
,
Sing.
--,,,.,
-,
G. G.
],
D.
-, '^] , D.
. ,
-
..
V. -^ or if, \, . V. or ,
... -, , ".
-^, ,
, ...
Dual
, . Dual.
G.D.
. -, ,
^' ,, -,
, -,
Plur.
,
,
, ,
,
G.O.
.
Plur.
,
-, , . - , .
G.
D.
.
-},
-, ,,
, , -,
-, ,,
,
, G,
D.
.
V. V. ,
DECLENSION. 4$
^ black. ?, all*
Sing.
,
Sing.^
-^ ^ ^
,
. (/^-,
'^ aiva^ . 7-?,
7-^ ^ ^
av
^ ^.
G. G.
),
~^ «^*'/?» -,
. -,
D.
,
]^
-J
.
V. -^ aiva^ V. 7-?, , ^ OLV.
. . V. /'-',
G. D.
. '^
-
^ ,, ... -, ,
^
^
, ,
Dual.
.
. -^ ,^ ^
^
ave,
G. D. 7-'>',
Dual.
^ -^ ^ ^
Plur. Plur.
G.-^
-, ^ ^
,
«tyat,
G.
, -^ ^ ^ •^ ^
^^
D. D. -., ^?, ^,
-, ^ . . -^ .
, , ,
V. V.
In like manner decline ?., In like manner decline several
wretched, and some compounds, as compounds, as, arcag, and
all black, very participles in ag, aaa, av, the only
miserable, the only other examples other words declined after this form.
of this form.
/', willing. , tender.
N.
G.
D.
- ,, ,,
-',
-'»,
Sinsf.
«, ,
ovarj,
N.
G.
D.
-,
-,
-,
-, ,
^, ,
Sing.
,
,,
..
î^Jj,
A. kx-OVT<X, A.
V. -'. V. -, . etva,
... - ,
, ,.
G. D. kx-ovTOiVj
Dual.
/'Tf, N.A.V.
G.D. ^, ,
-, , ,.
Dual.
. -, , , -, ,
-, , , ,
Plur. Plur.
, -^ ^^ ,
. -^?, , .
G.
D. ,
/, .
-5/,
N.
G.
D.
A.
-,
-, ,
,
-. . ., ,
ing,
V.
So decline
and
,
-oi'rfc,
or «,
participles of the present, form.
first future, and second aorist active.
unwill-
V.
There is no other example of this

44 ADJECTIVE.
^^ ,
having been struck. having given.
&-^ ,
'-^
N.
^ ^ , ,
^ ,
Sing.
^
, kv, N.
Sing.
. ^-, ,
G.
'-,^
D. ^ ,
., ^ ^
}, , ^"/??
G.
D.
--^ , .
V. ^ . V. ^
... •-^ ^ , ... , , ^

)•-^ ^ .
G.D.
Dual.
.^ ^ ^
G.D. ^,. Dual.
. --^ ^ ^
--)
G.
--, ,
^
. ^-, , ,
',
^,
,
Plur.
^
.^ , ^
, )^
^ G. ,
^
Plur.
D.
'-^ ^ .
V. ,^.
In this manner are declined parti-
D.
V.
ciples of the first and second aorist ciples of verbs in from primitives
passive, and of verbs in
primitives in.
from in .
-;^ joining. ^
going to strike.
-, ,
,
N.
^ -,
--}, ^
Sing.
-^ , ', N.
Sing.
,
ovv,
-^ ], ^ . -, ]^ ^
G. G.
. -^ , . -^
D.
-, , . -), , ^.
D.
^
V.
... -, ^ ^ ... -, ^ ^
-^ ^.
G.D.
. -, ^^ ^
-, ,
Dual.
Plur.
V.
G.D.
.
-
- ,.
,,
-^ ^ ,
Dual.
Plur.
^
G.
D.
V.
-,
. -, , ^
-, , .
/c, *,
G.
D.
.
V.
-^
-, ^ ^
,
-^ , .
^
In this manner are declined parti- In this manner are declined parti-
ciples of verbs in from primitives ciples of the second future active,
in . and of the present of contracted
verbs in and .
DECLENSION. 45
/', honoring. ?, having struck.
.
-'^ ,
^ ^
, -?,
-,
Tt//-o)i'j,
Sing.
,, N.
Sing.
og,
G.
-',
D. -,
. -,
/, ??, ^-,
G.
D. ort,
.
, -, , ,
-ijivja, , »', viuv,
V.
-^ ^
.
,
/,«-'~/',
...^-, , ^, . . -,
../-'', ^ .
-,
^^,.
Dual.
6,
Plur.
>'. V.
.
V.
G. D. -
-,
,
-, , ,
Dual.
Plur.
/,
*,
6?.
-^ ^ ,
G.
. -)^ ?, ,
D.
, G.
-, ^ ^
. -?, /?, ,
D.
1
^(^ ^ ,
V.
this manner are declined the
V. -^ ^ .
present participles of contracted ciples of the perfect active and mid-
verbs in . Idle.
k(, standing.
, . -?, ^ ,
Sing. Dual. Plur.
N.
-;, , , -, . , -,)^
-;, ..
--, ^.
, ?, V.
. -, ',, ^-, ^ . ^-,, ,

G.
D.-, , »/, G. D.
G.
D.
V.-, , ,. -?, ^, . ,. V.
,
,,.
This word, and several others declined in the same manner, as
(, are participles of the perfect active, from which the Ionics drop ,
generally shortening the penultima, and which are afterwards contracted ;
thus,
II. Adjectives of two terminations end in
M. F. N.
•
, f •
•
, '
,
•
L
'
46
-^,
'^,
?,
exact,
pure.
,
DECLENSION.
&,
-,
for Jive years.
thorny.
47
-^
-,
safe, secure,
of noble
,
birth. Sêoeidiig,
happy.
stony, stone-like.
godlike.
-'^
N.
G. -^
-,
Sing.
ov,
N. A. V.
Dual.
-^ -,
-. -,
N.
G. -, Plur.
ova^
D.
A.
V.
-,
-. ov G. D.
D.
A.
V. -, ova^
ova.
avalfiwv,
)^
Comparatives in
bloodless.
neighboring.
are declined like
,
^^
but they
compassionate.
comely.
syncopate and contract the accusative singular of the common

gender, and the nominative, accusative, and vocative plural of
all genders ;thus,
^ greater.
-^ ^, Plur.
N.
G. -^
-,
, ova, oa,
. -^ , , ^ ^ ,
D.
V.'^ , , . ?, ova,
), better.
, ^
agreeable.
more beautiful.
43 ADJECTIVE.
&^ two-footed.
. -,
-.,
^ . . -, . -^
Sing.
-^ ^ Dual. Pluf.
G.
D.
. -
-^ ^
. -&,, .
-.
&L•
-^
. -^ ,
-, . G. D.
V. G.
D.
V.
Adjectives in which they are

are declined after the substantives of
compounded. Thus, ow, toothless, G. -,
D. -,
A. -oîa,
,
cevod-ovg,
-,
ovv. Contracted compounds of nouns of the second declension, thus;
,
ovv, favorably disposed, G, -ov, D. -, A. -ovv, V. -ov, ovv.
the same manner those of as &c.
In
COMPARISON. 49
uelyu;^ cvcrfiuw'ing.
. -,
Sing.
uv
Dual.
N.
-^ ^ Plur.
aeli>-avTsg^
G.
D.
(ieiV-ayroc,
aelf-uyri,
N. A. V. aeli''UVTe^ G.
D. -, ^
-^
A. aeir-avTu^
V. ueb'-up.
av^ G. D.
In like manner decline ^

Adjectives of one termination are the cardinal
III.
aeii'-ai'ioiy. A.
V.
iinwearied.
^-, uvtu.
numbers above ztoaautg, four.

Other adjectives of one termination are masculine and femi-
nine only.
^
evoiv^ quick- scented.
as, fatherless ;
jectives in >/i
Such
-;
and ot;
unknown, also that docs not
are,
stantives, which remain unchanged as,
2. Those derived
know
as,
^-
1. Adjectives
from and
;
of the same mother. 3. Ad-
except
•
^^
compounded
unsubdued ; uj'i'ibc,
poor^ which ,
^ ,
./.^ long-handed
Avith sub-
,
;
'
,
is always masculine.
same age;
as,
}, 4. Adjectives in I and
lofty.
fugitive ;
as, '•^» of the
5. Adjectives in u; -udog and i:
weak, cowardly, most of which,
-; '
however, are feminine only.

Some are also neuter, except in the nominative and accusa-
tive as, (foiiixai
; ^^,
Eurip. Some are masculine only;
as, /£0f"', old, and adjectives in «? and
sion, yt't^faSug, noble;
The
jective ;
-^, of the first declen-
thus, for the neuter of uyi'iuz,

voluntary.
•;
neuter, which is deficient, is expressed by another ad-
is used.
; ;
vocative, masculine
and
IRREGULAR ADJECTIVES.
have only the nominative, accusative, and
and neuter, of the singular, and borrow
the other cases from the obsolete ?/, op, and )^;, -^.^
f), of
, '
thus,
great, ;, much.
-,,, ,,
, , ^
Sing. Sing.
N. . no/./rj,
7-, , ,
., •^
G.
D.
^
V. ,. '<., 1/, ,
/^f'/'",
G.
D.
V.
.
-,
^
,
7>', '^ 7",
).^,
-JJ,
.
bO
, ^^^,
COMPARISON.
,
tydotoz,
51
-
graceful, •
'6^(), ()6,
renowned,
{)68(), ()6 • strong,
.
• wise, aocpdoTtooz,
•
xaâQog, pure, âuaQcoTnQog,
Obs. Some adjectives in o^, particularly in the Attic writers,

change og into at, ec, or ig as, '
:^
in the midst, ueauheoo;^
;^ ^ôvaog' ;,
Some in
•
«to,
uq&oi'og, witliout envy, liberal, abundant, aqd-o-
drop oi* as,

Xulng^ loquacious, XuXlajeoog,
ancient, rtuXaljeqog^ naluiTUTog.
;.
,
2.
,
^', (), , ,
^
Some
,
terminations into uov and
and superlative
, >. ,^,
^, base,
; as, i]dvg, sweet,
.
adjectives in vg and qog change these
for the comparative
So
•
^
&c.,
The form rtQog and how-
ever, is also used in all these adjectives, and always
in the comparative of n()topvQ, old, and orAvg, swift,
which sometimes have and in
the superlative.
- Obs. Some comparatives in

ceding consonant, into
'
for
should properly be
or
)^&.
ylvy.vg, sweet,
•
jw/vg^ stoift,
for
loif
•
change the
as, Bud-yg^
-- •
t,
,
deep,
ila/vg^
for
with the pre-
little,
since
for
small,
it
IRREGULAR COMPARISON.
^
^
, , ^
ayrx-d-OTaTog.
aog.
ayuddg^ good,
^
'^
,
),
\
\
J
xgariaTog.
, ^
^
.),
>
j
xog.
hady
)
.
log.
52
,
^ . ,
,
ADJECTIVE.
^ .
,
,
fair, ^
,
(
long,
, .
\
,
great,
small,
\ ,
^
^ ,
.
^
, ^ ,
^
,
few,
,
,
many,
\
^ .
.
^ .
easy,
agreeable,
^ friendly.
\
\ )',
,
,,
, .
. ,
,
. , .
, .
.
Comparisons from the Comparative Degree.
, ^'.
. -.
(,
. , .
From the Superlative.
,,
From Substantives,
.
NUMERALS. 53
,
avu>, ,
.
,
,
,
From Adverbs.
,
.
,
,
iyyvs,
,
,
,
,.
,
npd,
54 ADJECTIVE*
The cardinal numbers are
^
,
Sho,
,
one.
,
inraj
.
,
,
,
,
twia,
,
,
,,
,
(
,
, , &c.
NUMERALS. 55
Obs. Here also in compound numbers

,
the smaller number usually pre-
^ ,
cedes with xuL, or follows without it, as, or
TQiaxoOTOg.
2. The numeral
, adverbs, which answer to the question How
many
four
times? are
times ) &L•C.
once; ;^ twice; thrice;
, ,
3.
much
5.
day?
;
The
multiplicative numbers are
The
are
,;^ thrice as much, &c.
simple;
double, or two-fold ; iqinlov;^ triple, or threefold, &/C.
4. The proportionals, or those which express how
times more one thing than another, are
on the second day ;

is twice as
numerals which answer to the question On what

on the third
,
,
many
day, &/C.
-,
6. The numbers
as , ,,, unity
as substantives are
;
all formed in
&c.
, gen.
METHODS OF REPRESENTING NUMBERS.

1. The Greeks represented numbers by the letters of the alphabet,
which purpose were divided into three classes, the first expressintr
for this
•
90 by
was placed over the numeral
Units.
^7 , called -
the class of units, the second that of tens, and the third that of hundreds.
But as each class contained only eight letters, 6 was denoted by , called
and 900 by ^, called
letters in order to distinguish
Tens.
. them.
A mark
Hundreds.
a ' 100.
& 200.
' 300.
' 400.
<p' 500.
' 600.
' 700.
w' 800.
^' 900.
Thousands were expressed by writing the mark under the

, 700,000 ' letters ; thus,
,, .
is 1,000 ;
/t, 40,000 ; ; 1830.
,
,,
2. Another method consisted in denoting 1 by J, 5 by 10 by J, 100
by H, 1,000 by X, and 10,000 by M, these letters being respectively the
initialsof "' Ja for Jiy.a, and Each
of these letters, with the exception of 77, may be repeated four times
thus, I II I, 4 ; J J J, 30 20,000 ; MM, ; JJII, 22. When they are en-
closed in a IT, their value is five times greater; thus, X^, 50; [x], 5,000;
:E[JT,55; ^,60.
3. Sometimes numbers were represented by the letters according to
their alphabetical order so that denoted 1 , 2; and , 24.
;
;
56 PRONOUN.
PRONOUNS.
PERSONAL. RELATIVE.
^/, 1 8g, t), o, who.
, thou;
ol, of him. DEMONSTRATIVE.
-, ,,, sAe, 2V ;
-, ,
POSSESSIVE.
, ,,,,
^/.?, ,
,
7^, ;
^,
, ,-,,, my ^ .
bv, )
; ^ ~ } this,
thy ;
j
-,
-,
or oy, his ;
INDEFINITE.
-,
-,
a, of, our,
, oy, your,
of US two;
of you two;
,
,, any ;
some one.
,
a, ov, our ;
a, ov, your ;
-,
oj-k, , l>v,
a, ov,
>
j
RECIPROCAL.
of one another.
, .
N. }',
G.
D.
A.
,
Sing.
or
or
I.
^ ,
. .
N.
G.
D.
A.
,
,
Sing.
aoi,
thou.
.
.
G. 5,
D.
5, of him.
^"^•
,
".
0C,
No
DC
•
.
G. ,
,,
Sing.
0£,
f-^,
^ ^
,
?, 5,
C
??,
,
,
.
*•
, , . .^,.
.
N. A.
Dual.
G.D.VCb'iV^VCui^.
,
^ , 0.).^(5. N. A.
Dual.
<^, . .
Dual.
G.D.<j^', /'. G.D.

Dual.
,, ,
N. -,
^
Plur.
. , Plur.
. ,
,
Plur.
.
Gr?,,
Plur.
,
,
«?,
G. G. ^', G. . , r
', r
D.
A.
',
r^.
D.
. .
^', D.
. ?.
D.
.
;, ?,
?, Sg,
?,
.
-
like the article
and
.
are declined like the relative oc, and
Obs. has the signification of the English self; or else, in the ob-
lique cases, after other words in the clause, it is used for the simple pro-
ticle, it signifies the same.

the article, as raxhov for
ter ends in ov as well as in o, as
,,
noun of the third person ; but when it is immediately preceded by the ar-
In this last sense it is often compounded with
for ttJ
and
} .
and then the neu-
for
,,
article ; thus,
ToDro, this,
PRONOUNS.
is declined, and prefixes ,

57
like the
58 VERB.
Ohs. 1. ,, who, what ? is marked with an acute accent, and always
., ,
on the first syllable.
Obs. 2. and are often used for and also and
.
for and rat, and in the neuter plural
'? are often joined, and signify whosoever ; thus,

and
Ion. instead of
,
/, , &c.
Ols. 3.
,, ,
are used for
Obs. 4.
.
, .
. is often separated from
In the neuter
a comma, to be distinguished from the conjunction
and Ion. aoaa, for
with or without
Also
with the signification of the Latin cunque,

,
is
,,
added to
compound
, ]^
relatives, and takes the accent, as whosoever.
^
some one. of one another.
, ,, Sing. Plur.
,
N.
G.
.
D.
-?, or
or
or vtJ
G.
D.
A.
.-^',
[-'?,
oji',
«ig,
«?,
»',
Oi?,
«.
Obs.
so.
^
A.
N.
.
. ,
Jitva
Plur.
is
G.
sometimes indeclinable
G. D.
;
A.
as,
(^-,
Dual.
-oty, at*",
a,
oti',
.
,
VERB.
Verbs are of two kinds, transitive and intransitive or
,
neuter.
Atransitive verb expresses an action which is exerted by
the agent upon some object•; as,
he wrote a letter.
I love you;
An intransitive verb expresses an action or state, which is

not communicated to any other object
eu^ffc, he sleeps.
as, I run ;
^
; ^^,
Transitive verbs have three voices, active, passive^
and middle ; intransitive verbs have properly an ac-
tive voice only.
The
.,
active voice signifies action or condition ; as,
they sleep.
The
ot, I strike you ;
,
passive voice signifies passion, suffering, or
the receiving of an action ; as,
he goes ; evdovoi,
I am struck.
The middle
upon the agent
flected
But more particularly,
;
VOICES.
as, ,
voice expresses an action that
I strike
is
myself.
»
re-
is
tive pronoun
as
him, but
as, ;
^ ,
1. The middle voice signifies what we do to ourselves, and
,^ ^ ^ ,&^ -
iuuvibv, I wash myself ;
the same as
,
equivalent to the active joined with the corresponding reflec-
I wash another, but the same
they anointed
they anointed
'^
themselves ;
-,
as,
rest,
,
In
I send, , to restrain,
to restrain one^s self, to refrain.
many verbs the middle receives a simple intransitive signification
I send myself, i. e. / travel ; navnv, to put to
naviodâi, to put one's self to rest, i. e. to cease.
But more frequently the middle signifies what we do for
2.
^ ),;
^,-
ourselves, and is equivalent to the active with the dative of the
reflective pronoun as, ^ he subjected the
^,
,
,
;
island, without being defined to whom,

its
he subjected the Medes to himself ;

a breastplate on another,
plate on one's self;
^- '-,^ to put
to put a breast'
to loatch any one, to observe,
to observe any thing to one's advantage in order
to avoid it.
TKoiooilâoâi
thing to any one for a ransom,
; ,
Hence the middle is used to signify what we do to any thing that be-
longs or relates to us as, TnQtuuijzai to tear the garment of another,
^,
to tear one's oicn garment; to return any
to receive back any thing that
,
belongs to one.
'^ -- ^^,
',^^
3. The middle often signifies what we cause to be done as, ;
Panthea caused a breastplate to

he made ; they cause their sons to be
taught; caused a table to be set.
he
Hence he accused me, properly he caused my
name, as that of an accused person, to be taken down in
writing by the magistrate before tvhom the process is carried.
Obs. 1. The passive has frequently the signification of the middle; as,
(«rti (?. nf.Tu'ninui by this deed you have made us your
'
^
,
friends ; j"j«f/",'v as ; tchat accusation has he brought

asainst you7
arms ; trciTi'Sfia iv (;
a(fii]Qi[ufâ. ice have deprived them of their
ctraxtxnuiOuivoi iôar, they had conveyed
9] .,
their provisions into their strong holds; -^ hoio pro- .'
,
foundly you slept!
,
(foSt;xf>laorTai they will fear us.
,
Obs. 2. The middle is often used passively
he shall be honored by me ; n^tv vn'o

he lay doicn on his back;
as,
ov
; i^
ntTo, his country icas subverted ; especially the future middle; as,j''7r' iuov
-
^
whence they will not be hurt by the cavalry.
60 - VERB.
as, ^ ^,
Many
Some
present
^ ^ ^,
;
verbs, called deponent^ have a passive or middle form,
and an active (some transitive, some intransitive) signification;
to receive ; to come.
verbs are deponent in the future, and active in the

as, to hear ;
to be silent.
Ohs. Some deponents are also used passively; as,

iQyov, such
seen by no one.
a deed has been done by me ; vn' ovdtvbg ^, he was
MODES.
The modes are five ; indicative^ optative^ suhjunc-

tive, imperative, and infinitive.
The used when any thing is to be represented

indicative is
and as any thing independent

as actually existing or happening,
of the thought and ideas of the speaker. Hence it is put in
sit.
^
many cases where in Latin the subjunctive is used as,
see if you know who he is, an scias quis
;
The optative and subjunctive represent an action not in its
,
actual relation, but rather in its reference to the ideas of the
speaker, the subjunctive only expressing this more determi-
nately and certainly than the optative.
The
&', may I
optativa is used alone
instantly die ; >
to express a wish
The
; as,
may
you be
used alone only
letus go ; ' &^
more fortunate than your father.
in exhortations in the first
let us return home: and in dubious
, ^
subjunctive
person as, ;
'^ is
questions, partly with and partly without

ceding as,
shall
you that
I
remain here
;
tell
I begin?
1
;
whither shall I go ?
you the cause ?
--
- ovv
or pre-
;
)
'
; loill
;
you that
whence will
ioe
In dependent members of sentences, the optative is com-

monly used when the verb in the preceding member denotes
past time, and the subjunctive whfen it denotes present or
,
future; as, tlyov^ or
whither I should turn myself;
ônov
f/o», or
I know not whither I shall turn myself.

^ - ^ I IcnetO
onoi
not
MODES AND TENSES. 61
The optative frequently used in relating the words or

is
in the first person; as,

^^vixeî
on 7^ ^ ;
sentiments of another, without representing him as speaking
fftQOl• eig nhliv^
»';/', he told me that the way led to the city which
^
I saw.
Ohs. When any one relates the words, or describes the sentiments of
another, not representing him as speaking in the first person, the relator
is said to use the oratio obliqua.
The imperative is sometimes used by the Attic poets in a

dependent member of a sentence after olaifu as, 7'>' • ^
^
TToiijOoi' ;
future is
do you know what you have to
often put for the imperative
divulge this to no one.
do
TENSES.
? Soph. Also the
; as,
The tenses are nine ; the present, the imperfect,

the perfect, the pluperfect, the first and second
aorists, the first and seco7id futures, and, in the
passive, the paido-post future.
Time in general is divided into three parts, the present, the
^^
past, and the future.
The present tense, besides its proper use, is put for the
imperfect and aorists in an animated narration, which repre-
sents what took place as present as, ,'
',
;
.• '.'• XuSihl•'^ this

letter he giveit to a trusty person^ as he thought, who, having
received it, shows it to Cyrus.
Past time is expressed in different ways by the imperfect,
perfect, pluperfect,
,
ing.
The
quently repeated as, ;

and aorists.
;
imperfect expresses an action which was going on, but
not completed, at some former time
'
as, ;
Hence it often has the signification of an action fre-

^•^
I teas writ-
Milo the Crotonian was accustomed to cat ticcnty minis

of flesh.
The perfect expresses an action which has tnken place at a
^-
present; as, ,
previous time, but which is connected, either in itself, or its
consequences, or its accompanying circumstances, with the
which signifies not o\\]y I have written,
but it shows also the continued existence of the writing.
The pluperfect shows an action which is past, but which
still continued, either by itself or in its following and accom-
6
62 VERB.
^,
panying circumstances, during another action which is past
as, }"/', I had icritten. The perfect is often put for the
present, in which case the pluperfect has the sense of the im-
perfect ; as, Ifear, Ifeared.
The without any refer-
aorists express simply a past action,
^&
ence to the present, orany other past time as, -/»«/^«, which
;
signifies / wrote, but it does not determine whether the writing
,
be still existing or not.
:
ary performance of an action
nections of the wicked.

Hence they often denote the custom-
as, ; ;^
short time commonly dissolves the con-
Future time is expressed in different ways by the futures
The
after
The
; as, ^
and paulo-post-future.
futures express an
I shall write.
paulo-post-future shows that an
pleted at some future time as, ;
the state imll be perfectly organized.

action that
There is also a periphrastic future, made up of

is
} ^
to take place here-
action will be
and
the infinitive of the present, future, or aorists, corresponding to
the Latin participle in rus joined with the verb sum, and de-
)
com-
^(^^
noting that one is about to do something, or intends to do it
^ &^
as, he is about to be put to death ;
J intended to say this ;
aeuvzbv (, y.ul
yourself and meant to slay us also.

sc. ,
which I can to suffer. The infinitive is often understood as,
you slew
;
Obs. The first and second aorist differ not in signification. Few verbs
have them both, and the first is found much oftener than the second.
The same may be observed of the first and second futures.
CONJUGATION.
There are four conjugations of barjton verbs,
distinguished by their characteristics.
The the letter which immediate-
characteristic is
ly precedes o) or ouai in the present tense. In

, XT, uv, the former letter is the characteristic.
The letter before and before a

in the future,
in the perfect, is also the characteristic of each of
these tenses espectiely.
CHARACTERISTICS OF THE CONJUGATIONS. 63
CHARACTERISTICS OF THE
First Conjugation.
,
,
,
Pres. Fut.
,
)
Perf.
,
,
TUnrUf
Second Conjugation.
\\,
, ,
,
Pres.
/, ,
Fut.
''
Perf.
nf
Y>
, ,
, , , or
^,
S
Third Conjugation.
, ,
Pre».
, ,
),
Fut, Perf.
S,
,
()
,
, ,
,
^<^>
.
pure,
.as
> <
^ ,
> >'
^
\
[,
.
Fourth Conjugation.
Pres. Fut.
,
64 VERB.
Second Conjugation.
Indie.
Present
Imperf.
1st Fut.
1st Aor.
Perfect
Pluperf.
2d Aor.
2d Fut.
CONJUGATION OF THE ACTIVE VOICE. 65
First Future, I shall strike.

s.
D.
P.
66 VERB.
Perfect, have struck.
s.
SUBJUNCTIVE MODE.
Present, I may strike.
s.
D.
P.
68 VERB.
.
G. ^
, ,
First Aorist, having struck.
.
.
G. ,
^ /,
Perfect, having struck.
^
.
.
G.
, ,
,
Second Aorist, having struck.
.
^
.
G.
, ,
^ .
Second Future, going to strike.
.
^
SECOND CONJUGATION.
INDICATIVE MODE.
70 VERB.
SUBJUNCTIVE MODE.
-
•
Sing.
Pres.
1st
Perf.
2d A.
A.
-
/-
,
'
72 VERB.
fect
I.
the augment
The
and
syllabic
aorists; as, ,^,
augment
trvwa, tzvnov.
If the verb begin with ^, this letter is doubled after
as, ())^ ; to throw : except
is prefixed to the imper-
gle ; as, ^,
among the poets, where it sometimes remains sin-
(), to sew.
In the perfect, pluperfect, and paulo-post-future,
cation ; as, ,
the first consonant of the verb is repeated before
the syllabic augment, which is called the redupli-
•
and the pluperfect also
prefixes the syllabic
as, tT'cTvcftiv.
, augment
If the verb begin with a rough mute,
in the reduplication the corresponding smooth is
used as,; ^,to love.
to the reduplication ;
, ^^^ ,
Exc. 1. Verbs beginning with a double consonant, with
joined to a mute, or with -/*', do not receive the reduplication,
but the syllabic augment only as, //', to seek
'^
', play to to SOW ;
;
)^ ,
to know. So verbs beginning with >, when g is
),)^ ^ &.
,),
doubled after the augment; as, îmoi^ £<)^rq:rx^ to throw. So
also
tion,
^)^
, ), ), , ,
'/liqo>, ^
and sometimes neglect it
and
, In verbs beginning with «,

Also .
Exc. 2. The following verbs sometimes take the reduplica-
)^. :
&'^ )^
, ,
,
II. f, ai^
the temporal
,'^,
),
into
•), fy.ovovj
The
if•,
, , augment changes a and

subscribing the
to
r^vtov, to increase;
hear
to
;
name
i
tlniô,
temporal augment remains the same in

;
€
of the diphthongs
into
to
aiQO), ij^wv, to lift
ovAtov, to dwell.
jy,
hope
and
as,
up;
;
all
the auo^mented tenses.

AUGMENT. 73
),
Exc.
'^
0?«s,
^,
1.
Oio)i'lZouttt^
xoaTQoqiit),
'), To
' .^
The compounds of
rudder^ omit the augment
olonnai,
these add
as,
(though the two last sometimes change oi
etc»,
;,
icine, ohtvo;^ bird, and
into
), -')^
olroo)^
;
'^^
, &),
•
•
), ')^ :.
oiuxoroutoi^
)
oiu-
Also
id-llu)^ sd-ui^ ',

,,, ,
, ^
which are sometimes augmented, particularly
Exc. 2. The following verbs change
(which retains the augment through

>,
into
V.y.toi^ /.>, ',
^*,
all
tlo),
the modes),
)^
ft •
,,
,,., ,
ioTti^bt, f/"', ^'^>, ^^^,
to go ; as, , >, to have.
^,
fects
Exc. 3. Verbs beginning with
to feast.
change
In the same manner the pluper-
are formed from the Attic perfects
into o> •
as,
^, .,
, Obs. Ji, t», i, ,

ning of a word,
, .,
^,
and
susceptible of augmentation; as, /',
to buy, and
tO supplicate.
, ,,
remain unchanged at the begin-
short becomincr long in the tenses
t
/for, to echo, sound;

But ^'», to push,
take the syllabic augment thus, ;
,
&^
Exceptions by the Attic Dialect.
The
1. diphthongs ft and ft; are changed into ^ and
, \', , , ), ^, re-
,
spectively,
to conjecture;
any thing.
',
and the syllabic augment into
I'/'V"?*', to pray ;
as,
by sync, ^)', Att.
•
',
to be about to
to know;
do
2. The syllabic augment is used for the temporal, or pre-

,
( ,. ,
fixed to and takes the breathing of the present as,
it, ;
for ^f«, to break; to take; ),

for "\loix4t, to be
',
taken ; Mnot,
, for f to say ; for
,^
to see; I'oixtt for olxit, to be like.
3. In verbs beginning with « short, f or o, the two first letters
, ^,,
of the present are prefixed to the perfect; as,
to collect; ^,
to VOmit ;
,
^, ^,
),
/«, to dig; oZot, '^«,
plication is always short

incline, fall.
as, >,},
to smell.
;
Ali>0 in one
beginning with //, which is changed into f, because «nis redu-
', to bend,
If the perfect thus augmented have more than three syllables,

\<, ^
the long vowel of the third is changed into the corresponding
74
^ ^,
short one as,
']<, to mioint &)^ r^Xevdû^
;
ulr^S^c•)^
;
, ^^^^ ^^
)^ , ^
make ready
VERB.
to grind ;
to
dAf /grw,
come; '^)^
hear. But ^^ to
to prop, makes ^^ ']^
;
to distin-
to
.
guish
^, Ohs.
it
The
from of the verb
pluperfect of these forms admits a temporal
/.^, from
tQl'lM, to contend.
augment ; as,
,
Except i?.i'/.u-9a.
into
4.
share,
The
•
as,
reduplications of the perfect
), ^^
it is
to take ;
fated.
^, and
to receive
are changed
for one's
Exceptions by the Ionic Dialect.
^ -^
1. The reduplication of the perfect is used in the second
aorist
as, &, and other tenses, and continues through
for to hear
for tnixtot',
&,
^• ,'
&), ^^
;
for
all
,
the
to
modes
persuade
for Titii^râw,
;
, ^ ,
to persuade^ to trust, to obey.
.,
2.
the perfect
The augment
;
from
as, .3
),
is
for ,
omitted, as
to eat;
from
is
^),
for
also the reduplication of
to take ;
from
for
to receive ; for from -), to loose.
3. The two of the present are sometimes pre-

first letters
fixed to the aorists, after the augment has been removed ; as,
aouoov, formed from aqov for -^, from to fit. ,
THE AUGMENT OF COMPOUND VERBS.
Verbs compounded with prepositions take the

I.
augment between the preposition and the verb as,
^
;
()), noootcptQov, to bring to,
Exc. 1. The following verbs compounded with prepositions
^,
,
take the augment at the beginning.
^ ^, ,.,
&,,^
&,
nification of their simples
use as,;
it in the middle
&,c.
as,
&LC.
1. Such as have the sig-
2. Some whose simples are not in
tyxîoio)^ ),
), .-
;
but many of these receive ;

>^
,
as, ;
7(<)^ &,c. 3. ^
and
-,
^ ,
Exc. 2. Some compounds take the augment at the beginning
or in the middle; as,
&c. Others take
>1^'>,
Several in the beginning, middle, or both; as,
it at the beginning and in the middle;
'), )', ut'olyot,
), . &,c.
as,
FORMATION OF TENSES IN THE ACTIVE VOICE. i €>
,
Obs. 1.
the final vowel
^,
A
as,
preposition in composition before a vowel loses
; to restrain, for tm^/oi. Except negl
0^<(, -/^
, ),
and nod, and sometimes •
as, not
from to place around. In the is often con-
augment
^
tracted with the syllabic into •
as, for
from to foretell. If the initial vowel of the
verb have a rough breathing, the smooth and of the prepo-
sition changed into
are and ^ as, to take awai/,
•
from and afQô).

Obs. 2. 'El' and ovr^ which change r before a consonant,
resume it before a vowel as, lyyoaqM, ipiyoaqov^ to inscribe.
;
)^ always drops the before , and sometimes before

to discuss, to examine.
*'
Obs. 3. If the verb begin with o, and the preposition end

as, •
,,-
with a vowel, g is doubled; as, t7no(ju'i, to upon.
li. Verbs compounded with any other part of
),
speech take the augment at the beginning
rjVTouoltov^
as,
to desert ;
;
,
tqiXoaocfiov, to philosophize ;
Exc.
middle,
to be unfortunate.
Compounds of and Sji; take the augment in the
when these particles are followed by a vowel or diph-
thong susceptible of augmentation
to benefit.
FORMATION OF THE TENSES

;
IN
as, ,,
THE ACTIVE VOICE.
Imperfect,
The
changing
', .
imperfect
into or,
is formed from the present, by
and prefixing the augment
First Future.
as, ;
The
changing the
in the
in
2d
the 3d
first future
last sylhible,
in the 1st conjugation, into
—
—
is formed from the present, by
into
into oo)
/ •
•
as, ,
, )
as, Ityo),
as, •
*
and,
•
in the 4th conjugation, by circumflexing the last

and shortening the penultima
', '.
syllable, ; as,
76 VERB.
. ,<
Obs. 1. The penultima is shortened by dropping the second consonant,
and the second vowel of the diphthong, and shortening the doubtful vowel
,)^,^^
',
as, arciiQu), •
y.otrw, to judge.
Obs. 2. Some verbs in or are of the third conjuga-
,
making the future
tion, in •
as, &lc.
,
),
^. ,
^ , ,
), '^ )^ ,
Obs. 3. Some verbs
making the future in
, ^ in
•
as,
are of the second conjugation,
), YqH^^)
^^,,, , ^., Slc. few in as,

•
Some make the future in | and •

as, ^,
§, &,c. One in and •
as,
, ^, ^ )^
Verbs in
and into co
(piXi]aco, to love;
• as,
and oto, change a and
to honor
to gild.
;
into ,
^ )^^ , ,
Etc. 1. Verbs in i-uoj and oao) pure, with those in « pre-
.^ )^ ), ^ ^ ^^ «
ceded by or t, retain «. To these add
^), ), )-, )^
^, ^
with verbs from which others in and are
formed
)^
The
^,;
,, ^^
as,
), ,
following have « and
whence
•
•
whence
).
^ ^ ^
^
^ ^
Exc.
'^
», ^
'^ ^ .
^
2.
^ ^
from which others in
^ ^ ,
Some
', )^
&'
verbs in
),
retain
• ',
•
and
as,
',
'^
^',
^,
with verbs'
are formed; as,
^
^ ,
,,.
^
The
', ^)^
The
),. ^. ^
.-
^^
following have
),
following make
and
and
by syncope
the future in
•
make
makes (5,
^',
)^
Tiie'&j, -,
and
Exc. 3. Verbs in not derived from nouns retain the •
as, .>. ouoo), '^ &/C.
The Attics drop a from the futures in «, «,

oata, and taw, making a contraction in the three
former, but only circumflexing the in the latter
,
as,
FORMATION OF TENSES
axfcVoj for axtdaao),

for vouXoto.
IN THE ACTIVE
for , VOICE. 77
for
in
from
fourth
Many
,
The
]
), by the Attic and
/Eolics form the futures in
conjugation by inserting
from .
barytoii verbs frequently have their futures
Ionic dialects
a
;
and
before
as, vtuiôo)
^ of the
as,
),
•
xf/lo), to land ; oooj, .», excite.
The futures of r/o), '), rnt/jo, and Tvcfco,

change the smooth of the
breathino"; thus, , &(), first syllable into a rough
d^Q^.ô), &.
First Aorist.
,.
The first aorist is formed from the first future,
by changing o) into «, and prefixing the augment
as,
The
changed into
wa/M), \}!]).
first aorist of the fourth conjugation length-
ens the short penultima of the
•
, and
an'c{i(b,
e into
tontioa.
ei •
first
as, ',
Some
future
verbs,
' ; a
how-
is
•
ever, which have ai in the present, take a long a

in the first aorist ; as, neQaivo), 7'{), (),
to finish.
and ]]V'cyxa are formed from the present

/, '.'/, idioza, from the perfect. The use of
the last three is rarely extended beyond the indica-
tive.
Some drop the a of the future : as.
axtoj or axtuo, rfxtia •

Xcoj or xttio, txtia •
or xato, txtja
7*
•
, and h'/eva.
78 VERB.
Perfect,
The formed from the first future, by

perfect is
prefixhig the reduplication, and changing,
in the 1st conjugation, // into (fa • as, ,

, Ttzvcfa •
—
,
2d
.,
•
in the into • as,
in the 3d — into • as, •
—
in the
as,
4th
', •
,
into «, and into •
Obs. 1.
future in
The
•
, ,/
perfect in
as,
presupposes a verb in utw, formed from the
whence ^',
,
,
Obs. 2. In some perfects a syncope takes place ; as, for
,
from to build.
, , ,, ,, -,
Dissyllables in ,, ^, change the of the
,
future into a • as, to send
to
,
(, ( ,, ,
,
Dissyllables in
^', {),
wash.
(,
to stretch.
xtx^Xxa
Other verbs
ivo),
•
•
in
and
change
drop the
into •
• as,
as,
,
to pollute.
,,
In dissyllables of the first and second conjugation
'^,
the Attics ch'cinge
to turn. So
into as, •
to hear.
,, , , , ,
In some verbs of the
,^
drop X, and shorten the preceding vowel,
happens to be long; as,
third conjugation the lonians
when
to
it
go;
,
the long vowel often remains
to die.
to be born.
Pluperfect.
; as,
In the participle
,
The
,
changing a into
pluperfect
there be a reduplication
is formed from the perfect by
and prefixing the augment, if
; as,
•
-.
FORMATION OF TENSES IN THE ACTIVE VOICE. 79
,
6)', be no reduplication,
the augment of the perfect suffers no change
twaXxtiv,
Second
as,
If there
Aorist.
;
The second
by changing
shortening the penultima
aorist is
into ov, prefixing the
; as, ,
formed from the present,
augment, and
t%vnov.
,
The penultima
,,^,, ,),,,
1.
the last of
Some
is
In consonants, by the omission of

two liquids
verbs change
shortened
to
; as, /^,
:
of the present into

hurt;
, and of
•
as,
to
(),
), ,
cover ; to hide. Others into •
as, )(, to connect; to dip;

-), tTa(fov, to hury ; (), t{)âcf'Ov, to sew
to dig ; ^), t()()X(pov, to throw
OQVKTcOy tOQVifov, to tear.
into
,
Verbs
^, , (), , ,
of the third
,
, in
if
and
of the second conjugation
as,
change these terminations
; into
to
,
airange
),
if
, .,
;
to say. Likewise
to consume, and to cool, make and
but •
to shudder, makes
2. In vowels, by the change of , ai, av, into
,
7],
),
,^ ', ,^,,
a, ft into i, and tv into as, •
to
take; (), to eat; ', to burn;
cause
to leave
strike,
;
makes
(, (, ^. to
and
to
to fly.
cease ;
But to
Dissyllables of the fourth conjugation change

into a (), ()'
q, (), polysyllables, into as,
• •
to assemble.
80 VERB.
preceded or followed by a liquid

In dissyllables,
),),
e
is changed into a
Qov, to flay.
), But
as,
to
and .
tnlaytov
to see,
•
di-QO), tdd-
to say, and
burn, retain the . , ),
•
to cut, makes
,
into
Verbs
ov '
in
as,
to
,, and
sound, to roar.
change these terminations
to belloiv ; ),
Ohs. 1. In some verbs the penultima of the second aorist necessarily re-
mains long, particularly in dissyllables which take the temporal augment
as, '^, iJSor, to sing.
,
So also where the penultima is long by position
as, uuo.TTo), Xiiuonov, to seize. But in many of these a transposition takes
place to preserve the analogy ; thus, -Tttfj-S^w, to destroy,
poetry ;
Ohs. 2.
to see, to regard, tdijuxov.
The following verbs have no second aorist :

makes ^ ;
in
polysyllables in
«
in
and •
«iitii, iiio),
being poetical.
,,,, ,
verbs in and after a vowel ; verbs in
and many others ;
•
polysyllables
\'yy.oor from
Second Future.
aorist
The second
by changing ov into
ping the augment
future
; as, ,.
is formed from the second
circumflexed, and drop-
PASSIVE VOICE.
SYNOPSIS OF THE MODES AND TENSES OF THE
First Conjugation.
;
Indie. Imper.
Pres.
Imp.
Perf.
Plup.
P. p. F.
1stA.
IstF.
2d A.
{
2dF.
CONJUGATION OF THE PASSIVE VOICE. 81
Second Conjugation.
82 VERB.
Perfect, / have been struck.
s.
S.
D.
P.
^
Perfect, have been struck.
^^
',
'^
-,
&)
First Aorist, be struck,
S. &,
^^ "|,
&,
D.
P. ^^ ^).
S.
D.
P.
^
&^ ^
Second Aorist,
^,
^ ^^,
be struck.
S.
D.
,
&, ^ ,
&^ ^^ .
Present,
&,
OPTATIVE MODE.
/ might, S^c. be struck.
S.
D.
', ^
Perfect, / might,
^ '''?*'»
(Sfc. have been struck.
', \.
^'''/?> ^''7,
P.
, ,
, ,
.
Paulo-post-Future,
S.
D.
.
-',
^^ ', '^^
/ mighty
ft^rf,
S^c, hereafter be struck.
First Aorist, I might, (S^c. be struck.
)^^, <-^
S.
D.
P.
'-^
&, ^& ^.
cf(^lj,
Tvqx)êhjTOi'^
First Future, / might, Sfc. hereafter be struck.
S.
D.
P.
'^^
((\)'}•
-'^
,
Tvqiî\aoin^
''^/^^
jvcfx^âoiaifF^
jvcfd'râoiTO,
^^^'^
v^^ôvo.
84 VERB.
S.
D.
^ ^
^ ,
, ^ .
Second
-^
Aorist, I might, ^. he struck.
,
P.
S.
D.
P.
&, ^
Second Future, 1 might,
-^, -^
--, -' ^.
^
Sfc. hereafter be struck.
S.
D.
.
^
-, ^^
]^
&. &,
SUBJUNCTIVE MODE.
Present, I may he struck.
^
^
.
Perfect, may have heen struck.
, ^,
S. , i|?, ',
). -^
. ».
First Aorist, / may he struck.
S. ^, &^ &,
^^ •[,
D.
• &, -^ ^*.
, , ^
Second Aorist, / may be struck.
S.
D.
P. ,
TUTTCOj
\^
TVTTjfg^ ^
Present, &,
INFINITIVE MODE.
-^ to be struck.
Perfect,
PauIo-post-Future, ^^
-^
to
to be
have been struck.
going to be struck.
First Aorist,
First Future,
Second Aorist,
Second Future,
,
(&^&^
^&^^
to
to be
to
to he
have heen struck.
going
going
to be struck.
have been struck.

to he struck.
PARTICIPLES.
Present, being struck.
IN.
G.
86 VERB.
Pres.
Perf.
1st A.
2d A.
IMPERATIVE MODE.
88 VERU.
IMPERATIVE MODE.
Pres. -,
-
. - , , ,
,
Sing•.
ov, ), ,,
, ,
Dual.
,
, .
.
Plur.
, , .
Perf.
1st
2d . -- , ). tjrov, , ,
OPTATIVE MODE.
Pres. -
- ,, ,
, ,
Sing.
,,, , ,
, ,.
,'
Dual. Plur.
. - , , ,
- , ,
', ,
Perf.
1st
1st F.
2d
2d F.
. - . ,, ,,
- ,, ,
,
7,
, ,
, ,
, ,
,
,,, , ,.
,
,
, .
.
SUBJUNCTIVE MODE.
Pres. -
-, Sing-.
, ,,, ,,^ Dual. Plur.
Perf.
- , , , . , ,
^,
, ^,
.
, .
1st.
2d . - ,
, ,. , ,
Pres.
.
.
INFINITIVE.
-. Pres. •
-
-
-
PARTICIPLE.
,
.
V,
Perf.
1st
IstF.
2d
2dF.
.
. . Perf.
1st
IstF.
2d
2d F.
.
.
-
-
,
,
,
?,
,
,
,
,
, .
OBSERVATIONS.
1. The second person singular of the present indicatiê was originally

formed in as, Ti'nTouut, '.', The Ionics dropped the
a, making it vhich the Attics contracted into r»;. .7
The Attics
also contracted f«i into ti instead of »,, which form remained in common
, , ,,.(..
use only in [,
ot'ti, and oif'tt.
The same observation applies to other tenses. Thus in the imperfect
.'
/Tj'/irffTo
Some
became
became
trvrrrto, and was afterwards contracted into
and
verbs retain the original form thus ;
So
Thus also
IS formed the passive of verbs in _«», 'larauai, iaraout • rl^fuai, Ti^taai,
&c.
2. If the perfect indicative end in uai pure, the circumlocution of the
participle with \
is not used in the third person plural, Avhich is then
formed from the third person singular by inserting before • as, *
,,
/;.
and subscribing
7tt(fi:'.rjai, .
FORMATION OF TENSES IN THE PASSIVE VOICE.
In this case also the perfect optative is formed by changing uui into
under the preceding voAvel if it be or thus,
So in the pluperfect
•
[,
89
in;r,
, ,
>;
-[,
-<•1, ,
p"o, p>0, ^,
(, , Dual.
^',
I
, ,, . P[ur.
-gvro.
.
I
'<^)0, ^', \
If the preceding vowel be t or v, it is merely lengthened ; as, from
The subjunctive is formed by changing uai with the preceding vowel
,, , ,
into thus.
, , .
•
-,, ,
,, ,
, , . .
Sing.
, \;,
I
|
Dual.
j
\
Plur.
^ ,"'"
{
^ or
&,
, \
|
3.
,& (-3.
The
indicative; as,
aorists are often syncopated in the third person plural of the
for
In the second person singular of the imperative they end in -î, but in
when another d precedes as, n'ldrji. ; ;^,
,,
In the plural of the optative their
traction •.
more common form is the Attic con
4.
-,
The first
Sing.
future subjunctive
j], , I
\ ,,, ,,. is
Dual.
sometimes found
I
\
: thus,
Plur.
FORMATION OF THE TENSES IN THE PASSIVE ^.

,.
Present.
The present is formed 'from the present active,

by changing into •
as,
.
Imperfect.
The imperfect formed from the present, by

is
changing LiaL into a?^r, and prefixing the augment

as, irvntoarv.
Perfect.
The perfect is formed from the perfect active,

by changing, in the
1st. conj., uuai into •

as, TtTv-cpa, TtTv-uucw
in the 2d, into yuca • as, A^-/, Itle-yuca •
in the 3d, y.a into auai'

in the 4th, xa into uai
8 *
•
as, nt(foo:-xc(,nt(f()a-oucn
as, exfial-xa, -. •
90 VERB.
Perfects in (pa impure change termination
.
this
,
into aai
Verbs of the
,,,, , ^
But ., ),
(),
and
• TtTt^-cpa, }:^-.
third conjugation in
penultima of the perfect be long, change xa into
,, , ,as,
,
' Also {)6, dtto,
whose penultima is short.
d-Qavb),
and ),
xtlcvco,
retain
^,
. Some
pure, if the
have
both and • as, xtxluxcfy
, , , ',
and to shut.
In verbs of the fourth conjugation, / before is
changed into ,
by the Attics into as,
Att. ntcpaauai.
•
{,
Dissyllables of the and second conjugation, first
which in the perfect active change into o, in the
^,
perfect passive resume
^), ^', ^,
change into
as,
to steal.
a '
as, ^,
•
,^,
and sometimes '
to turn.
, Some
perfect active into
ntTtevxa,
atovuai •
,
verbs change ev in the penultima of the
,.
in the perfect passive
and
•
as, •-
Synopsis of the Formation of the Perfect Passive in

•
all its
*
;
Otoevxa,
Persons.
•
s.
II.
III.
, -, ,
FORMATION OF TENSES IN THE PASSIVE VOICE. 91
IV. S.
D.
.
, ,, ,
) (for
'.
The second person
tive, as, •
•, '-.
imperative is formed from the second person indica-
by changing ui into The third person is
formed from tlie second person plural indicative, by changing t into as,
^-, ^-.
•
formed from the second person plural indicative, by

The
changing
infinitive is
£ into ai •
as, ^-, &-.
Pluperfect.
The
changing
augment
pluperfect
; as, ,
into
is
, ^. formed from the perfect, by

and prefixing the second
,.
Paulo-post-Future.
The formed from the second

paulo-post-future is
person singular of the perfect, by changing a into

•
as,
First Aorist.
The formed from the third person

first
dropping the reduplication
)],
Some verbs
aorist is
singular of the perfect, l)y changing into
the preceding smooth mute into the rough one, and
assume a
, .
, ^^-
•
; as,
as, ()^,
^,
, '^.
making ^. On
•
the contrary,
*
drops it,
Some verbs which have in the perfect passive,

^)],
change
a(j rjQtoriV
it
'
In the poets, some verbs in

^,
into in the first aorist
which dropped
n^Qt^r^v ^,
,
; as,
tnrjVtt^rjV,
as, r for ].
in the perfect, receive it again in the first aorist;
/.^
92 VERB.
Those verbs which in the perfect passive change

resume {),
-^, (),
into ct, in the first aorist
to turn
• as,
,,
First Future,
The first fiature is formed from the first aorist,

by changing ^ into and dropping the aug-
ment as,; ^'^.
Second Aorist.
. The second
aorist active,
aorist is
by changing ov
formed from the second
into •
as, trvTiov,
,.
,
Second Future,
The second future is formed from the second
aorist,by changing into and dropping
the augment as, ;
MIDDLE VOICE. . -
SYNOPSIS OF THE MODES AND TENSES OF THE
First Conjugation.
CONJUGATION OF THE MIDDLE VOICE. 9i
Third Conjugation.
Indie.
Present
Imperf.
Perfect
Pluperf.
1st Aor.
1st Fut.
2d Aor.
2d Fut.
Present
Imperf.
Perfect
Pluperf
1st Aor.
1st Fut.
2d Aor.
2d Fut.
94 TERB.
^
OPTATIVE MODE.
S.
D.
P.
^,
--,
, ,
-^ -
First Aorist,
.^ ^
I might, S^c. strike.
SECOND CONJUGATION.
INDICATIVE MODE,
1st
2d F.
A. -
\- ,
, , , ,
Sing.
, ,, ,, ,, ,, ..
,
,
Dual. Plur.
, ,, .
IMPERATIVE MODE.
, ,
, ,
,
Sing. Dual.
. - , (,
Plur.
1st . /|-
2d
OPTATIVE MODE.
1st A. '-,Sing.
aio, , I
\ ,,.,,.
Dual. I
|
Plur.
THIRD CONJUGATION.
INDICATIVE MODE.
1stA.
2d F. • ,
Sing.
{- ^, ,
jj",
,
. ,,
, ,, , ,, .
', ,
Dual.
. Plur.
IMPERATIVE MODE.
1st.
2d .
- ,
Sing.
•,, 5,
Di
FORMATION OF TENSES IN THE MIDDLE VOICE. 95
, , ,, .
IMPERATIVE MODE.
-
-, ,
-,
1stA.
2d A.
, Smg.
at,
Dual.
icOwv,
Plur.
OPTATIVE MODE.
. -, , , , ', , , .
Slug. Dual. Plur.
1st aiadoVf
OBSERVATIONS.
In verbs of the fourth conjugation the first future is the same as the
1.
second, both in the middle and in the active voices, when there is no change
in the penultima; as, /-', first and second future active
•
future active arcuoco, middle oriaoovuai.

middle
but o/isi^jw, first future active aêow, middle othuovuul second
, •
2. The perfect and pluperfect have an active, the other tenses a passive
termination.
The only tenses that have a peculiar conjugation are the first aorist in-
dicative, imperative, and optative, and the second future indicative ; the
others are conjugated like those of the active and passive, whose termina-
tion they borroAV.
FORMATION OF THE TENSES IN THE MIDDLE VOICE.
Present and Imperfect.
The present and imperfect are the same as those

of the passive.
Perfect,
The
active,
reduplication ; as, ^
perfect is formed from the second aorist
by chan^îng ov into r/, and prefixing the
TtTiiia,
,.,
If the second aorist have a in the penultima,
from a present in the perfect middle changes
t or ti,
it into • but from a present in or ai, into 7^ as, ;^

•
'), ,,'/, tanaoov,
, ^,
•
tanocta •
^, ).t)j^ca *
Ixfavov,
ntcpi^va. So .)
makes and \îth the
syllabic augment tohna to/oj, ooya^ to^ya. •
Also
9
•^,
yjyjjjya
,-, , ,
•
and
makes
TERB*
^].
h'layov^
.
perfect
If the
If the
a present in ,
second aorist have
middle changes it
second aorist have

the perfect middle changes
in the penultima, the
into
in the penultima,
• as,
it
from
/or,
into
oi '
as, «5, dnWov^ • tido), idov, oida *
',
and manner
ly lengthened
in like olxa, and with the syllabic
augment toixa. But from a present in t, it is mere-
; as, ^, ^ ^
•
(),
makes
Some
The
.- and & )^
retain also the diphthong of the present
•
poets frequently shorten the penultima again, particu-

and .;
&^
thus
larly in
^, -^.
the feminine of the participle as, from
,
;
')^
"' Ed - \'&^
makes
to avoid the too frequent
and ^^&, '.
Also
recurrence of the .
makes
Obs. The perfect active and middle of the same verb are seldom both
in use. Indeed the perfect middle may be considered as another form of
the perfect active, as it has generally the same sense.
Pluperfect.
^ The
changing a into
pluperfect is
tr,
formed from the perfect, by
and prefixing the augment as, ;
.
txtximtiv.
active,
The first
by adding
aorist
ui]v
First Aorist,
is
•
formed
as, ,^ the first aorist
Obs.
sv()ufnj>'^
Verbs
/^',
in o)
for ^/}'^ '.

pure have this tense often syncopated ; as,
First Future.
active,
The first future
by changing
is formed from the
into * as,
first
-, -
future
^!).^
Obs.
•
,^ .
Those verbs
the Attic dialect lose
oduui as, '
DEPOxXENT VERBS.
but in the fourth conjugation, into
also of the third conjugation,

from the future active, change
•
97
as,
which by
into
Second Aorist.
The second aorist is formed from the second
^.
aorist active, by changing ov into oar^v as, trvnov,
•
.
Second Future,
The second
future active,
the poetic futures

which are thus varied
,-,
by changing
Except tdouat,
:
into
,^^
future is formed from the second
vtoiiai^
as,
and
•
by crasis
toai, txai, &c.
•
DEPONENT VERBS.
Deponent verbs generally have the middle form in the first
future and first aorist, but the passive form in the perfect,
pluperfect, and paulo-post-future, and some also in the first
aorist and first future.
SYNOPSIS OF THE MODES AND TENSES.
Pros.
93
perfect mid. utinpa, and the second aor. pass,

the second fut. mid. uu/ovuai.
VERB.
, and , to fight,
CONTRACT VERBS.
Verbs in
present and imperfect
,,
and ooj, are contracted in the
the other tenses admit no :
contraction, but are formed like those of barjton

verbs.
, ,
, ,
Verbs in a contract and ae,
ao, into •
, -
, , *, ,
a subscribing l and dropping i', whenever
,
into '
^,
they happen to follow
•
; as, to honor
•
(. , , ,
' •
Verbs in contract into , into ;, and in

every other contraction drop • as,
to love ;
• •
Verbs in contract with a long vowel follow-
,
ing into 0) with a short vowel, or ov, into ov •
^,
•
with
XQvoovai
any other diphthong, into
to
'
gild
^
;
Z()vo6rjg
^,
^.
oi
Except
•
•
as,
^, in the
infinitive, which is contracted into ov • as, Qvo6v,
XQVOOVV,
ACTIVE VOICE.
SYNOPSIS OF THE MODES AND TENSES OF VERBS IN
.
Indie.
Pres.
Imp.
1st F.
1st A.
Perf.
Plup.
2d A.
2dF.
CONJUGATION OF CONTRACTS. 99
601.
Indie.
Pres.
Imp.
IslF.
1stA.
Perf.
Plup.
2d A.
2dF.
100 VERB.
IMPERATIVE MODE.
-
-
-1//-
CONJUGATION OF CONTRACTS. 101
ecu.
102 VERB.
IMPERATIVE MODE.
- ,
Smg.
,
,
, ,
,
,
Dual.
,
,
,
-
,
iov,
,
6,
,
,
. ,
,
, ,
,
,
VERBS IX . 103
.
104 VERB.
Verbs in ui are formed,
1. By changing into , and lengthening the

penultima.
2. By prefixing the reduplication.
, .
the
as,
The
,
first
reduplication properly consists
consonant of the present tense with an t
If the consonant be an aspirate,
the corresponding smooth must be used
for ^^^.
as, S^tvj,
in
;
repeating
•
If the verb begin with a vowel, with ,

,
or
, . ,
an aspirate
improper reduplication
Verbs
to fly;
only
),
is prefixed,
;
have only three tenses of that form

in
the present, imperfect, and second aorist. They
as, ,
which
to
is
send
called the
;
makes
Verbs
, ,,
take the other tenses from verbs in
in
from
thus
have no second aorist

» •
; except dis-
syllables, this tense is the same as the
in which
imperfect. They
likewise want the optative and
subjunctive modes, which they borrow from verbs
in .
Many have no reduplication, par-
,
verbs in
ticularly all those derived from verbs of more than
^,
, ( ..
two syllables as, from
;
Ltvyrina
from x^fcuriyUt from .(), from
from
The give the terminations of verbs
Obs.
,'^
1. poets
in fn to a great number of contract verbs, but without the re-
.^ ',-/,
•
duplication as, yihtUi • rtxuo», • ogaoj,
),
;
• •
voio)., rot/Ul• • oit'w, •
Barytons sometimes become verbs in in as, from •
&), f/o), (jft'ô, we meet with ^^,

'^X'H", ?f "/."' though *
the of the penultima discovers that they are properly derived

CONJUGATION OF VERBS IX . ACTIVE VOICE. 105
from
to
&, t/tj), qeoio)^ obsolete,
be changed into contract verbs.
it being usual for barytons
Ohs. 2. The
for a reduplication; as,^
poets sometimes repeat the two initial letters
)^ 7;.
), -
To the
, /..
•
common reduplication they sometimes add as, '
^^
•
the middle
^.
as, OJf'oi,
;
make the reduplication by as, •

, , ^,
They also make the reduplication in
The Ionic and Boeotic dialects
ACTIVE VOICE.

106 VERB.
CONJUGATION OF VERBS IN (. ACTIVE VOICE. lOT
Second Aorist.
-, Sing Dual. Plur.
^
- V, ^, ''ji^'/'') rjuef, & ev.
108 VERB.
of the dual and plural, except in

The
^,
third person plural is often syncopated ;
.
3. The second aorist indicative retains the long vowel in the penultima
as, t(iav for f , t&iv for

%&taav.
,^, .,
4. The iEolics and poets retain the long vowel in the present impera-
tive ; as, "-^, ('^>;, -9-. And from both forms î is often rejected
hence '»/ and ^»/, &c. The contracted form is also fre-
quently used ; as,
in
The second
, as also in ,
aorist imperative ends in î, except in verbs
as, -d^tg, ifQig, ^<J?•
from primitives
,
5. The present infinitive has always the short vowel. The second
aorist assumes the long vowel, except in verbs from primitives in ew, as
also in which change the short vowel into a diphthong.
FORMATION OF THE TENSES IN THE ACTIVE VOICE.
Imperfect.
The imperfect is formed from the present, by

changing into v,
•
,.
except when the verb begins
Second
and prefixing the augment,
Aorist,
\vith i • as, ^,
augment
second aorist is formed from the imperfect,
The
by dropping the reduplication
;
as,
as, ,
Utjv
or by changing the improper reduplication into the
1:.
; , •
Obs. If the verb have no reduplication, the second

aorist is the same as the imperfect.
PASSIVE VOICE.
Tndic.
Pres.
Imp.
Perf.
Plup.
P.p.]
1st A
1st F.
CONJUGATION OF VERBS IN ///. PASSIVE VOICE. 109
no VERB.
IMPERATIVE MODE.
Present.
Sinsr.
. ^.
Dual.
&, .
Plur.
OPTATIVE MODE,
Present.
-
&- ^
Sing. Dual.
-^
Plur.
»
-
^
\ , &^
)
SUBJUNCTIVE MODE,
Present.
-, ^^ '^ ^^^ &, &^ ,

Sing. Dual. Plur.
«,
S^y .
aa&of,
-(^
«^
^ , ^^ &'^ ^. &, &,

aueitor^ râdOr^
-u^
WPiui,
INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE.
Present. Present.
,&,
^^. ^-^ -og, -\
-.
'. -,
-;,
/
C
y
.
OBSERVATION.
,
the Attics contract the syllables ; slS,
Ion. fxVio, Att. tdov • Ion. ,'{, .,
The Ionics drop from the second person singular in nai and ao, and
Att.
Ion. Ati. ioTiy tdtao,
FORMATION OF THE TENSES IN THE PASSIVE VOICE.

Present.
The
by changing
nultima
present
; as, , is formed from the present active,

into uai, and shortening the pe-
• except in ^, -
.
, ^,
, ^,
CONJUGATION OF VERBS IN
and
}:")^,
though
MIDDLE VOICE.
is
arcoxrauai,
also used.
Ill
]-
Imperfect.
The imperfect is formed from the present, by

changing
,.
into )], and prefixing the augment,
except when the verb begins with l
•
as, •
,
MIDDLE VOICE.
Pres.
112 VERB.
IMPERATIVE MODE.
Second Aorist.
- >,
-
Sing.
&. &, -.
Dual. Plur.
Jo- )
OPTATIVE MODE.
Second Aorist.
Sing, Dual. Plur.

/-
Jo/-
\
&, &^ .
SUBJUNCTIVE MODE.
Second Aorist.
-, ^ ^,-, ^', -, ^^ .
Sing.
^^, )•, ^^, *.
Dual. Plur.
/', ^, -, &^ -, .
rj ,
riod-ov,
'&-)^ if, «*, riadov^
-.«. , WTui,
Second Aorist. Second Aorist.
-- "i
^ /^'.
-. -de-
•
\ f^^^Vy
Second Aorist.
^
The second
perfect,
aorist
.
middle
by dropping the reduplication
•
7]^
is formed from the im-
; as, -
IRREGULAR VERBS IN . 113
TENSES PECULIAR TO THE PRIMITIVES OF VERBS

IN in.
The
verbs in
tenses peculiar to the primitives of verbs in
are regularly formed, according to the rules for
• as, ), But there ,.
are
1.
some deviations
The
of the present
2. The
first
; as, ^ in particular verbs.
perfect active and passive of

I roill give.
&
future active has sometimes the reduplication
and has fi-
^^ &^
,
instead of
-- and the first aorist passive has
(for )-\)-^
,
only as,
^
being put for
;
-^)^
^ on
(though ^
account of the S- which follows)
is sometimes found).
ffxu, i&i/v
;
, ^'^. '.
3. The perfect and first aorist passive of and dlSojui
shorten the long vowel of the perfect active as, /;«,
, iaia&r/y •
; -
.
Obs.'i.
'tOTcixce, which
is syncopated; as,
The
perfect active of has sometimes
distinct from the Doric form
is
',
whence the participle
instead of r
Very frequently it
and by crasis ,'
as, •
fect ;
It is to be observed also, that the augment of
as, '.
Obs. 2. The perfect, pluperfect, and second aorist active,
retains the
rough breathing of the present, and further often takes an t in the pluper-
have
the intransitive signification to stand, and the rest of the tenses the trans-
itive one to place. The perfect has also the signification of the present,
and consequently the pluperfect that of the imperfect.
,
IRREGULAR VERBS IN MI.
Irregular verbs in may be divided into three classes, each
containing three verbs.
I. From »
are derived to be ; and , to go. ',
,
III. ,
II. From a•» are derived "'/.'", to send;
to clothe one's self.
to lie down ;
to sit ;
'(,
Class
to
I.
know ;
\^
, to say.-
1. Eiu\^ to he,
INDICATIVE MODE.
Present Tense.
^ Sing.
or f 7, ^
10*
iajoi-,
Dual.
taioy. ,^. Plur.
114 Vers*
Imperfect.
Sing: Dual. Plur.

) _
?) ^ or '
-
Imperfect Middle
\&^
Dual.
râ&ov^ ^&^ I
&, ^,Plur.
.
Future Middle.
,^ ^ Sing.
^ &^ -^ ^^ &^
.&^ Dual. Plur.
IMPERATIVE MODE.
Sing.
,^
Present.
Dual.
OPTATIVE MODE.
^ .
Plur.
Present.
ehiv^
Sing.
\\:, ,
Dual.
>'^ ^ ', ^ '^
Plur.
or .
\ ^ ^ ^^
^,&, . &,
Sing.
I
Future.
Dual.
iaolue&u^
Plur.
SUBJUNCTIVE MODE.
Present.
Sing. Dual. Plur.

i^tov, rîoVy
INFINITIVE.
Present.
-.
Future.
tRREGULAR VERBS IN . 115
PARTICIPLES.
)^ ,
Present.
ov» ^;,
Future.
, ov.
2. ,
INDICATIVE MODE.
to go.
Present,
e?|Ut,
Sing.
or f?, ^, .Dual.
hov. \', , ,^
Plur.
luai.
Imperfect.
Sing. Dual.
hov, ', ^ Plur.
i'rf, fauv.
Pluperfect.
Sing.
,^ , Dual.
,
Plur.
.
Second Aorist.
', ^ ^ ,
Sing. Dual. Plur.
.
IMPERATIVE MODE.
.
Present.
Sing. Dual. Plur.

& or 1, i'rot, i'tov^ hon', IVfj
Second Aorist.
{,
Sing.
, Dual.
iiibiv. , Plur.
iBTOtaav.
OPTATIVE MODE,
Second Aorist.
oly
Sing.
Yoi;^ lot,
Dual.
I'oiioi•, •^ ,, PI ur.
^.
116 VERB.
SUBJUNCTIVE MODE.
Second Aorist.
.
Sing.
],
Dual.
, Plur.
Present.
eivtti or . Second
^, ^, Aorist.
MIDDLE VOICE.
INDICATIVE MODE.
Perfect.
, Sing. Dual.
ei'uTor, el'uTOv, ,.
elUuey,
Plur.
^
Pluperfect.
Sing.
^, ^, Dual.
Or
, -^
^, , '.
Plur,
Ohs. 1.
as, flut y.ai
First Future.
The
'^
present
?., Eurip. unv y.ai ^[(,
.
First Aorist,
has regularly the signification of the future

Demosth. So
;
in
;
the infinitive and participle.
and
Ohs. 2.
i'sr, / ,
The
imperfect and second aorist belong to epic poetry but
and are all that can be found, except in composition.
*'H iov and ijov, used by epic poets, and ritiv, ]\{a, and »7a, in a pluperfect
;
form, are also found in the sense of the imperfect.
3. "/>yWt, to go.
INDICATIVE MODE.
Present.
Sing.
',
Dual.
'»',
Plur.
', ,
Imperfect.
.
OPTATIVE MODE.
Present.
Sing. Dual. PI ur.

lehi.
Present. Present.
H ^ ibPTOg.
MIDDLE VOICE.
INDICATIVE MODE.
Present.
-^ Sing.
actt, , -^ {
Dual.
^'^ -^ ^^ -^
Plur.
.
Imperfect.
-^ , , |
^^ odôp^ ^^^ 1 /<f<9^«, ^, .
IMPERATIVE. PARTICIPLE.
, Present.
^. -,
Present.
^ .
Class II.
1. ", send.
INDICATIVE IMODE.
Present.
'/."',
Sing. Dual.
"eroj', ifroi-,
[
[
,^ . Plur.
. "'i^* **?> 1
Imperfect.
ifTOi', i^^^^f I
,,.
ns VERB.
First Future.
Sing.
, ^ ^ , .
Dual, Plur.
First Aorist.
. .
Perfect. Pluperfect
Second Aorist.
, , on^
^^.
Dual.
Sing.
ItoVj , or
Plur.
IMPERATIVE MODE.
?6^t, ^, I
, Present,
?', |
?, .
First Aorist.
rixov. .
Perfect.
2?, .
Sing.
*
Second
, Dual.
Aorist.
', , .
Plur.
OPTATIVE MODE.
-, ^ , |
, Present.
^, \
^ ^ .
.
First Future.
Second
II
Aorist.
.
Perfect.
cf-jyv,
Sing,
, . , Dual.
', , ^
Plur.
.
SUBJUNCTIVE MODE.
, -^, Irf,
I
],
Present,
, , , *. \
IRREGULAR VERBS IN , J 19
Perfect.
Sing. Daal. .
Plur.
Second Aorist.
INFINITIVE MODE.
Present.
Uvttl•.
\\
.
First Future.
.
Perfect.
\\
PARTICIPLES.
Second
. Aorist.
^ ,
Present.
Uv. \\
^^, ,.
First Future.
?, ^.
Perfect.
\\
Second
?, , Aorist.
sv.
PASSIVE VOICE.
INDICATIVE MODE.
Present.
Sing. Dual. Plur.

-, <, *,
Imperfect.
-, , , &'^ odôv^ -^ &^ ^, vro.
Perfect.
-, ^ T«t, &'^ ^', &^ ', &^ ».

Pluperfect.
7-^ , , &^ ^-, &, &, ^, .

.
Paulo-post-Future.
||
First Aorist.
ed-jyy &; &. ||

&.
First Future.
120 Verb,
MIDDLE VOICE.
Present and Imperfect like the Passive..
First Aorist.
Sing. Dual.
auedOvûoxfoi'^ ' ^ &^ '^ Plur.
uvw.
^-, j], , ^^ -, ^,
|
First Future.
^^ ^^ .
^ ^ fro, &'^
Second
todôr^
Aorist.
-, -^ 1 &^ ,
IMPERATIVE MODE.
Second Aorist,
OPTATIVE MODE,
First Future.
^-^ , , \ ^^ ^^^ &^ &, ^^ \ .

-, , , ^ Second
^
Aorist.
adôv^ -^ ^^ ]
&^ ,
SUBJUNCTIVE MODE.
Second Aorist.
INFINITIVE MODE.
First Future. Second Aorist.
PARTICIPLES.
First Future. Second Aorist.
^-, , ov, |j
-, , ov.
Ohs. 1. This verb is placed here among the rest derived from Voj, whence
it is
Obs. 2. "
larities, since it conforms almost entirely to
and •,
,
;
^.
formed by an improper reduplication but it has scarcely any irregu-
the present and imperfect middle, signify /

send myself, &c., or / am impelled. Hence they are generally used in the
sense of icishing ; thus I'sTut he earnestly wishes, Hom. Odys. ' 327. .
2. 'Huai, to sit.
INDICATIVE MODE.
Present.
^«.,
Sing,
«, ^T«t, riueOôp,
Dual.
^^^ fiaiôt', /^, ^ ». J
^^ , or , ^', |
Imperfect.
râ&oi^^
IMPERATIVE MODE.
^-^ ^^, j
-f , ^.
Present.
Present. Present.
-, ^ ov.
3. ^ to clothe one^s self.
INDICATIVE MODE.
Present and Perfect.
Sing,
ef/itit, etaul•^ etiai &, ^ Dual. Plur.
.
^ , ^^& ^, &L•
Pluperfect.
.
-
•
- , , ^^ ,
First Aorist.
&', &•^ \
-^ ^^ «.
Obs.
Present and Perfect.
This verb
forming
'frrdui,
doubled ; thus
'.
'
?
may
PARTICIPLES.
||
.
First Aorist.
be considered as middle. The active is Voj or

1st Fut., and (inn 1st Aor., Inf. elaai, with
uiv, I will clothe him, Hom. Odys. 79.
generally
.
11
122 verb-
Class III.
1. Keiaai, to lie down.

INDICATIVE MODE.
Present.
-^ , Sing.
rat, •&,
Dual.
^, &, &, ^,
Plur.
vrat.
-^ , , &^
Imperfect.
^, ^, ^^ ^£, .
.
] |
-^ ^ jj,
^, First Future.
-^ ^, &^ ^,
IMPERATIVE MODE.
|
, ^, &^ -, Present,
|
^^ &,
OPTATIVE MODE.
-^ , , &, &^ &^ &,

Present.
^^ .
.
| |
SUBJUNCTIVE MODE.
.
Present.
INFINITIVE.
\\
First Aorist.
PARTICIPLE.
^.
Present.
-^ Present.
^ ov,
2. ", ||
INDICATIVE MODE.
to know.
Present.
-, , ,Sing. Dual.
, «, &/ , Plur.
&L , ».
-^ ^ ^ ', ^,
Imperfect.
, »' &
,,.
IMPERATIVE MODE.
-& &L• ^,
&.
^ , >
,
Present.
&L•
&L•
&, ,
&,
.
Present.
||
'-,
Present.
, v.
MIDDLE VOICE.
INDICATIVE MODE.
Present.
-^ , ^ ^'^
Sing. Dual.
-^ &^^^, Plur.
&^ vrat.
Imperfect.
-^ , , ^^ j
atov^ &, &^ |
&^ .
Ohs. The
-.
Present.
passive loauai is
|]
seldom used.
-^
''
Present.
, ,
often occurs.
3. )]•, to say.
INDICATIVE MODE.
Present.
<\,
Sing.
(f-^;, , (, Dual.
cfUTuv, ,, Plur.
(.
-, , , j
, , , , &,.
Imperfect.
I
^-, ^ , I
, , ,,.
First Future.
-, , , , , ,,
First Aorist.
1 ay.
-^ , jy, [
,
Second
,,. Aorist.
]/,
", , I
IMPERATIVE MODE.
',
Present.
OPTATIVE MODE.
quTcoi', I
, ,
-, , ,
Present.
)•, rjrj•.
'!"/'>
or
, ,, ,
, .
('-, , , ,, ,,.
First Aorist.
124 VERB.
SUBJUNCTIVE MODE.
.
^-)^
LIST OF DEFECTIVE VERBS. 125
DEFECTIVE VERBS.
Many Greek verbs are defective in some of their tenses,
which they supply from other verbs of the same derivation and
^
signification, or of the same signification only.
to receive^ and »,
Thus, luu-
to hear, are used only in the present
and imperfect the former borrows the other tenses from 75''*,
;
and the latter from \', &c. Such is the case in some Latin
verbs thus, gigno borrows genui, gemtum, from the obsolete
:
gcno.
Obs. No Greek verb is used in all the modes and tenses, and
others having been given in the preceding pages merely as examples, to
exhibit all the parts in one view ; but those verbs only are here instanced
as defective which are strikingly so, and which are obliged to borrow
some of their principal parts from other forms related to them in derivation
or signification.
The verbs in the first column of the following list, as also
those whose terminations alone are given, are used only in the
present and imperfect. The verbs in the next column are
generally obsolete in the present and imperfect, and are fol-
lowed by such of their tenses as are borrowed by the verbs in
, ',
the first column.
& to admire,
,,
aj'iift),
A.
&'.
, to break,'
ajw, Ci|Wj
the syllabic
&L•
augment
eaya,
being
.
!' '
!^ >
) commonly used instead of the
3,,
, ,
temporal.
, ,.] ,
to bring,
&•, ) &,
to please,
Verbs
as,
in «>%>
<'()-)
to scatter.
from ,/', to defend ; from
JEiOi.
and «/», poetic derivatives from other verbs

^ ;
:\.^\ to take, ['^'"'^ '

^' '^^''^"^'^ ^^"' ^^•"^'""^'
-'^ &,
to perceive,
), ,), > .
al\^^ôat,'^âl•,^j^'7]v.
/., ) ,,^, ,,V'
.
. .
. , > to increase,' ' t i

>
,, ,„
aU:;b),
)
.
towardoTf.i
/ { ), :&€
.1. >-, -,
11 *
^
126
, to avoid,
( . ,
VERB.
^
, ., ,-
]1
, -, by syncope.
&>
^
to roll,
. ,
to take,
.
, ^ . ),
&,
to find,
'
( ,
, -^
-, ^^ ,
&L•
&/
^,.
aQav^ to err,
to miscarry,
^ .
&',
,', , ,.
-
-,,
Verbs in derivatives from other verbs, take their tenses
from their primitives
',j-
-
J
from
as, to increase,
;
, ^
, -,
), .- '
Imp.
' '
, . ^&,
,
^ ^0 order, < Imper.

5, ';. r
&, , ^.
'
\
y \\
,
,
, '
-77.7
to be hated,
to please,
'
(
<
(
< ,
^-),
^
, -, ,,
-, ^
-'.
> '
'.-
^.r^~
,
,
-^
\
}
>
to be
t4> increase.
i
indignant,
(
f
<
«. ,
^,
, , &.
-
'/-
, & ^-
^-,
&&'. -
Verbs
)^
in ),
derivatives from other verbs; as,
to be blackish; ,
desideratives, inceptives or imitatives, and poetic
-),
to desire to learn;
frora to restrain.
.
(,
,,,, $,
-),
.
. '.
&^
&,
to go. ^
,
.
&L•
2d F.
2d
^.
, .
Pres. Part,
. Pres. Part.
, , ^^
-^&',.
,.
^-^
,
).^ ),, .
^ ,
^
\
', . .
.
>
2d Optat.
)
^ ^ ^2d Pers.
'
^
-^
^ .^ ^
-^ .
,
, ,
^. ^ ^
^''^.
&,
-
, ,.,-
, ^,
^
-^, ,
^.
, ^ -^ ^
&^ &
&
&
-
,..
,
-,-. ^
Verbs in
to feed; , preceded by a consonant, or by
to honor.
•
as,
128 VERB.
,
, ,-),, ^
,
., .
-
,
. ,
.,
to learn, (. 2d
to divide,
,
,
, &,&^
, ,
^«/, to burn.)
from
^ to bite,
\
C
<
*
.',--
&, -,
-^ /"
^ -.&,^^,
,
.
),
to sleep, /
, &,
,
,
i
to fear,
to want,
^
(
\
, ,
,, -
-.
, ^&,.&^.
, ,
Imperat.
Poet,
).
^ \
}
\ to teach,
)
..
, ,
, -, -
.
.
to run away,
) ^^ ,,
, ,,
&/
Poet
,
3t.
^ )
\ to
•»)
seem,
to he able,
,^--
).
),
^',
.
),
',,-,, &}'.
-),
to go in, put on, <^ , &, &-
, .),
Verbs in preceded by a consonant ; as, to roll.
, to rouse,
E.
. ,.
, ^
^.&^^-^ &,
-^
^
2d F. . for C
'
^ ^ -^ &,
>.
-
&/
& &^
Verbs in
from
poetic derivatives from other verbs
to burn.
^
. , ,
; as,
,,
^, to see,
,
, ^
^. ,
•.
Sync,
Plup.
Inf.
' .
or
. to know,
Att.
Optat.
Sync,
,,
^
Verbs in polysyllable derivatives ; as, from
^
,
to avoid.
to say, to ask, I
^ -, -. ât, Paul.-p.-
^ , ^ -F.
, ,^ |
Verbs in desideratives formed from futures ; as,
to desire to marry, from -).
. , ^|,
Att. ^, ^-
^^/,
. ^,
to drive, &L•
&,
].& ^'.
^
, ^..
&L•
.1
to ask,
\
,,
3'
&)^
&,
^
)
)
to
to
go
make
to come,
to ruin,
red,
- ',,&
&,
&),
Vilv&ov,
Perf
^&.
.
Sync,
^'.
}!,
&^&
&)
»1, ]
to eat, ,
,
, .,.-
which see.
,
to sleep,
£5»,
',
Sync,
,
to find.
.
,
^^^ (Wofcj
130 VERB.
^^
-^
Verbs
tion
from
in
;
^^ âs,
)^
LIST OF DEFECTIVE VERBS.
from
to wage war.
,
to be aiigry ;
131
derived from contracts of the same significa-
^
-, to direct,
, ', ,,
-^ &^ -.
^-,^
.
^
i
to come,
. , -
-^. . &.
^
, )
) »^-
,, Ua&t, Pr.
7fT7J-aWj
^,
^
.
, .
,
>
)
to hum,
to mix,
[
''
, ^
,,
,
, -^,-,
. &^ -, , ,
&^••
^,
, ), .
, ,,
.
»"7^-
,
C '
,
"i
, -,^
'
to gain,
, )
^, .
^),
)
^
to overtake,
\ to weep, ^
. &. ^
, ,,
}
,
Imperat. &,
to hear,
-
^ , -,
^-
,
"•,_'>
)^
)
J
to satisfy,
to
-^ •^
hang,
'
,. -
, ,^.-'.
),
^
&/
^
132
^
VERB.
^ ^^
, -, ^
, &, ,
, ^
.
)
mix,
,
-, ^ -
)
^^^^-
&,
^, to remember, ^
-^ ^-^••
-
^
,
'), )
)
to reinain,
to wipe off.
'^
,
.
4,
), .
. f 1
JJ
.
^ ,''.^ -
^
, ,,
'
(
Verbs in and formed from others by inserting•

as,
into !>"
to sell,
as,
from •
to fall, from .
some of which change
,
,, to bite,
.
^ to smell,
^,
. & ^,
,
^
',
Att.
<(1>'0), \
> to swell, ^
, ^
), ^^, .
^, -
,
}
)
to think,
)
)^ ^.^ -^
'^ go moat/,
, ^
.
^
to
•( ^^ ^-^
,
&-
^,
^. «,
,
':] to slide,
)^ ), «,
')^
)^ j
to destroy,
^ ^
&/
«.
, -^ & >-
134 VERB.
,',,
,,-, •»
.
00&>,
^
^,, }
to swear,
to wipe off, ,, .
-, ,,
',
&,
2d F.
,
.
hv^
^» )
to benefit^
,
, ,,,-
&/
(^'.
^,
6(,
)
to excite,
, .
^, -
, ), -,
.
oôjâ &
,
, >
to smell,
to owe,
.
, ,
},
,
^,
-, y.a.
^
^',
,'^-
^,^.
Sov,
Boeot. for
to suffer,
--, )-^,
&.
, , ,-., --'.
ixBiavvvb)
_ '
>
to cook,
to spread.
,,
,,
,
,
',
,, -
-
-
&/
,
, )
•^ ^' ^, -
&.
,,
. , -
^, ,
^,
^ , -
V ^"'» \ to fasten,
. ,
, .
, -
, ^, &
7iuyi\-
,
, to drink, . .
,, ~ 2d F.
.
.
Imoerat.
for
nXdî.
,
,
LIST OF DEFECTIVE VERBS.
. ), ., -
,
135
^ ^,,
to give to drinJc, lot,
> to fill^
,
\,
-, -.
^,,,^,
.
,
j Imp. Pas.
)^
). Sync,
&.
•
,
,
to selly
&^ , , -
ni )
)
to burn,
. ,
,.
,
-,
, ^.
., ^^^
,
nvvdûpouut,.
to fall,
to sneeze,
to inquire,
),
,,.
^. ,
^),
IX .
2d F. .-
.
, , .,
^, \
)
to do,
to flow,
,
, . ,
^, ,•
Att.
.
), .
,
'
» *^-"'
>
I
to break,
.
, ^,
.
, ,
, -~
,-^
&/
•
^"*/^-
3',
•.
, _ >
j
to strengtiien,
° , ,
&^,
farewell.
, . ),,,
2.
&, -^- &L
,, , ,-
\ , .. . ,
o, - ^
\
)
to extinffuish,
*
.
.
).
',
, _ ' >
)
scatter,'
-.
)^ .
136 VERB.
^ 2d .
^ ^^
Inf.
,
^
Verbs in »,
derivatives from verbs in oj pure, form their
tenses from their primitives ; as, to find,
).
,
from
, -,-. -
,,-
^
,
ôgvya^^
^'^
^
-,
\
)
)
)
>
to pour
to spread,
to spread,
to have.
out.
>,
()^
^
,
', ^
^
,-
^ (^.
See '/.
-
,
taXa
/.,
,
'
>
)
to bear,'
\
,
^
^
J > to extend.
.
^, ^
to cut,
to bring forth,
,.
»,
'),
-
( to bore,
.
,
^
to wound,
,,
^ to run,
&>, )
'^ >
J
to cat,
,
1^ *
to obtain,
'
happen,
i^-t
^ '
J /,.,
^
, ,
'
> ,
-
^ to promise,
.
C VI , . -^^-,
(, (J-
-&
Verbs
Verbs
in
in ,
vS-, poetic derivatives
from ^'^ to destroy.
polysyllables ; as, , from other verbs
to show.
; as,
.
&),
,
roj,
^
\
, ,..
^^
, &'
to say,
>
I \,
)
\',
.
'-,
'^ , '^
.
'', ^,
8.\,- -
,
, to hear,
.),&,)\(.
^
, ,,
^.
.,
. ^,1st i]i'ei'
», ,
iqOQtjau^
,
Sync.
2d . Imperat. qo^^.
&^ &-^ .-^^
&)^
&^
-),
to he sooner,
to destroy,
,
^ ^. (, -
, ^ &.
&-^
^
, to produce,
12*
. .
13S VERB,
,, .
^
^ ^-
, -^ ^
.
,, .
^ ifi*
,
xgib, V to rejoice,
,
,
}
to receive, Jiold^
'
<^^,
,
^,.
. ^ for
,
)^ \
)
r y
, ,
..^ ,
^^^--
-
^
)
^^ ^^^^ ^
^,,',
-
, _ ' >
j
to heap
- up,
x-y
^.
,
.
-, ,
,
&),
& \
^^,
, ,),'^
&,
?-
to push,
&.
K«j
IMPERSONAL VERBS.
Impersonal verbs are either used alone, or they are accom-
panied by an infinitive or part of a sentence with which they
agree. Most of them are also more or less frequently used
^^,
personally, sometimes with rather a different meaning.
following are some of those in most frequent use.
, ,,
The
^ , ', ^
")\,7\, belongs, suitable; pleases
,
', it is necessary;
it
it
it
is
it is
seems;
lawful, it is allowable;
it is
it
possible
;
it
befits,
concern
it is
it
profitable
is likely
;
;
itbecomes ;
qiln, it is wont ,
it occurs,
;
it offers;
it
^^,
happens
it
;
behoves ;
it is
vcf,
a
it suffices, it is sufficient.
Ohs. 1. Under impersonal verbs may be comprehended those which

denote changes of the weather, as, xiti, vl(ptt,
, ,
which grammarians ,
, (). ,
explain by an ellipsis of Zevg, or ',, sometimes expressed, as, vet
, ^,
Herodot.
Obs. 2. Many verbs are used impersonally in the passive voice, even
neuters which otherwise can have no proper passive, as, '/,
i'jxovaTai, '^,
1
ADVERBS. 139
PARTICLES.
The name of particles is given to the adverbs, prepositions,
and conjunctions, that is, to the indeclinable parts of speech.
ADVERBS.
I. The article, substantives, adjectives, pronouns, and verbs,
,,,
are used adverbially.
1.
article; as, altogether
the quickest manner.
; ,
Substantives and adjectives in the accusative, frequently with the
finally ; ;», at first ;
Particularly neuter adjectives ; as, ,,
^,
,
quickly; continually; u?.aiOr, formerly ; quietly;
Ti/.tvTuiu, at last.
,2.
as,
.,3.
,The here, or there; ^, ',
article, substantives, adjectives,
ju.^tly, icith justice ;

Substantives, adjectives,
henceforth, hereafter ;
hardly
',
; publicly;
this loay, thus.
and pronouns, in the genitive
there, here.
,
and pronouns, in the dative
privately;
; as,
;
4.
immediately ;
as, 7Ta(>u/<i>]iiu, ,,
and pronouns, Avith prepositions preceding ;
Substantives, adjectives,
out of the way, afar off; y.adôXuv,
,
universally, altogether ; xudantQ, just as.
, 5. The imperatives of some verbs; as, aye, (ftQs,

n'ly, indeed, assuredhj.
I wish ; and the optative tZfv, he it so, well, from
I'rs, come on;
So the second aorist indicative or

',
. ',
II. Derivative adverbs come from nearly all the parts of
speech, and are too numerous to be specified, but some of
their principal terminations are oj?,
and ay.
ei^ rt, ,^ ,^
1.
.», ..,
Adverbs in oc are formed from the genitive plural; as, from
svitahly, in a becoming manner.
•,
,
ao(fo>c. 2cisely ;
(,
, ]),
2. Those in are generally derived from the nominative
in fiocks ; -9, -9^.,
unanimously;
as, from ;
',
, , ,,
a dog.
like
3. Others in )^ generally come from verbs, but some in or
from substantives; as. from av'/J.uiiîuvvi, >'%•,
in a word, summarily
'., Ql'^rJ. secretly; here and there, scatteringly
according to ivealth.
4. Some adverbs derived and compounded from substantives and verbs
end in ti and as, •
in a body ; and aua/sl, withcmt
fightins ; iyny])'oi)Tt, icatchfully.
/.,
,, 5. Those in inn are mostly derived from verbs
Ê/./.r^noTt, after the manner of the Greeks, in Greek.
out;
G.
7.
Those
',
in
five times.
Adverbs formed from prepositions end in
below.
as, from
come from numerals above

•
;
/
as,
•
from
as,
t
from
, ,
',
with-
140 PARTICLES.
III. Certain adverbs of place, answering to the questions

where whither ? whence ? are chiefly derived from nouns
?
,,,,
those denoting the place where ending in ««, /, &>,
and a few in •
whither, in ,
• ^.
and whence, in
Primitives.
ADVERBS. 141
viot, sQi,
,,
ADVERBIAL PARTICLES USED IN COMPOSITION.
,
, ,,
(Soi, prefixed to words, increase their signifi-
Sa, la,
, ,-,
cation; a.s, very vianifest ; ioi^nouoc, loudly roaring; (iui'/.Tuoc,
excessive hunger ; very shady ; tunlovToc, very rich; vo-
racious; /.tnotiiQOQ, very bud ; [iQtilnvuc, loudly shouting.
Jug signifies trouble, difficulty, or misfortune ; as, difficult
to be borne ; to be unfortunate. Its opposite is tv, wliich, how-
ever, is not an inseparable particle; as, easy to be borne
,, ,
ivxv/iw, to be fortunate.
Ns and denote privation as, vLroStg, having feet, or very short
[., i »; ;
feet; incurable; n'/jiduoc, innumerable: but sometimes %

increases as,
; widely floicing.
,, ,
avtv or lafQ signifies privation ; as, invisible. From
«/ it denotes increase; as, u;u/oc, very woody. From it impUes
union and collection; as, one of the same bed, a icife. Sometimes
it is redundant; as, the same as an ear of corn. It often
assumes befiire a vowel; as, unworthy.
INTERJECTIONS.
Interjections are included in Greek under adverbs of exclamation, of
which the following are the principal.
..
,.
1. Rejoicing ; as,
2. Grieving ; as, tov,
3. LMUghing ;
Laughing as, a, a.
4.
5.
Bewailing
Wishing ;
;
as, sl,
,
as, «?, o7,
oî,
ti'-^s.
, or
6. Rejecting; as, «. /.
., , .
7. Praising ; as, iia, tvys.
8. Condemning ; as, , ifsv
9. Jldmiring ; as, ,
10. Deriding; as,
11. Calling ; as, w.
12. Enjoining silence ; as, »7, i/.
13. Threatening ; as, oral,

14. Raging; as, tt'or.
Ohs. The Greek grammarians seem to have improperly reckoned as

adverbs, what in the Latin, and other languages, are called interjections;
since the latter are mere sounds excited by strong emotion, and have no
close connection with the rest of the sentence, for the cases joined with
some of tht'm may be easily explained by an ellipsis, except the vocative,
which is always placed absolutely; while, on the contrary, adverbs, prop-
erly so called, always qualify the signification of some verb, participle, ad-
jective, or other adverb. It may be further observed, that many words
are considered as adverbs by some grammarians, and as conjunctions by
others.
COMPARISON OF ADVERBS.
Adverbs derived from the genitive plural by changing
intot.*;, form their comparative and superlative in the same
manner from the genitive plural of the comparative and super-
^
142
lative
^
)!'^
.
; , as, wisely,
,
PARTICLES.
the genitive plural of

);^ , - from aocfCrt',
wise,
,
,
,
. .
Ohs. Instead of the comparative and superlative in wc, the adjective is
frequently used adverbially in the neuter singular of the comparative, and
the neuter plural of the superlative
basely,
as, (/)$, oocfwTfQov, ;
After the same analogy are compared

,
^
•
adverbs not derived from adjectives; as,
. near, daaov,
in Tiooj and tutoj
&c.
as, «it», above, arvntQoy,
•
Yet instead of these we as often find

very,
Adverbs formed from prepositions, as well as some others, are

near, ,
, ,',
^^,
•
^/.,
compared
PREPOSITIONS.
The
syllables, viz.
, ,,,
prepositions
', , , ^ , , , ,
elc, l•/.
are
or
eighteen,
|, iv ,
six of which are mono-
and twelve dis-
.), .
syllables, viz.
TTfoi, Their meaning and construction will be given
in the Syntax.
CONJUNCTIONS.
Conjunctions may be divided, in reference to their signification, into
the following classes.
1. Copulative
neither, nor.
; as, , ts, Poet. )]Sf, and; ^r^di, ',, ,,
, ,,/', ,
2.
3.
Disjunctives as, r}^ Poet. >'*, or.
Concessive ; as, y.av,
4. Adversative ; as, ulX'u, ut'uq,
although. ^,
/.,, but; Si, which answers ,
to Mil, indeed; yet, nevertheless.
5. Causal; as,
hifiSi i.Tff/',
,
/., ,
,
, , ,, ,
',
for; ovvty.a, because; on, that, because; iiisl,
fT/fiTo», since, for as much as.
6. Illative or rational; as, aou, ovv^
likewise,
7.
8.
Fi?ial or perfective; as,
Conditional ; as, (?, Vav, >7v, "uv, if.
therefore; diuittq, wherefore
ToiyuQovv, therefore.
o/ioyg, that, in order that.
9. Potential ; as, •. Poet, y.i, xh. in rendering which use is commonly

made of may, can, might, could, would, or should.
to. Expletive ; as, ~un,av. y*, [,
()lx. Till, which are
-d^r, ^,
rv or \vv, ,nov,
not easily translated into other languages, but have a
. ,
peculiar expression, the loss of which would be discovered by a critical
judge of the niceties of Greek composition.
SYNTAX.
Every sentence, even the simplest, must contain a subject
and a predicate.
,^^ ],
is immortal;
the sun shines ;
where 6 ^,
^
The subject is that of which any thing is declared, and the
predicate that which is declared concerning the subject, as,
the soul
^^/, are the subjects, and
the predicates, the substantive verb,
^
which is commonly called the copula, being considered as
forming a part of the predicate.
Words in sentences have a two-fold relation to one another,

namely, that of concord or agreement, and that of government
or influence^
Concord is when one word agrees with another in some

accidents, as in gender, number, person, or case and govern- ;
ment, when one word requires another to be put in a certain

case or mood.
CONCORD.
Agreement of one Substantive ivith another.
Rule Substantives signifying the same thing

I.
agree in case
"Oti7^Qo;
\
()
as,
,70(>;T),c,
]^, the city
;
Homcrthepoet ;
Thebes;
'Ôiu'qovtov
rijg Qr^îoiv,
, ,of Homer tlie poet,
of the city Thebes.
Obs. The substantive added to another in the same case contains

1.
gonerall•/an explanation, or fuller definition, but not unfrequently it de-
notes character or purpose; as, hiul aiuSuikw /owii using me as a ,
,
counsellor, Plato.
Obs. 2. Sometimes one of the substantives

supplied by an infinitive or part of a sentence
fTi, sc. t}'fo, TllUCyd.
Orest. 1103.
' Ekin^r;
'
'
is
;
'
',
understood
as, f^mtaiox/.i^c
; or its
I'y.oy
place
nanU
Eurip.
ToO ^,
Hither are to be referred the following" and similar examples, where to
the rest of the sentence uXXu y'uo. :
as the poet says, no labor is a reproach; S.,

,,
Aiyliikvar, &c. stand in the accusative, in apposition with
>
'
of'()ii• but,
y.uTOrciv
«»;? i^y.ouiv ; but do tee, us the sayiiig is, come after the feast ? Plato ;
,,
144 '
CONCORD.
TO Se
greatest of
^, ytyiarov,
all,
^ al^v
you see your own territory increased, Xen.
Plato.
Agreement of an Adjective with a Substantive.

at^zavoiUvyjv oo«c, Lid tchat is the
; /.ui,
II. An adjective agrees with a substantive in

gender, number, and case as,
a just man.
;
, ,
,,
d'ly.aiog avl^Q, large rivers,
)^ ., a beautiful woman. high mountains.
-
This rule applies to the article, adjective, adjective-pronoun, and
, parti-
,, ) , , ,^
ciple; as, TO fu'ov 'aQua,my chariot ; these two laws ;
the soldiers having heard.
Obs. 1. Sometimes an adjective does not agree in gender and number
signification; as, (
with the substantive to which it is joined, but with another of equivalent
of Hector, Horn.;
Thucyd.
Dionys. Halicar.
Sometimes an adjective
' '&
is referred to a substantive implied in a preced-
ing word; as,
' (sc.
Si
Herodot. . 110.
;
lar
Obs. 2.
adjectives;
^. ,
The
as,
feminine dual
Hesiod.
, ^'Eoy. 197.
is
Isocr.
often joined with masculine
Sometimes also masculine adjectives are found with the feminine singu-
and plural as,; the suck-giving deic, Hom. Odys. «'. 467.
;
The
tragedians use the masculine for the feminine, especially when the
plural instead of the singular of a female is used ; as, oi
spoken by Alcestis of herself, Eurip. Also \vhen a chorus of women are
^/,
speaking of themselves.
'^
in
^ , '
Obs. 3. An infinitive, or part of a sentence, often supplies
the place of the substantive, and then the adjective is put in
^ ^ '
the neuter singular
Herodot.
, ^^
the neuter plural;
.
as,
Thucyd.
38.
iait
;
.
^•^ Theophrast. ;
as,
88. ;
Thucyd. Sometimes
-
Frequently a substantive verb takes for its subject, instead
of an infinitive or part of a sentence, the subject of an infini-
tive or part of a sentence, with which the adjective agrees in
':)•^
^
gender, number, and case as, for
)^
;
^, ( ' ^-
^\0^^
for
Herodot.;
?;/,
,
am right to punish 7/?, Aristoph.;
OTt for ]•^
Demosth.
AGREEMENT OF ADJECTIVES. 145
Ohs.
referred to
4. An
^fi«, truth is powerful, JEschin.
adjective in the neuter
or nodyuu understood
Ooleqov niqvy.frv
r^
ai'Oôoino;,;
;
'
gender must often be
as,
.
iuuv )-
^,, , ,
man is naturally deceitful^ Aristoph.
Menand. Sometimes the substantive is expressed as,
ol rouoi eial,
a poct is a light thing, Plato. Thus in

Latin, triste lupus stabulis, Virg.
The neuters &c. may be joined with substantives
;
.,' he ',
:,
of any gender, number, or case as, uzfi ov ueiov
tcilL bring not less than twenty thousand horse, Xen.
Plato;
;
jjuouiitvfi i^vioug
*»• uaqrvoi n
/. »; . ;
Id.
Proper names in the singular are often accompanied by the neuters
TTijr-nu, rrai'Tu, and others; as, i'cî
first rank amongst the Athenians, Lucian ;
Thucyd.
Ei-ûiu
• &^•
JiQonu, keep thou the'
l^v, '
Obs. 5. A may have an adjective plural
substantive dual
as, ^^ auqoTtoag, Hom. Also a substantive plural may have
an adjective dual, when no more than two persons or things
nlu'iovTe, Hom. II. n' 428, where
,,
are alluded to; as, .
two vultures only are meant.

Ohs. t). The adjectives ^^, and others of the
same kind,
thing; as, ] ,,
usually signify the middle, the summit, &lc. of any
in the middle of the lake, Herodot.
',
ifi
uvr ( qui Id,
Ohs. 7. Substantives are often used as adjectives ; as,
yl(bau<iv
Herodot.
genitive
Tjj; ^^ ; as,
for
she taught the Greek language,
Sometimes one of the substantives is put in the
/ovoof inior, for enrj
Eurip. ^,
Ohs. 8. Adjectives referred to substantives are often used
Aristoph. ,
for
^;
adverbs, or for substantives in the dative, particularly
;,
adjectives denoting time
vv/.il,
/i*^t-•, Id.
participles in
;
as,
^
^^
he gladly goes to Cyrus, Xen.
they slept all night,
-
TTooeveiui nooc Kvoor^ for
some instances
;
^
el•o^' Tiavriyioi, for
^, &' ,']. Hom.
; as,
;
for Jjf
^"-^•
;
(5(ar«, for
^ So
at last he said,
also
(,
Herodot.
Demosth.
;
let
«iofT, choose boldly,
us quickly consider. Id.
Ohs. 9. An adjective may be used without a substantive, the
at last they derided me,
Aristoph.;
ert, Herodot.
ovTo;, ';, , &lc.
;
the spectators laugh, Aristoph.

;
Also participles as,

{ârihr
^
one from which it takes its gender, number, and case, being
understood as, aogroc, the wise man ; sc. "/, the des-
q(e, Aristoph. So the pronouns
Anacr. •
r^
;
;,
,^,
13
146 CONCORD.
;
quently used in this wr.y
thus, Plato
'. ;
,,
xoluy.eiovju;, Isocr.
; as,
,
Neuters
beautiful things are

^
in particular are fre-
uXi^fteg ovto»; the truth is
^', difficult,
- -
Id. ; TO sc. the cavalry, Xen. ;
the Greeks, Thucyd. ; nqo literally, before the

Trojan affairs, before the Trojan war, Id.
^, ^,
;
after the battle of Leuctra, Strabo ;
the future is miknoivn to all inen, Dem.

^];,
if you remember the past, Isocr.
;
Words thus taken are said to be taken substantively.
)
Obs. 10. Frequently adverbs with the article prefixed are
equivalent
Thucyd.;
ol
oi
,^,
to adjectives as,
they acquire the character of substantives

neighbors ; uvqlov, sc. the morrow
: the upper city,
the men of that time Herodot.
^,
*»,
the nearest relations, Aristoph.
; as,
;
ol
oi
,
,
,
Hence
the
the
, , , , ,
illustrious,
,
Obs. . Neuter adjectives, with and without the
quently used adverbially
"^, TO for
unexpectedly.
; as,
the future, henceforth;
article, are very
first, at first ;
diligeiitly
fre-
Agreement of a Verb with a Nominative.
III. A
verb agrees with its nominative in num-
ber and person as,
•»
;
OL
,
',, I write.
you two hear.
the poets say.
commonly omitted where
,,,
Obs. I, The nominative is it is
known from the form of the verb, or from the connection, and
I love, thou lovest,
, ,,
no stress is laid on it; as,
he loves.
In particular, verbs indicating the employment of a definite
person are often used without a nominative expressed ; as,
;
the trumpeter gave a sig-
,
or sc.
Xen. So frequently the plurals qaal, and others,
nal,
{>.
-
sc.
preceding verb
Also verbs whose subject
; as,
,, -,
is construed with the
for
,
Marcellum quam tardus
Obs. 2.
6
An infinitive,
supplies the place of a nominative; as, (/;>'' )»'
;
sit, Caes. ap. Cic.
some part of a sentence, often
or
it was base to betray your benefactors, Thucyd.

Xen. ; as
,
in Latin, nosti
on ,
SuarXev;
',
manifest, Xen.
it is
wise have no nominative

AGREEMENT OF VERBS.
Thus
as, meoihr
^' r^r, that the king was terrified was
also with impersonal verbs
lawful for me to depart, Plato; which other-
del, you have need of
;
as, tteaii
;
147
wings, Aristoph. ifi, it rains.

;
Exc. 1. The nominative of the neuter plural is
commonly joined with a verb singular as, ;
Tu
.
^toa TQf/it,
, animals run.
^
Tue Uftv/f, the chariots
/,?»/ many arms icere taken.
tive
Exc. Sometimes, thouo;h rarely, the nomina-
2.
of the masculine and feminine plural is joined
with a verb singular ;
TtXXtrai, for
as,
, vOTtQojv
the soft har-
,,
mony of the hymns serves as a prelude to the verses
that follow, Pind.
Exc. 3. A nominative dual is often put with a
verb plural ; two men tame
as, arcToc
hither, Aristoph.Also a nominative plural, meai\ing
but two persons or things, may be put with a \erb
in the dual; as, n/ot my iwo
horses excel,
verb either
as,
tude decreed.
A
en&ror iv
^
Exc. 4.
plural verb
account of the
A
Hom.
, noun may be joined with a

collective
of the singular or of the plural number
is often joined with
notion of plurality w^hich

((:, Herodot.
;^' ; ,
or tvji^cfiaavTo, the multi-
is
and au.o;^
involved ,•
on
as,
,
;
Plato. This construction may be explained by the followinor

passage, where the plural is placed first, and then the singular,
denoting its parts; ., , nuo'
Hom.
Accusative hfore the Infinitive.
IV. The infinitive mode has an accusative before

it ; as,
oi'ouai :?.(, I think that you are rich.
148 CONCORD.
,
sometimes understood; as,
Qior qaoy.fip '^ ^,
Ohs. 1. The pronoun accusative before the mfinitive
ei; 6
sc.
^^
if any one.
(-)-
should seize you,
is
and lead you mvay to prison, saying that you acted unjustly,
^
Plato. Thus in Latin, nos abiisse rati, sc. eos, Virg.
An may agree with the

adjective or participle expressed
,
is,
truth,
',
^'
pronoun understood;
Xen.
sc. , ;
liyeir, he
as, uqrpii
, gave me
hltovju leyen'
leave to come
entreat you, rememhcring ichat has been said^

'' and
that ^-]^
&
represent the
^
iJyoj, ,
to assist us, Lys.
Obs. 2. The accusative wi.h

and similar verbs of spyeaking.
sive, either the accusative remains before the
the infinitive is
•
put especially after the verbs
When
^
these are in the pas-
changed
infinitive, or it is
fiMstr ,.
into the nominative of the leading verb ; as,
Juxei, r id etur,
Kvoor sin fir, Xen.
has the ssme construction.
^,
Obs. 3. Use is very frequently made of // or wc with the indicative or
optative, instead of the accusative with the infinitive; as, rottiûi
Xen. ;
are sometimes united; as, ror

.
^^. \y.iji,
-^
Herodot.
said that the daughter of JVisus fell

it is
in love icith Minos, and that she sheared off her father's hair, Pausan.
,
Both constructions
fouaîjrar
'
iXniifiT Sf XQ[,
stances
^
Sometimes even the accusative with the infinitive follows
'
has a similar construction.
\),
or as,
et'.TtCr, they relate that the fates said, Diod. Sic.
Xen. In a few in-
•
Exc, The infinitive takes before it the same case
as the preceding verb, when both verbs relate to the

same person
Ohs. 1
ipr^niv avr'oc
.
; as,
ytyiviâSai , he says that he teas the cause.
As the infinitive takes before it tlie same case as the preceding

verb, when both verbs relate to the same person, and the accusative when
ovy. tipii urToc

the C07nmand, Thucyd.
'fxfiiov ^,
they do not, it sometimes takes both the nominative and accusative ; as,
he said that not he, but the other, had
2. When the infinitive and the preceding verb relate

Obs.
to the same person, the subject of the infinitive is generally
omitted, but expressed when an emphasis lies upon it; as,
' •.^
uy.nven'^ sc. autog, he said that he heard, Xen. ;- ^
struction,
;,
sc. «', you said that you alone warded off de-
Horn.
which take the same case
Thus also before
after as before
the infinitives
them ^
of verbs
-
; as,
shui sc. uv!o;, Aristoph.
Obs. 3. This rule obtains also, when the infinitive is pre-
ceded by the article or by the particle , • as, ov
SAME CASE AFTER A VERB AS BEFORE IT. 149
yqucpelz &'^ J am ^^ not proud of having escaped
];
when accused, Demosth.
sailed out governor to

eli ^'.-iSySov^
;
he brought
Abydus, Xen.
it to pass, that he himself
ixnlcvum
Obs. 4. Sometimes infinitive has before it an accusative, and the

tlie
preceding verb a nominative, although both verbs relate to the same per-
son as, (jiiiui
;
wisdom, Plato ;
oocf'iu:
Jia, Apollod.
/.&^,
I think that I shall be filled with
The same Case after a Verb as before it.
V. Any verb may have the same case after it
as before it, when both ivords refer to the same

thing ;
],
as,
, am
you remain a slave.
Socrates,
6 -^.;, the river is called Euphrates,

())
'&,
-, you say
,,
that you are a god.
,',
iStovTo they begged him to he zealous,
' roil /.
/,»• () he forbade them to be navigators.
we think the earth to be a sphere,
instead of being a city, it became
a castle.
Obs. 1. The verbs which most frequently have the same

case after them as before them, are,
1.
',
Substantive and neuter verbs ; ^ /^
as, flul,
ixh'O),
2. The
^ ^ &C•
passive of verbs of calling or naming, choosing,
appearing, &-c. as, y.uXovuai^ orouaôuai^ uigovuui^
&LC
;
,
-
- :,
vovufxi, quivouui,
To
Obs. 2.
called; as,
Theocrit.
' belongs also
this rule
Soph.;
signifying to be
^.
So in Latin, rexque paterque audisti coram, Hor.
Epist. I. 7, 37.
Obs. 3. When any of the above verbs are placed between two nomina-
tives of different numbers, they are commonly governed in number by tlie
former
OTUjaru'i
iuTDv (^()
;
'•) ;,
as, j^
uniTt^c
(
i^v i-Ahov Tfiioic, the division xcas a hundred men, Xen.
'/rW/vj;
Demosth. but sometimes by the latter as,
fxj'rXo}.
;
Thucyd. III. 12. So

;
participles stand-
;
ing between two substantives of different genders commonly agree with
^
the former, but sometiAies with the latter; as,
Ki'uifutuv, Pausan.
Obs. 4. An having the genitive or dative before it, go-erned
^,-^ ^^^ , ^ ^^,

infinitiA'e
by any other word,
^^
Lucian ;
, that
may
is,
be followed by the accusative as,
n(fini
she granted your petition to be youns,
«?'tol•? being under-
•,
stood, they entreated the Mhenians to assist them, Herodot.

13*
159 CONCORD.
Ohs. 5. The Latin poets, in imitation of the Greeks, sometimes put the
nominative instead of the accusative after the infinitive, when it relates to
%e same person with the nominative to the preceding verb ; as, retttilit
Ajax esse Jovis pronepos, for se esse pronepotem, Ovid.
The Construction of Relatives.
VI. The relative ,

, agrees with the ante- ,
cedent in gender, number, and person and is con- ;
strued through all the cases as the antecedent would
av
01
at
»;
)
be in its place as,
^,,
(\
lus fowaag,
iv
',
;
wv
cc'ig
you who saved me.
',, the soldiers whom he cormnanded.

the villages in u'hich they encamped.
the letter
If no nominative come between the relative and the verb,

which he wrote.
the relative will be the nominative to the verb.

But if a nominative come between the relative and the verb,
the relative will be of that case, which the verb or noun follow-
ing, or the preposition going before, usually governs.
^
Obs. 1. The antecedent often stands in the same clause,
and
'^ -^
^în the
,
^
same
this is the
case, with the relative
man whom you saw;
; as,
elg îv
ov
' ^^ ^
Xen.; o)v
^&
SC. Xen.
Plato; &;
-
;
, Plato.
.
Obs. 2. TTic relative frequently stands alone, the antecedent
, ' "^, ,
being understood ; as, for
Sometimes the relative is expressed in
' ^,
one case, and must afterwards be supplied in another as,
for
^ ^
by means of a certain engine.,
;
which Archimedes
invented, and is named cochlia, for and which is named, Diod. Sic.
,
Obs. 3, When the relative comes after two Avords of differ-
ent persons, it agrees with the first or second person rather
than the third ' () Horn.
',)
as, ;
^ ^ ,,
&
word
Obs.
;, 4.
as,
The
where
antecedent is
is referred to the personal

often implied
^
in a preceding
pronoun contained in Xen.

is the antecedent
; 6(^,
where contained in
to ,
Hesiod. Theog. 450.
CONSTRUCTION OF RELATIVES. 151
, ,
Ohs. 5. The indefinite adjectives oroc, &c. are also sometimes con-
strued like relatives ; as,//;
to them; as, oirw ,

off»;? (};^£, Herodot.
applied to different substantives; as,

not' tjuav Juxidatiiovioi, Demosth.
i
But these have
/
commonly other adjectives either expressed or understood, which answer
»;•^, Xen. ; and are often
tan o'loi ,
Exc. 1. The relative is often attracted into the
case of
our ' \8
its
',
/;?,
antecedent
\
; as,
with the ships which he had.
t$wxa let him partake of the joy which I
^, ,,-,
gave you.
Obs. 1. The antecedent is often found in the same clause
with the relative attracted as, *' ;
^^
I enjoy what goods I have :
Frequently it is understood as,
and this for &
^v
Lucian
;
Xen.
for
;
'
ti'via
Obs. 2.
')• ,' ,,
Thucyd.
Other relatives also undergo a similar attraction as,
fewer of such evils as we have noio
;
'
-\,, , ^
mentioned, Plato. Frequently
native with thi'i as,
Tore
•
Thucyd.;
Xen. Also when it stands for ojan as,
^^^ 6-9-, for
Demosth. In like manner
uvSqI, for
av9qa>novc,
•
as,
iaufv, Aristoph.
for
,
9,
with the substantive belonging to it, is
;$, '
attracted into the case of its antecedent, instead of standing in the nomi-
, '- •
,
^--
Obs. 3. The relative oaog
have been originally formed
', instead of
biad. II. pr. fin. )]v
^&'^&,
is sometimes used in phrases which seem to
' -^
from two clauses referring to each other ; as,
,,
thus,
Plato, Alci-
exceedingly great,
,
Aristoph. Plut. 750.
Obs. 4. The phrase is usually considered as one word, in
'
^,' ^,
the sense of the Latin nemo non, every one, in which case
the same case as the pronoun relative following; as,
ovTir' ov
they underwent every danger, Demosth. ;
for i^v iifaaav
they said that every one returned loeeping, Xen.
is put in
'
Obs. 5. The antecedent is sometimes put in the case of the relative, and
'
the latter omitted, when the former is a demonstrative pronoun, with or
'
for '
what you ask
cc:iov
is not
[
^,
without a substantive, and would otherwise be joined with
,
for
worthy of an
':'
a.7isicer,
;
as,
Plato;
,,
''
icho are these strangers
•
whom I see ?
;
Eurip.
Exc. 2. The relative frequently differs in number

from the antecedent, when the idea of plurality is
men whe
^^ &,
involved in the singular
,
as,
approach them, Hom. ;

;
they fascinate all ,

. ^ *' -r:--•••• • avv, he
152
salutes all whom Ac meets, Vldlo; "uv

CONCORD.
,- ,
every one to
some
Obs. The
and the phrase
whom I apply tcill take part icith me
singular
hit breastplates,
;
In the same manner

is
some j as,
adjective tnoi, tnai, tvta,
Xen.
'
av-^Qv
;
have you admired some men for their icisdom? Id.

is often used with a relative adverb following,
'
the less, Thucyd.
is followed by relatives both singular and plural,
regarded altogether as one word, equivalent to the
•5^«, and
-&.•/.
Thucyd. ; ,
in which case the two are put for an adverb ; as,
somewhere.
ore, sometimes,
Exc. 3. When the relative is placed between two

substantives of different genders, it sometimes agrees
in gender with the latter ; as,
TO uOTQov, ijv Aiya, the constellation which they call the Goat,
the neuter gender ; as, iav ]

/,
some synonymous word implied; as,
'') rtaai
,
Obs. When the antecedent is part of a sentence, the relative is put in
d i'», yfvoiro, Demosth.
times the relative does not agree in gender with the antecedent, but with
for
SC. ?.,
,
o't, Eurip.
Some-
^,
for ntither hope,
Pausan.
which is left to all mortals, remains icith me, Id.
Agreement of an Adjective, Verb, or Relative, with Siibstan•

tives coupled hy a Conjunction.
VII. Substantives singular connected by a copu-
^.
lative conjunction, have an adjective, verb, or rela-
tive plural
immortal.
y.Lcl ',
; *as,
Castor and Pollux, who are
^^
Oh^. 1. If the substantives be of different persons, the verb
phiral
--^
must agree with the
and with the second rather than the third as, )')
Xen. x«i Plato.
first person rather than the second,
; y.ai -
;
Obs. 2. If the substantives are of different genders, the

must agree with the masculine
',
adjective or relative plural
rather than the feminine or neuter; as, x«i //|/(> ^/-
', Hom. but this is only applicable
; to beings
which may have life.
•^
Obs. 3. If the substantives signify things without life, the
as, id
and
'&
adjective or relative plural must be put in the neuter gender ;
y.td a
riches are desirable on account

poioers
of honor, Aristot. ;
vdo)Q •3-\^ a
USE OF THE ARTICLE.
Will put on hoard

bread and water and wine, which shall keep off hunger from
you, Horn,
^ 153
,^ /,
Obs. 4. The adjective or verb frequently agrees with one of
the substantives, mostly with the nearest, and is understood to
the rest; as, ulel yao loi egig 7f, for
contention is always agreeable to you, and ivars, and battles,
Horn. ol ; xul the strangers and the rest
^
,
of the multitude came, Thucyd. ; iv

; are there in the other cities both magis-
trates and people ? Plato.
Obs.
for y - •
5. The plural
as, î/tqcoir?/,
taken up the corpse, convey

^ is sometimes used after
Deiphontes and his children, having

place, Pausan.
it to this
or
^ put
The Use of the Article.
VIII. The article is used before substantives

which represent determinate individuals, or whole
classes. But more particularly,
1. The article is used especially before substantives which
'' ^
denote something that has been already mentioned, or that is
commonly known ; as,
>^. they pursued

above the village was an
iVTavSa $e
eminence, Xen. ;
"
? »;?
as far as a certain village; there they halted ; for
aruAriiior To nai^'iov, the herdsman having heard this and hiiving taken up
' [^,
'
^
,
been made), Herodot. Again,

derstood that Homer is intended thereby
',
the child (that is, the herdsman and child of which mention had before
the poet, it being commonly un-
the Stagirite, ; 2(>,
Hence proper names often receive the article ; as,
(^,
that is, Aristotle.
Socrates J Âdijyai, Atheiis.
2. The article is prefixed to substantives which denote, not
,
^ ,
determinate individuals of a class, but the whole class
(iiTôci.TOc
foxes have holes,
fx
ioTi
Luke
t, uqstI^
man
ix. 58.
as,
is
Hence
mortal
virtue is
it
;
is
.^
put with abstract nouns as,
;
not produced from riches, Plato.

, ;
^ ,^
3. The article is generally prefi.xed to substantives which
are accompanied by the demonstrative pronouns ovio;,
this
or the adjectives âg
man ;
•
as,
this river ;
tûtQu, that
at
day;
;
rijooi , these islands;
avdqwn:oi, all the
,
/ *,
men;
154 CONCORD.
ij
, ?., the tchole city ; but
,
uv-9Qwnoi, all men generally ; hi'
avTov
iubg,
like
,
only with reference to
,
of things are these? that
a whole year.
&c. ; as,
a son of thine.
like
Also with the interrogatives
something preceding as, ru tiolu
which you
,
It is likewise used with the possessive pronouns
refer, Eurip.
means thy son, but
, ,, ;
but
what sort
,
to
,
is,
4. The article is generally put with the subject of a proposi-

tion, and omitted in the predicate ; as, •
happiness is pleasure ^
,,
i^Sovi^ >y ^Sovij pleasure is ij
happiness. In some cases it is used in the predicate only as, carl ; /^]
rayaSor, peace is the abstract good, Philem. Sometimes both subject and
predicate receive it, and sometimes neither of them as, ;
the light of the body is the eye, Matt. vi. 22.

%'-9
is the measure of all things, Plato.
'&,^',,
5. The neuter article is used with infinitives, to which it
gives the signification of substantives

TO punishing ; the
y.ay.wg the doing ill ; , ; as,
TO , 6. The
admiration folloics joy, F\ut. Also with Avords and
sentences taken materially, or for themselves as,
artic e
the maxim. Know
is
the word
thyself, Plato.
often separated from its substantive by

; ^, ^^ •
adjectives, participles, adverbs, or prepositions with their

cases as,
,
;
ÊQv-9Qij --,
nations that had been subdued, Xen. ;
the Red Sea, Herodot.
the Greeks of that
;
", '^, the
time, Plato ;
f rticle ;
tcho injured you. Id. ;

Demosth.;
^'
as,
iv
rov
»; ,
,
,,
you sustained the war
ag linst them, Demosth. When these words, for the sake of greater em-
p'lasis or clearness, are put after the substantive, they are preceded by the
^,
tear against Tissapherncs
this excessive negligence,
the water in the lake, Herodot.
I associate
to make
ivith good men, Xen.
, When
;
the article is put with an adverb or a preposition, grammarians suppose an
,
ellipsis of some convenient participle, particularly of
3}
sometimes expressed
Xen.
>, ; as,
or
vOr
Herodot. ;
,
'^'
, Eurip. ; tv
'
In like manner genitives are placed either between the
article
.
after
a(
and the substantives by which they are governed, or
the substantive with the article before them
and vijtg atvijtg,
as,
the king's ships, Thucyd.

the former case two and even three articles may stand together as,
'
', !,
the temple of Diana, Thuc^^d.
Plato;
,-• ; ^
([^ ,
;
-
In
/^c
iEschin.
,,
Very frequently the
expressed
Iv
dwvj sc.
; as,
sc.
the affairs
article is
in the land of the king,

of the Orcadians, Xen.
used without a substantive
Thucyd.
;
;
iv , ""^-
the
people in the cUy, Thucyd.
Id. ;
The neuter
signifies
USE OF THE ARTICLE AS A PRONOUN.
, ;
Herodot.
y.wc'u
;
,,
article standing alone with the genitive of a substantive,
every thing that pertains to the person or thing denoted by the
the affairs
Xen.
of Pausanias,
155
substantive as, ; -,
it is necessary to bear what CG7nes
from the gods, Eurip. It signifies particularly that which any one has
done, or is wont t© do, or that has befallen him ; in which case it is put in
the singular; as, ?.\
what fishermen are accustomed to do, Xen.
Similarly TO Ou>]qov, the saying of HOwer, Plato.
'
Sometimes it is
,
merely a periphrasis of the substantive in the genitive as, t/;c tu/»/c, ;
fortune, Umi is, the things of fortune, Soph. ^^^fMv, for ; âol,
,
Plato. In the same manner the possessive pronouns with the article are
,
, , (
put instead of the personal pronouns as, to as if
;
> for
Herodot. ; for Eurip.
The plural article, followed by or with a proper name in
the of the person named; as,
accusative, signifies, 1. the companions
01
alone; as, '
the companions of Archidamus,ên.
y.al
3. the person and liis companions as,

&,
2. the person
Priam and Panthous, Horn.;
; Tlirasyhidus ', ;
zcith his soldiers, Thucyd. But when followed by or with an

, (^
, ,
appellative,
,
, , ' , ^ ,,' ,
Frequently the neuter
adverbially
ture ; TO
;
it signifies office or relation; as, oi
as, to
formerly;
article,
entirely ;
and
with whatever it is
at first ;
immediately;
attached
from henceforth;
the priests.
/.oin'ov,
now;
to, is used
for the fu-
TorTov, before this;

in you.
,
Also with an infinitive ; as,
as far as regards him.
,
*, as far as lies in me,
to-day;
In the old Greek poets , »],

Obs. ,
is rather a demonstrative pronoun,
for the most part stand alone, as in Latin, where we
and the substantives
use the article the. Later writers also very frequently omit it.
The Use of the Article as a Pronoun.
IX. The article is often used for the relative and

demonstrative pronouns.
, ,.^,
1. For the relative pronoun ; as,
' Ection who brought me up, Horn.

TO the chamber in which we sleep, Herodot.
2. For the demonstrative pronouns; as,
/.,for he came, Hom.

tIv ' ', but J will not release her, Hom.
Ohs. 1. The article is very oftrn used as a relative pronoun in Ionic and
Doric Avriters. Of Attic writers the tragedians only use it in this sense,
and these only in the neuter and the oblique cases ; as,
-, Eurip.
' ,
Obs. 2. The use of the article as a demonstrative pronoun is likewise
chiefly confined to Ionic and Doric vriters, though it is found in this sense
in Attic writers also, but for the most part in the neuter and the oblique
156 GOVERNMENT.
cases ; as,
not so, Plato;
<5 ii.TS, but he said, Xen. ;
Se iart
(?' or
Thucyd. ;
Soph. Especially in the accusative with the infinitive after
y.t/.svaui dovrui, and that he commanded to give it him, Xen.
e/d, but this ii
,/, ,
as,
In the
] ,
nominative the relative is used in tliis sense; as, y.ui tLit, and he
said, Xen. Thus also S'
before the relatives ,

as^ ns(ji,
,
,
said he, which is very frequent in Plato.
Obs. 3. The Attics moreover use the article as a demonstrative pronoun

ooui mol tuvtu
•
concerning those arts which treat of these things, Plato but particularly
, ,,, ;
,
,
in a division, where 6
one
these
',
the other,
the one is mad,

(otherwise quite as often
6 di, are opposed to each other, this
many were wounded, of

&c. ; as,
that, the
those not one, Xen.;
),
the other is rational, Plato
"
of the other Greeks, some were subject to you, some to them,

;
,
uev
di
"^/
oj
di
Demosth. In this construction
',
yuo •
commonly refers to the nearer of
two thincs, but sometimes to the more remote as,
' fioiorY-
it is better to admonish than to reproach ; for the former is mud and
, ;
/
^,
friendly, the latter harsh and affronting, Epictet. If and be used
in speaking of one thing alone, they may each be rendered partly, or in
part.
"^,
Sometimes the relative pronoun is used instead of the article; as,
ing some of the Greek

avuiQwv,
cities, and bringing back the
destroy-
exiles into the others,
Demosth.
GOVERNMENT.
GOVERNMENT OF SUBSTANTIVES.
X. One substantive governs another in the geni-
tive (ivhen the latter substantive signifies a different
thing from the former) ; as,
uQua, the chariot of Cyrus, or Cyrus's chariot.
Obs. 1
'., tijv Kvqov

sense; as,
'.•, governs
.
^ , .,
The genitive most commonly indicates
thing, or to which something belongs as, ru
^.
'
that which does some-
iEschin. ;
;
But frequently the genitive is also taken in a passive

i, the accusation against Socrates ;
towards the Athenians, Thucyd. Sometimes one
good-will
two genitives, one of which has an active and the
'»
:[ \,
-
, .
substantive
,
other a passive sense; as, ' yi'/jcc
they lament the insults zchich the relations offer to old age, Plato.
Obs. 2.
'
A possessive adjective
'
is frequently used instead of tlie genitive ;
as, for
>, ,,
Obs 3. The substantive which governs the genitive is often understood
,
;
as, :{), 6 ^w^norUv/.uv, sc. I'itic, Plato; iv sc.
Plerodot. ; sc. ', to the shades belotc ; iv aiuv, sc. in

the shades beloic.
GOVERNMENT OF SUBSTANTIVES. 157
Ohs. 4. The frequently used for the genitive, particularly by

dative is
the poets ; as, Xsvaaai for oov, no longer do
07'^' yiium rvSave -dviiw, nor did it
(,
your childrcji see the light, Eurip. ;
please the mind of Jljax, Horn. Sometimes both cases are put ; as,
^, '^-•
the slaughterous
,
'ylj(tk?.iôg o/.obv x/yO ,
heart of Jlchilles rejoices, as he beholds the slaughter of the Greeks, Horn.
Ohs. 5. Prepositions with their respective cases often serve as a circum-

locution of the genitive ; as, «("
^, a 10 Ooiua
the pleasures of the body, Plato ;
oAs-&Qog, Demosth.
oXfi)Qog for
Substantive pronouns are governed in the genitive like sub-

stantive nouns; as,
So
understood;
fathers.
also adjective
7]', our city.
as, >^ ,
pronouns when used as substantives, or having a noun,
his daughter; whose ,
The
pronouns
genitive
Socrates, Plato;
; as,
is
' d
,
likewise governed by the relative and demonstrative
hrunr^^, this is what I commend in.
The possessive pronouns are equivalent in signification to the genitive

of the personal pronouns. Thus, i^titrtoa 6 ftôg is the
J admire this in
..,
him, Xen.
,
same as no/.tg ,^, ,' i^
Sometimes also, like the genitive,
'
/^ fjov.
Hom.
,
they are taken passively ; as, a'ug rriSog, longing for thee, ; eihoia
T[i tuH, through good-icill and friendship towurds me, Xen.
The possessive pronouns have sometimes nouns, pronouns, and parti-
ciples after them in the genitive ; as, Lucian ;
) Our (),
Soph.;
"in• sl't]
qQfva TtQns, Horn. ^

XL The genitive is used to express that one
thing is the quality or circumstance of another ; as,
tTrov, a tree of many years.
'
unn i/f/cc/j^c ccQfTi'-g, a man of great virtue.
,
ntQiuiTqov, a lake of twenty stadia in circum-
ference.
Obs.This genitive frequently stands alone, avdootTTog, /Qrua, or the like,

being understood
Aristoph.
as, toj
a.Ttdavsv
;
; ;^
n'lil,! am of this disposition,
he dêd when eighty years of age,
Lucian.
Adjectives taken as Substantives.
XII. An adjective in the neuter gender without

a substantive governs the genitive as,
,,
;
(', the mo.'^f nf the time,

ei'g ToaovTov to such a pitrh of boldness.
TO that j)art of ihc barbarians ichich had been
put to flight.
14
158 GOVERNMENT.
^ •
Ohs. 1. Plural adjectives of the neuter gender also govern the genitive;
as, r'a y.ounara
Tum, Diod. Sic.
^
";?, Thucyd. ;
ijiiatu,
, angusta
Xen.
vid-
Obs. 2.
takes the
Thucyd.
Instead of the
gender of the substantive in the
Herodot. ^
neuter,
;
the
'
adjective
^
frequently
genitive ; as,
GOVERNINIENT OF ADJECTIVES.
Adjectives governing the Genitive.
XIII. Adjectives of plenty, want, diversity, prop-

erty, worth, cause, also verbals, compounds of
a privative, and those signifying an affection of the
mind, govern the genitive as,
^' ,
;
SsifiaTog utaTi)c,full offear. avdQrov xfvoc, destitute of men.

fTtôc
^
he is different from my father.
)( ,
ar^ peculiar to man. inuivov, worthy of praise.
,),
y
^, he was the principal cause of the victory.

>^ subversive of the state.
aooivwv childless with respect to male children.
it, you are skilled in geometry.
,
,
,
7r/iVj>/c
Xen.;
& ,<' ,'.^

Lucian;
Lys.
i]
oi'vov,
Demosth.
;
"*
Herodot.
Herodot.
;
itooc
;
;
',
ior;i(o?
'..-JSi^vctc,
^schyl.
Soph.;
ifD.oiv,
JEschin.;
(,
Eurip.
diySQton, Herodot.
iksuSfQog, Herodot.
Xen.
;
;
-
,
',
^, Toti
'
?.-
Xen.;
Ohs. 1. Adjectives of worth and cause govern the genitive

,
^^ "
'^
and dative ; as, //?*' ^yi/dXp-ug Achilles deserves
honor of us, Eurip. ;
they loere the authors of many good things to the
,
Greeks, Isocr.
Ohs. 2. Adjectives of plenty and \vant sometimes gov-

ern the dative as, ;
acpvFioi abounding in fruits,
Hesiod.
,
Obs. 3. In the old poets participles also are construed with
the genitive like adjectives
acquainted icith
as,
Id.
f fidore
all the
well ; ;
modes of fighting, Horn.;
,-
GOVERNMENT OF ADJECTIVES. 159
XIV. Partitives, and words placed partitivelj,
comparatives, superlatives, interrogatives, and some

numerals, govern the genitive plural ; as,
07i(}ujiu)Tioi\ some one of the soldiers.
the younger of the sons.
, ,
,
(7> 'EXkijwv, the wisest of the Greeks.
UV
.^&, ', ' uoa Sswv
v)\au)v,
Eurip.
^, ;
which then of the gods?
;
one of the islands.
Xen.
Obs. 1. Other adjectives in the positive degree frequently

the fourth of the rivers.
6 ' ,
Plato ; ^
iEschin.
?
take their substantives in the genitive, where otherwise instead
of the genitive the case of the adjective would be used
oi jxbf ardôrcoji', for
as,
good men, ^&, ;
Aristoph.
Ohs. % The genitive plural is also put with some adjectives
which have the positive form, but the force of superlatives as,
^^''^
;
the most excellent of icomen, Horn, ;
Herodot. ; \^'^ Horn,

Obs. 3.
stood
Plato
Obs.
;
of the Lydians
as,
4,
The
The
to
genitive
r^v
ribv
^;^
Delphi, Herodot.
case of the partitive
is
,
;
,
is
,
often governed by eTg or t)c under-
sc. ^h, of these Tliales loas one,
tg Jelcfovg, sc. rt/'ac,
;
i'*'»/ ^ sending some
often put instead of the

',
Plut.
,
genitive for
/' ''^ ; as, ol
of those present some icere ashamed, some laughed,

,
Sometimes prepositions with their respective cases

Lucian.
are used ; as, in eig, Herodot. ;
t)
Lucian ;
Tiomog iv noiûXg^ Aristoph.
Ohs. .5. Partitives, &c. are put in the gender of the substantives which
are in the genitive ; but when there are two substantives of dilFerent gen-
ders, the partitives, &c. are sometimes put in the gender of the former,
(€(,
thoutrh almost always in that of the latter ; as,
manage, Plato.
roii• ^rnlw
the boy of all icild beasts is the most difficult to
and are of the same gender with the individuals of which the collective
noun is coiaposed ; as, ] ,
Obs. 6. Partitives, &e. govern collective nouns in the genitive singular,
Thucyd.
XV. The comparative degree governs the geni-

tive ; as,
',
/.ivxUTfoot
i^v
whiter than snoic.
'/, he icas better than his father.
160 GOVERNMENT.
^
Obs. 1. Instead of the genitive, comparatives are also con-
strued with the conjunction ] or -^», followed by the same
>
case with that of the thing compared
?.^,
as,
' i\t7iiro
I have associated with braver men than you,

'
;
^
Horn. :
^, Herodot.
nominative, if
.
^^
aTQujeieadûi
better horses than these, Horn.

uuehorug ]
10.
" ,
But sometimes ^ is followed by the
or some other verb may be supplied
(sc. f'î),
as,
he might give
;
^-
ij
The genitive
the genitive
,
is
commonly
would be put with a nominative
put for jj
Thuoyd.
or an accusative.
with the dative; as, '^
follows the comparative instead of ij, only where
Sometimes, however,
«'•,
,
for
,'
»i
Sometimes the genitive is used instead of i] where »; would be put with

,
as,
Aristoph.
/,
a different case from that of the word to which the comparative is joined ;
urdoccg, for ] not »7
Obs. 2. The comparative is sometimes followed both by the

genitive, and by
'' »)
^'^
with a clause explanatory of the genitive ;
as,
Lucian.
neral,
Obs. 3. When
often omitted ; as,
is
less than ten years old, Plato.

d.v
^ ',
^
x/eQaneveif
^
ekunof ,
are followed by a nu-
;
not
Sometimes i] is placed between two comparatives as, ;
',, he married a wife
&& ^
)
more noble taqn tvealthy, Plut. Or it is followed by
; or
-^
Ttqo; with an accusative; as, onlu
'
to expect,
/' ^ Thucyd. ;
)
more arms were taken than the number of dead led one
^
think the honor inferior to the merit of the
to
;
ri
Or by an infinitive, commonly with, but sometimes

action.
without, or before it as,
they are too young to know, Lys. ;
to endure, or to be endured, Soph.
;
'
too great €^
,
;^,
Obs. 4. Substantives are sometimes used elliptically for prop-
,
ositions in comparison
^schyl.
as,
;
ttj; Xen.
for
;
greater than can be expressed, Aristoph.

, ;
^
pronouns •,
In a similar manner the comparative is followed by the genitive of the
at different times; as, arootioriQog

Plato.
oT£
,
oiuvtov, iavroxi, when any thing is compared with itself
for ; nQOTsQov i]r,
The superlative is frequently used instead of the comparative; as,
^,
ichen you even surpassed yourself, Xeu.
^
tives;
',
Obs. 5.
as,
GOVERNMENT OF ADJECTIVES.
Proportional numbers are construed like compara-

ûereoou^ an arm?/ much
'
161
,
greater than ours, Herodot.
' oidorui,
to give him twice as much as any oilier of
; r,
the commanders, Lys.
Obs. The excess or defect of measure put the
',
6. is in
/^
dative
doa/uff
; as,
Lys. ;
by how much the more temperate, by so much

'^,
older by a year, Aristoph. ;
the happier, Plato

superlatives as, ;
;
;^
y.u)J.luti', J^schin.
Herodot.
Also witli
Adjectives governing the Dative.
XVI. Adjectives
ness or unlikeness, &c. govern the dative
r^
^^J
,,
Tofg
/., like
signifying profit ordisprofit, like-
profitable to the
to Achilles.
country,
hurtful to the enemy,
; as,
1.
Demosth.
Adjectives of profit or disprofit
To this rule
;
belong
as, »)
;
, ,,
-
2.
,
3.
Of pleasure or pain as, i/ittrrov rt/i>, Xen.
;
Of friendship or hatred; as, rot"? "-&7•

Jrûuoi'joi^ Herodot.
; «xyin or
bvvol
fiioj,
>]•, Thucyd.
Eurip.
;
, ^$
ifV
4. Of clearness or obscurity ; as, /;/ iuoi, Aristoph.;
Xen.
7.[, Horn.
5.
6.
Pausan.
Of nearness; as.
Of fitness or unfitness ; as, ? 7,( 6
7. Of ease or difficulty; dis, oaSiuv

iinv iOTt. Plato.
8. Of equality or inequality; as, ot' y.al
iioi, Demosth.;
hiol, " '

9.
,
as many bloics as /, Aristoph. Also of likeness or unlikeness; as,
cjioir iHio'iuv f/i( Tat; i-ra'iQuic, Isocr.
Of obedience or disobedience; as,
Rom. i. 30.
Of trust; as, iEschyl. ^,
Inaj /», Herodot.
/
' -
10.
To these add many other adjectives of various significations ; as,
)
fiYa Lvu'ia ho/og /î•, Lys.; S ion, Demosth., &c. par- —
ticularly.
' , , ;
" ,Compounds of and also verbals in taken
;,
passively, govern the dative )-)];
tomed to me
the Carians
; ; ;,; as, uoi accus-
of the same language with
suspected by the Greehs ;
he is
unknoion
14*
to us ; , Soph.
162 GOVERNMENT
Obs. 1. Substantives have likewise sometimes a dative after
^ ^ ;;
them, and, among these, substantives from primitives governing
you are father and
',
a dative as, ; y.al
mother to me, Hom.; -d-eolg, Plato;
Obs. 2.
you behold the giver offire to mortals, iEschyl.
the same, governs the dative
'
as, »
-,
J ;
^,
the country has the same name as
the river, Herodot.
the same things as I, Aristoph.
construction
of
ideyn
the
;
facit occidenti, Hor.

as, og
; you have suffered
Sometimes fFc has a similar
iyever'
same mother as I, Eurip. In Latin, invitum qui servat,
eadem illis censemus, Cic.
;
, who teas born
Obs. 3. Many
which usually govern the dative,
adjectives
are sometimes found with the genitive
,
as,
^,
,
;
7j
-^'
Id.
noQsla
' -'
^^
vnt\xooi
iyt'yvsTO,
ijOav,
Xen.
Plato;
Xen.
J
^,,
Isocr. '
trarTiot
'
; ;
Lys.;
as,
'ôovqiwr , Xen.
Plato.
',
Particularly compounds
Plato;
of ovv and
''•
XVII.
property, or duty, govern the genitive
^,
and
tKey belonged to Cyrus.

-9- , it is
,
GOVERNMENT OF VERBS.
Verbs which govern the Genitive.
the part of a good man.

signifying possession,
; as,
Joxqiov, Messene was under the dominion of the Locrians.

Obs.
1. The neuters ^ £^
&,c. are used in this sense,
,,
instead
&LC.
of the
;
genitives
as, //»'
of the
^
personal pronouns
' it is my duty.
,
IfTTt,
Obs. 2. The genitive often takes
Aristoph.
Isocr.
Sometimes
So abv ,^ before it; as,
is expressed;
Aristoph.
as,
XVIII. Verbs of remembering, be-

forgetting,
ginning, ceasing, desiring, ruling, &c. govern the
genitive
,
' ', ; as,
remember
.,
Orestes.
he ceased from his anger.
ipaaiktvotv Psammeilchus reigned over Egypt.
GOVERNRIENT OP VERBS. 163
,
Verbs govern the genitive, which signify,
1.
,
To remember, to forget;
I will not forget him.

as,
^ , Hom.
,
Isocr.
ot;
times
-9>],
Obs.
,
These verbs are often construed with the accusative
7], Hom.7/; at,
Plato.
;
meni/oTi q/",
j
is joined with
(', ^,
^ •
;
Eurip.
as, Qi
as, Tvdia i'
Some-
^,,,
To
2.
^^,
care, to neglect as,
, ,, '
;
to take care of health.

they neglect their brothers.
?.,
Hom.
Isocr. ; ' Aristoph. ;
Id.;
Isocr. Xen.
-9
(, ' (,
;
' Obs. The construction of these verbs

Xen. Sometimes
Herodot. So
accusative, but elsewhere the genitive.
is
-9,
is also varied; as,
found with the accusative;
to slighty'va. Homer has the
as,
3. To admire, to despise as,
, , ;
ayauai I admire you.
^,
-^ , Plato
he despised the laws.
yrioc^ôvoj rotJ , -ffischin. Socr.
,, . '
; ;
Xen.
as, ?.>^
,^,
Obs. Verbs of admiring and despising frequently take the accusative ;
where
Aristoph.
is governed by
So
I admire this in
;
4.
&
Gorgias, Plato.
To
,,
^,.
desire ; as,
,, &,
, ,
iav unless you desire peace.
,
,9
;
Aristot. Thus also

Herodot. ;
Isocr. ;
'
'
&
Hom. Likewise Xen.
Obs. 1. To this class belong
Hom.
&, ,,,
Obs. 2. and govern the accusative, and sometimes
other verbs of desiring.
5. To enjoy as,
,
;
, Obs.
Isocr. ; and always.
to
sometimes governs the accusative

enjoy costly perfumes,
Hippocr.
; as,
Hom.
S'
^, , To
6. abound, to want as,
^,
;
, ,.;
the harbor teas full of ships,
they were in tcant of money.
., Theocr.
Xen. ;
;
Luke 17.
'
164
^
Obs. 1.
, , ^, and
aoyvQlov, Aristoph.
oifx
ntvsadûi, ^schyl.
,),
GOVERNMENT.
;
''' tuov
Xen.
xaûQtxjtiv
in the derivative sense of to entreat, to de-

vfjoog
^,
]{, Plut.
^schyl.
Hom.
;
,^ ,
sire, are
Ohs. 2.
likewise construed with the genitive ; as,
I entreat you to stay, Plato.
$ Verbs of abounding are also found with the dative

Polyb.
; as, idnoqiiv
,, ^ ,
7. To lay hold of, to let go ; as,
he laid hold of the man.
he lets go of the spear.
Plut.
Demosth. 9)], ;
Eurip.
,'
;
Obs. Some of these verbs are also used with the accusative
8. To obtain, to miss ; as,
to obtain this honor.
,
^^ ,,
Horn. ;
, we have missed
?., -&,
the way.
Herodot. ;
, Theocr. Likewise, Plato;

Herodot.
.
,
as,
,&,,
Obs. 1
Obs. 2.
9. To
. Verbs of obtaining are very often construed with the accusative
In like manner
.ffischyl. ;
takes the genitive

Soph.
Demosth.; but in later writers, the accusative;

Diod. Sic.
hear, to touch, to smell, to taste

hear me.
; as,
; as,
as,
;
,, ,
^ ',
Eurip.
•« •,',
Hom.
Also, «I'fTûroiiat
Thucyd.
,,
,»^, '-^
to touch a corpse.
they smelt the camels.
they taste not of this vnne,
Demosth.;
In like manner,
Xen.;
Ttvoc, Aristoph. ;
'/., Herodot.
Eurip.;
Obs. 1. With ouuj, to smell, that of which any thing smells is put in the
genitive as, citt/ he smells of ointment. The part likewise which
•
;
emits the smell, is at\he same time put in the genitive ; as,
Aristoph. The verb is also used impersonally ; as, '
(/»;,
there toill be a smell of dexterity from
your clothes, Aristoph. In the same manner to breathe, sometimes
Anacr.
\ ,
,
takes the genitive of that which is breathed as, ;
as,
.
^
Obs. 2.
To
^,
Some of these verbs are frequently joined with the accusative
Demosth. ;
begin, to cease
t
;
ifoêro
as,
to
Aristoph. -,
begin the discourse,
-^, they ceased from the chase.
;
^,
GOVERNMENT OF VERBS. 165
^,
'
,
Tijg
Obs.
Herodot. ; Tijg e/SQug nQOnQog ovrog
inavaavTo, Herodot. Also
Verbs of beginning sometimes take the accusative
Eurip.
/^, Demosth.
; as,
Xen.
-,,
11.
,.;
To
^^
rule
/^, Hom,
-
iTv(JUrvivs
; as,
Ttjg
'^, he reigned over
they commanded
the Medes,
the army,
^,
. ; Soph. ,
Mschyl.;
Soph. ; Ttjg
/; ; /^,
/^^, Herodot.
xvQuvtiv, Xen.;
Thncyd.
Xen. ;
;
'
^, , ^, -
.
Polyb. ;
as,
Ofjs.
, ',
Some of these
Horn.
verbs are also construed with a dative or accusative
Hom. Thucyd.
Soph. ;
;
;
'-9, Thucyd. ;
2? Herodot.
^ ,
;
12. excel, and the contrary as,
,
;
, ', [
""
they excel the Greeks in lolsdom.

he is inferior to no one in prudence.
^, ,
,
^^ ',
, , ' -& ,
& ,Xen. j
Hom.
So verbs derived from comparatives and superlatives;
TroioOvToc, -Xen.
Xen.
Isocr. ;
Demosth.
\\'^\.',
;
Herodot. ; £t
as,
Isocr.
Xen.
J
Obs.
other senses
The
, ,
construction
; as,
is the same when any of these verbs are used in
he came after the battle, Xen.
they do not miss the right opportunity, Isocr.
oVx ;
13. To
'^
, ,
abstain, to be distant ; as,
,, ,
from
they loere distant each other
about thirty stadia.
urif/anitui Plato;
Tiiucyd. Polyb.
'
Obs. This genitive frequently takes
Thucyd.
before it ; as, Se
14.
Obs.
To try, to spare, to differ
uvTov, X.en.
,,
',
Lucian.(
Verbs of trying are likewise joined with the accusative.
;
to try one^s friends.

as,
they differ in nothing from

', Eurip. ;
women.
15. Origin ; as,
}]g (, of ichom he ivas born.

166 GOVERNMENT.
iaS?.a}v &, •. ', () eivai, Jiog
^ ,]^ ,
YBvtiv, Horn.
Ohs. The preposition

Isocr.
l•/. is often expressed before this genitive ; as, tl
,
^, & /,.,.
^
Plut.
To
Horn.;
commonly
; ^,
these add several verbs of various significations
take the accusative; as,

Horn.
Polyb.
;
Thucyd.
; as, ai\^taaov
Likewise some which more

Soph.
Mem.
Tcuodivov,
6. 17.
XIX. Transitive verbs govern the genitive, Avhen

tne action does not affect the w^hole of any thing,
but a part only as,
,,-,;
to drink some wine.

they ate of the honey-comhs.
Ohs. To this, in connection with Rule XXVII. Obs. 1., belong such
phrases as the following:
to apart of my skull, my skull is broken, Lucian ;
Xijg, Aristoph.
, ^
I gave you of my wealth.
literally, / a?/i broken as

-
Verbs governing the Dative.
XX. Anyverb may govern the dative in Greek,

w^hich has the sign to or for after it in English
as,
,
, he beckoned to the hoy.
I labored not for you.
by
/,
But
I. El
to have,
, ,
as the datfve after Greek verbs is not always rendered in English
and as these particles are not always the sign of the dative in
to or for,
Greek, it will be necessary to be more particular.
, and
govern the dative as,
in the sense of
,&,
;
,
have three daughters.
', havethou nothing
" ,
SC. to do with that
just man, Matth. xxvii. 19. ; Thucyd.
equivalent to I am called, and the name
therefore, is
itself stands in the same case with ojoim, and not in the genitive or dative,
as in Latin, est mihi Jiomen Tullii or Tullio ; as,
.
"Jfjuaa, Herodot.
Many verbs compounded with

often govern the dative ; as,
, or with prepositions,
^^ ^-,
, Jznoij
Syria borders 07Egypt,
he comes to Xenophon.
*^
nQUgsoi
,,,,^,
^ , GOVERNMENT OF VERBS.
Plato; ICvQog
Plato ;
Isocr. ;
Thucyd.
Aristoph.
(},
Herodot.
Xen.
167
* ,, , ,
III. Verbs govern the dative, which signify,
1. To order, to exhort, to obey, to disobey ; as,
',^, ^ ,
>7 , 3 ,^,.
^
Aristoph.;
Xen.
Xen.
;
out
he ordered his servants.
i}
;
I will obey God rather than you.
Eurip.
Hom. ) naqaivo)
'^ , ], ,,,
:&,
Obs. 1.
Plato.
accusative with the infinitive; as,

and
Xen. ;
take not only the dative, but also the

Plato. On the
Aristoph. ;
other hand,
accusative.
Obs. 2.
genitive; as, ^ ^, ,
Verbs of obeying and disobeying are sometimes followed by the
Herodot.; Xen.;
&c. take only the
,
,^
jEschyl.
2. reproach, to threaten, to be angry as,
' , },
;
,
,
^, ' , ^ Isocr. ;
Plato;
he reproves Achilles.
they were
hiol,
angry with
Demosth.
Xen.
their
;
commanders.
^^-^
.
Herodot.; Thucyd.;
^
',Obs.
, , Hom. ;
and /^) ,'/,

Joihuofv) usually takes the accusative, but the middle
dative
;
Xen.
', Id.
are also found with the accusative

«/>,
Aristoph.
; as,
Id.
the
^
; as, ; Jil',
3. To assist, to profit, to hurt as,
'^,
;
', he assisted the Greeks.
',, TuCc ^,
,^, ^', ,
(p'tAotc
Horn.; '
,, Xen.; »/
he corrupts the youth.
«i/Di
^,
f/
Thucyd.;
1-, Aristoph. Tou)nlv
-
iEschyl.
Plato ?' Herodot. Plato.
, ^ , ,
fi/(ji
(*
;
Obs.
vfTai
Some
ox^Sh\ ^
of these verbs often take the accusative as,
Herodot.;
Herodot.;
*
'^'», Aristoph. ;
Plato;
;
(), and some others, the accusative only.
4. To contend, to serve
/ill , ^, ;
to
as,
contend ivith Jupiter,

J serve the gods.
168 GOVERNMENT.
.,(
9 $
Demosth.
oVg
Eurip.
it,
;
TroAfiu'ofc,
t ,
Aristoph.
IsocT.;
Plato;
^,,6-&,
&, "
^r^qal
^; ^
- Isocr.
Bion ;
Horn.;
Xen. -
Ohs.
TTOoc
1 .
with the accusative as, ; ?

Frequently verbs of contending, instead of the dative, take
ui, Herodot.
likewise takes the accusative, in the sense of to attack; as,
JTo- ^ -
^^ ,
Tug -&>], ApoUod.
''
.' ,
Ohs. 2. is sometimes found with the accusative ; as,
Eurip.
To approach, to meet, to follow

5.
^,
^', ry
; as,
we approach ttL•a.
97]
, .,
', Xen.
Lucian
;
;
'7]
&, ,
he meets Xenophon.
Crito followed him.
Aristoph.
Herodot. ;
-
Obs.
Obs. 2.
1.
, Hesiod.
Verbs of approaching sometimes take the genitive;
Polyb.
is likewise found with the genitive ; as, \•\

as, Tt]g
'-
,
ati'ooc, Horn. Also with the accusative; a,s,
Obs. 3.
Herodot.
.-9 ' , Verbs of following are often construed with

Plato; '/. ,, , Soph.
aua, &c.
,'^
as,
6. To pray, to converse ; as,
^, he prayed to the gods.
]' ,,
he converses icith Alcibiades.
^? Soph. ^, Aristoph.; -
Theophrast.
Obs. is also joined with the accusative by the Attics; as,

^', Aristoph.
'^^, ^7.
',
To
€-9'
use, to trust, to associate
7.;•,
Pind.
Demosth.
; as,
to trust the
};
good.
, Iboct. ',
8.
, befit, to
?.•9
be like ;
,
^'
as,
, this befits a freeman.
To
i'lvraav.
'»,
ever,
Matth. ii. 11.;
is also put ;
Polyb.
as, ] ;
],
these add several verbs of different significations ; as, 'Jyyalca
Apoll. Rh. ; Thucyd. ;
«,
,
Xen. The accusative, how-
Xen.
Xen.
IV. Verbs signifying motion or tendency to a thing often

with the accusative ; ,
'' ^ ^
take the dative instead off/-", trrl, or
as, "-» L'Uit'^ for ^Qo; I loill come to you, Lucian ;^
&' for el; Êschyl,
;
V. and frequently take the dative of a personal

pronoun, with a participle agreeing with it, where the whole is
translated by the verb from which the participle is derived
fi'
' (loi
aot i^Soueroj far/',

I had not hoped this,
as,
unoyj/ivaridai, if
if ynu p/casc, Id. ;
Horn.
' you are ^ciUing
ur
to ansicer,
lu , ;
Plato;
VI. Verbs of all kinds are sometimes accompanied by the

dative of a personal pronoun, which might have been omitted
without injury to the sense as,
?. '
;
i/i' tioi arioa TovTor, do not await this man, Horn.';

coi, Lucian.
Verbs governing the Accusative.
XXI. Verbs of a transitive signification govern

the accusative ; as,
T(')v \-l fTtiiijnav, theij honored .Achilles.
Ohs. 1. Any verb may govern the accusative of a noun
' ^^ ',
having the same derivation, or a similar signification
\ ,
as, ;
TTO/fiifM' n6?.fiiov, Lys. ;

Plato ;
Horn.;
. Li oha^fvnav, JEschln. ;_
^ jâdtvi]as
«'»; '•
)•.
ui'tiv
i^t)nr',v,
,'/)•, Eurip.
Eurip.
ofVor,
Plut.
Xen.
;
;
;
'
Isocr.
' (; ,
({',
,
;
winiriu
iimrov
fii»uc
Loiuiv
TiQonniTvm
Soph.
rr?.
Horn
Plato;
Id.;
;
;
inoofv
i^dfndat ^^
dooinjua
Ti^v
^'.',
''
;
)'Oaif]v
iEschin.
»;)•, Plato ; ^ ;
iv
Aristopli. ;
Ju5a-
Herodot.
7(, ([.
»•.
dative
;
2.
is often put for the accusative; as,
Id. ; \1
&,
>^ ] Iloin.
Several intransitive verbs are sometimes used transi-

;
.^•
'^
', iMuiaJoc vn>v

dctrurw^
TllUCyd,
iifi/.riat
tively ; as,
^,,'^, ^'zt\ he thrust his hand, Soph. Ajac. 40.;

he phircd men 7ipon them. Herodot. I. 80.
In'
'>() ui,9'
'^ ^'
,
:
nsiTo)
Also
', Eurip. So jionr ,
let Himera floic inilk instead oficater, Tlieocr. v.
to call any one ; as. Kruur ,^, Xen.
to look ; as, ifoûv (i'/.i.Tnv, to look fearful, iEschyl.
'. ;
Ohs. 3, Several intransitive verbs which express an emo-

tion,and in which an action is implied, though not described,
govern the accusative as, ;
15
170
^
Hipp. 1339.;
Also
() -^' ,<(
Horn. II. . 77.
^
,^ ', ^'
cediy.iar,
i-duoofi
Plato.
GOVERNMENT.
Soph. Ajac. 790.;

dsol '.,, . Soph.
or
ur TUSs yi]di]ntifv,
Eurip.
Philoct. 1314.
Demosth.
; ^,
, ,,
Obs. 4. Verbs of swearing govern the accusative of the
,,,
object sworn by ; as, Aristoph.
Ohs. 5. The accusative

Xen.
is often understood ; as,
'^ " Demosth.
SC.
river.
T/',r
Xen.
;
SC. «, to make an
SC.
irrujHion, to oveiflutc, of a
;
, , ^,
Vej^bs governing the Dative and the Genitive.
XXII.
Verbs of giving way, with
and
utra-
'>,
govern
^^
the dative of a person, with the genitive of a thing ,
as,
, Trana/woio ooi [,
',
I give way to you from the tribunal.
[ ,, ,
ToO to share xcith them the danger,
I impart to you of my riches.
\. ^ ,/,
ooi
'•
, , these add
^
Herodot.
Lucian
;
Isocr.
'^- and some others;

(fxôv^lo,
?'
Xen.;
Xen.;
Eurip.
/^, ^schyl. ;
as,
as, '
Ohs.
before it ; as,
their construction
'
Frequently verbs of giving way have only the dative after them
>,»
xuxorc, .îschyl.
', ; as, ^'

Tyrt. Some
/.
Sometimes the genitive has or
of the other verbs also vary
i'ooc, Aristoph.
much
;
ti' III
oftener '. Xen. Also or
Verbs governing the Accusative and the Genitive.
XXIII. Verbs of reminding, filling, emptying,

depriving, delivering, prohibiting, and restraining,
govern the accusative and the genitive ; as,
^ ',
[
(
(^
, ^,
oi'vuv,
'
T/^c
J .),
-{,
do not "nnind mc of these things.
he filled bottles inith wine.
'^, I deprived Thetis of Achilles.

he freed .ilc.randcr from the disease.
to keep them from the sea.
they made him desist from his insolence
, ,
, ',^}, ,,/. ^ ',^
,", Plato; dvo Isocr.
* Herodot. ^vQiadug
Herodot.
Eurip. ',,««?
-^^
,
;
*
(, ^ ,
Isocr.; Soph.;
Eurip. ;
Soph. ;
Herodot.;
' Hom. ;
Polyb.
"^& ' ,,,.

these add verbs of separating, repelling, begetting, and
^ ,
,'.
esteeming worthy as, ;
^
] )
Eurip. ;
Aristot.
&no
/
JEschyl.
,
Obs. 1.
(^, ;
' ,
-&, ,
Several of these verbs are also construed with
'^ Y\a.to
to)v
Plato ;
or
Xen.
• as,
,,
Soph.
Obs. 2. Verbs of reminding often take two accusatives ; as,
&'
-9^
Demosth.
Isocr.
; Also • as,
^,
Obs. 3. Some verbs frequently take the accusative of a
thing, with the genitive of a person or thing from which it
proceeds as,
Herodot.
from me, Xen.
of the accusative
The
;
;
,
An
; a.S, , the
Aristoph.
rest
ininnitive or part of a sentence
genitive often has a preposition expressed before it; as,

-&, Herodot.
;
-8
" ,,.'
heard from
may
, Thersander
learn thii
supply the place
Verbs governing the Accusative and the Dative.
XXIV. Any transitive verb may govern the accu-

sative and the dative (^when, together with the object
we express the person or thing with
,,
of the action^
relation to which it is exerted ) ; as,
show me Socrates.
',
*,
a
iva ^,,
icith ichich you reproach
,, ,
my father.
they selected the tent for Cyaxares.
that you may avert destruction for (or from) me.
he compared our chief to Achilles.
,
as,
or
Obs.
*
him, Horn.
The dative is often used for
he hroiight you to me,
with the genitive ; as, oi
Hom.
, or
; and sometimes
with the accusative
he took the spear

for
from
;
172 GOVERNMENT.
Verbs governing two Accusatives.
XXV.
Verbs of doing, speaking, asking, taking,
teaching, clothing, and concealing, govern two
o, Tt
^,,
accusatives, the one of a person and the other of a
thing; as,
fQuvoiv \,
what they will say of us.
fus aiTov ULTovoi, they ask food of me.
()'
he did you
you took Troy from Priam.

many services,
,
' , , y.tJvt
{'',
he taught vie all this.
they took off my clothes from me.
do not conceal this from me.
'',, ^,
'^ Aristoph. ; ;, Thucyd.
& ,.
,,
; Horn.;
Thucyd.; /.'/,
TiQog ;
Aristoph.
Xen.
}
aihov '
^-, Soph.;
Herodot. ;
'^,
Thucyd.; (,"«?
Demosth.
,' Xen.
Xen.
, Lucian
; /,
,
;
/^ ia&ijTa Id. Plut.
tives
, ^, , .,.
Obs.
oiry.
;
1.
as,
aiTimuai
Several other verbs are also found with two accusa-
Demosth.
Id. ;
-^, instead of Xen.
Soph.
',
el or
Obs. 2.
' ,
.,\\.
^•,
^^'^
Verbs of doing and speaking often take the adverb
instead of the accusative of the thing; as,
Oemosth. ;
In like manner
^
^ roue (,
.
,7
Soph. Id.
;
,
Plato;
"uv ,
Ohs. 3.
, ,
Verbs of doing sometimes take the person in the dative
, Plato; Lys. 7: Tij
; as,
So
,
which with the genitive of the person and
son and the genitive of the thing; ihus,

is also construed
ooi
.
the accusative of the thing, and sometimes with the accusative of the per-
faova
u(j\xi' ,
,
Oov or aifaioovuui
',
^,
Obs. 4. Some verbs take the accusative of a person, with the accusative
neuter of an adjective in the sense of an adverb; as,
error? Plato;
[, Demosth.
Thucyd. ; ,
Obs. 5. preposition
the thing; as, vifac
sometimes expressed;
Thucyd.
A
^ must
'/^
as,
often be supplied before the accusative of
Aristoph., sc. or ini, ,
is ,
Verbs of dividing, especially, are construed Avith two accusatives, one
of which is governed by understood as, ; , .
CONSTRUCTION OF PASSIVE VERBS. 173
Plato. The
preposition is often expressed ; as, Siei?.ov acpag '
the genitive, and the
Herodot.
('?)
,
Polyb. Sometimes the whole, which is divided, is put in
uiotj,
.
' ,<^
So in the passive,
VOd
uf()og, uotoa, &c. governed by the verb
Xen.
for
as,
(fc)
\, /iciiowc
for
,;
Obs. 6. Some verbs take the accusative of a person, with the accusative
tributed to the person by the verb.

to call or
&
of an adjective or substantive which expresses a quality or property at-
These verbs are those vhich signify
'^,
name, to make, to choose, and when in the passive take the
?.,
',
same case after as before them. Thus, as jEschyl.
, Eurip. -
;
inoiijaur, Xen. ;
''^4 ^,
^
j^yf/zoiu
Herodot.
Ji\u(jadtvi]v^
Likewise, »•
Soph.;
Thucyd. ;
»-
, , Plato;
Plato.
^, , ?.
These verbs frequently take the infinitive from which, however,
it
pear; as,
eivai ,
does not follow that this word is to be supplied where it does not ap-
Herodot. ;
Plato;
Id.
The Government of Verbs having a Causative Signification.
XXVI. Verbs signifying to cause one to do some-
included verb as,
Obs.
•
,
thing govern the accusative, with the case of the
,
J'uceg
;
you Ttiade me taste of happiness,

I caused you to drink milk,
KvQiov, I adjure you by the Lord.
Verbs signifying to taste govern the genitive hence those signi- ;
fying to cause to taste govern the accusative and the genitive; and so of
the others.
THE CONSTRUCTION OF PASSIVE VERBS.

XXVII. When a verb in the active voice governs
two cases, in the passive it retains the latter case
(' ,
;
as,
&?..', they rcere kept from, the sea.
tIv
5>;Tt<r Tu
/,, he icas taught the healing art.
they were stript of their possessions.
Obs. Some verbs in the passive
, '
1. retain the former c&se,
and the
'^
latter is made their nominative
for
; as,
" yloii
]'
ij ,-
&
Mars
this is
is intrusted
],
with the decision, Lucian ;
snatched from my hands, Eurip. ;
let the tijranVs liver be torn by the vultures, Lucian.

15*
174 GOVERNMENT.
The accusative with the passive may often be referred to

y.uTu understood ; as,
, he is wounded in the thigh, Herodot.
,
Obs. 2. Verbs passive, or of a passive signification, are
^
fol-
lowed by a genitive governed by una,
nesians^'Thncja.;
vno
inaivaroSai
,
?.,
;,
nugu, or ttqo;
,
they were besieged by the Pelopon-
to be praised by the
•
as,
iuMv
cadut, Ovid.
,
spectators, Lucian ;
TVv iftvyovaiv ''
Eurip. ;
vip'
'^,
fiisaov v/i6
in Latin pcriit ab Hannibale, Plin. ;
he was killed by you, Xen. ;
and now they are banished by me, Id. ;
Herodot. Thus
torqucor infesto ne vir ab hoste
The
',
preposition is sometimes understood
I am
;
overcome by Juno, Eurip.
Obs. 3. Passive verbs are often followed by a dative, some-

as,
,
times with, but frequently without, a preposition ; as,
' , uvSqaai
, the city is not inhabited by men, Apoll. Rh. j
has been done by me, Demosth.
this
they were not seen by the Corcyreans, Thucyd.
Thus also impersonals; as, \,
Sh
ice have danced, Aristoph.

; -
THE CONSTRUCTION OF IMPERSONAL VERBS.
XXVII i. All impersonal verb governs the da-
tive ; as,
jfi
^, it is profitable for the state.
Obs. 1. ^^ and /
agree with an infinitive preceded by
the accusative, one of which is often understood, and not un-
), ,
frequently both
9^3 ^,
as,
endure as
;
you must
it
sail. Soph. ;
becomes kings, Isocr.
^fi
Soph.
^ ?.
-), -,
\, (sc.
(sc. ',««?),
-
-
'
Eurip. ; (sc. hta
Other impersonals likewise, which more commonly govern the dative,
sometimes agree with an infinitive preceded by the accusative, and hence
,
both constructions are sometimes united as, ;
Yfjiuij/or it happened to me to marry at eighteen years of age, Demosth.
^
,,
t»7v it is in your power to live in the en-
joyment of ichat belongs to you, Xen.

Obs. 2. ^fi and with their compounds, also
TTQooi'ixet, and tU.elnet^ govern the dative of a person,
with the genitive of a thing
iuv
Demosth.;
ovTiiq
',
^,
'^, , it»;
Thucyd.
the
;
; as,
if
,
you have need of a hundred galleys
nor did he care for this, hucieLn;
poor have no share in the governinent, Plato ;
SaTvqto Isocr.
CONSTRUCTION OF THE INFlNlTlVEi. 175
An infinitive or some part of a sentence often supplies the place of the

genitive; as,
(}vy. oil ccTiiy.Tsivu aov
your son, Xen.
Horn. ;
Or
vior ,
they are used personally ; as, aoi
toov, Thucyd.
. ",
uoi toioâi, I did not take care to inquire, Horn.
it repents me not that I killed
Obs. 3. Sometimes and take the accusative of a

person with the genitive of a thing as, ;
'
;) ;
dtT^ I have no need of much trouhle, Eurip. (Ion. for
what is thy business? Horn. Odys. '. 463. The
substantive ;^'>, /<,
/»*«, frequently has the same govern-
;
ment as, ^(«fc

; /> Horn. Odys. '. 634. ;,
THE CONSTRUCTION OF THE INFINITIVE.
tive
XXIX. One
; as,
9 verb governs another in the
\9., I
,
desire to learn.
infini-
- ,,
Obs. 1. The infinitive is often used to denote the purpose of
an action as, lev/eu TqwoI
; he gave the armor to
the Trojans to carry, Horn.; nags/oj I offer
myself to be questioned, Plato I came in ;
order to sup, Lucil.

This infinitive, after verbs of giving, corresponds to the Latin gerund in
dum, or to the participle in dtis ; after verbs of motion, to the supine in
um, or to the participle in rus. Sometimes the Latin poets imitate the
Greek construction as, dederatque
; comas diffundere ventis, Virg.
semper in Ocednum mittit me quoerere gemmas, Propert.
,
fitness,
lence,
Obs. 2.
Epicharm.
The infinitive is
ability, or quality
;
; as, ov
not powerful in speaking, but incapable of keeping
ui
, ,-
governed by adjectives expressing
si-
for
women
,
are skilful in finding devices, Eurip.
sive,
The infinitive
, , active frequently stands for the infinitive pas-

corresponding to the Latin supine in u; as,
easy to understand, to be understood, Plato ;
pleasant to hear. Id.
rû
Demosth.
,,,, , ,
;
,
fore
Obs.
it
3.
nqlv,
; as,
The infinitive is often put for other
and
modes with ;,
going be-
^&, •,
ot'x tOTtv
-, ^^,
dStv 'yiyaSwr, icken ^gdtho saw, Plato
for
he is not so sicift as to escape, Eurip.
before Philip came, Demosth. ;
when they were marching through the sand, Herodot.
^ '
;
176 GOVERNMENT.
^ ^
or
to be
The
''
fOTi
a slave
infinitive
for tni
any thing, Plato;

to
is put after
'^ dov7.svsiv
tif-dâas
•
as,
\pi\ifiauu, the former galley icas so much sooner, that Paches

>^
,,, and for and
he IS such a person as not
,
had read the decree, Thucyd. riQt&râur iw' ; they
were chosen on condition that they should make laics, Xen. The abbrevi-
ated expressions oiuc and ' are more common, the former
of which usually signifies to be icont, and the latter, to be able ; as, ov '
7jV for he was not one that profited by any
,,
thing, Xen.
Aristoph.
; tvSor
'
I was not able to stay within,
Demosth. Thus also
,
'-&,
^
ooa
Frequently
far as we knoio, Lucian.
or is omitted ; as, , , for to speak
, ,, ,
simply, Lucian hiol, as appears me. Soph.
(,
; it to ;
wanting but little, almost, Isocr. Sometimes the infinitive ;
as, '/. sc. .ilschyl. Prom. 46. Sometimes both are

,
wanting; as,
SC. or
sc.
, to
am
speak briefly, Isseus ;
almost gone, Aristoph.
Obs. 4. Sometimes the infinitive is governed by a verb of

saying or thinking understood, or contained in the principal
verb ; as,
, '
aihhv
charge of being a thief Herodot.
%• (sc. ,
contained in
part, for that they commanded noiD Xen.
as many OS acquitted him of the
, ;
they ordered him to de-

In like manner in Latin, sere-
tentiam ne diceret, recusdvit quamdiu jurejurando hostium teneretur, nan
.•
,
),
esse se senatorem, sc. dicens, contained in recusdvit, Cic. Off. in. 27.
Obs. 5.
ticularly by the poets
hither,
the
Hom,
same wine, Lucian.
The
;
infinitive is often
' ; as,
used
,
-^for the imperative, par-
do thou return
drink of
let all
is
When
,
the infinitive is used for the second person imperative, its subject
,
in the nominative ; in the other cases, mostly in the accusative. In the
,,, ^,
former case an ellipsis oi «fcc. is supposed ; in the latter, of
)^,
tions
,&c. The infinitive is put in a similar manner also in supplica-
; as, (ha, Hom. Odys. '.
354.,
TO vvi'
where
Obs. G.
'
^, Thucyd.
'
The
ejfav
^'
, ',
infinitive
viii.
or the like,
nor do
48.
is
I
is supplied.
often redundant as,

willingly touch fire, Xen.
Plato, Lach. fin.
;
;
•
in'
CONSTRUCTION OF PARTICIPLES. 177
XXX. The infinitive with the neuter article pre-

fixed is used as a substantive in all the cases as,
,
;
TO anodavtiv tijv to die honorably is

than to live basely.
7% better
',
ovx
ger for
vnt^tivt
the sake
^,
inaivsioSai
of being praised.
,
he underwent every dan-
they were not sent out to be ill
,
treated.
di'u
all.
TO ^
TO
tvnqooodoq ttrat
^
oSov, because the
is baser than to be injured.

he delighted in being easy of access to
way was narrow.

he grants that to injure
Obs. 1. The rule applies, whether the infinitive be used singly or in con-
, -
nection vith phrases, with or without a case before it, as in the examples
given.
Obs. 2. The article is often wanting before the infinitive
as, &i^
an army, Xen.
^, - ^^,
--')^ -],
; ov
for
for
&', if death approach, Anacr.
want of
for ^^
leisure to march
Eurip.
derstood as, ; -,
Ohs. 3. The infinitive is frequently governed by
act
was absent from you, that he might not follow you ? Xen.
;
un-
who
THE CONSTRUCTION OF PARTICIPLES.

XXXI. Participles govern the case of their
verbs ; as,
,, , having missed the way.

doing us many injuries.
,
ciples themselves as, j)*' ;
honor us, who are goddesses, Aristoph.

about a place called Thyrea, Herodot.
]
Obs. The same case is put after participles derived from
verbs which take a nominative after them, as that of the parti-
^,
if he dis'
;
^,
XXXII. The
is used instead of the
participle
infinitive knowing, perceiving, show-
after verbs of
,
ing, remembering, persevering, desisting, and such
, .
,,
as signify an emotion of the mind
Xadi
YjCidovTo
as,
know that you are come.
I shall show
;
they perceived that

that I am wise.
Antony had fled.
178
&, uyomg
,?.,
GOVERNMENT.
remember that you are a man.
•,
xi^v tiqt\vy]v they continue to preserve peace,
Xiîfiiv when he should cease to sing,
^^, I am ashamed that I did this,
nor does it repent me that I thus
defended myself.
^-
Obs. After a verb governing a reflective pronoun, the
1.
participle may
agree in case either with the subject of the
verb, or with the reflective pronoun as, ;
)^, I am conscious that I am wise, Plato

'^ you were conscious that you did wrong., Demosth.
;
havTOv
,
Sent. Gnom. 438.
', where we might also say
^^ ;^^>
^,
^& Ohs, 2. When
a participle is used with
rendered by its own verb, and the verb annexed
it is
or
- ),
^ -,
by an adverb
sciously ;
signifying unperceivedly or uncon-
;
hy chance ; and previously ; as, ^,

^
-
,
they entered unperceivedly Thucyd. ; ,
murderer of his son, Herodot.

for hy chance he had a sword, Id.
he was unconsciously feeding the
;
'
/
we may arrive before them, Xen.
;
^-
&.^
came, Isocr.
that
', they no sooner heard of
;
it than they
is
^
used in the same manner as
^ by the poets ;
,, ,-
as, for Soph.
^
which
,
Aristoph.
,
Obs. 3.
ovno)
),
for , -^,
Participles often form a periphrasis with
to express the verb either in the tense of
they are participles, or in that of the verb annexed ; as,
,
he
for
has ruined some,
he
\, , ,
had not yet sold himself, Demosth. ; for
-,
;
will you not be silent ? Soph. ; for

J admired, Id. ;
for you bring,
Aristoph.
,
to
,
, Frequently also instead of a simple verb in the sense of
go aivay,
Obs.
you
4.
for
with the participle is used
Sometimes
trifle,
he few away,
Aristoph.
as,
participles
;
Hom.
,
seem redundant as,
you Jest, Lucian.
;
;
'-
Obs. 5. The participle frequently expresses the means by
^ ^' ,'^
CONSTRUCTION OF PARTICIPLES. 179
which an action is performed ; as, thei/ live

by plunder, Xen. Herodot., where the
So
participle is thus far redundant, that it is not necessary to the
sense. A more extraordinary redundancy is in Soph.
Obs. 6. The participle of the future
purpose of an action; as, rikdôv ^, is used to express the
I came to inquire,
,
Hom.
Obs. The participle is often joined with the adverb
7.
whatever case the construction requires, in the sense
in
of the Latin gerund in dum ; as,
dum, while he tvas sacrificing, Aristoph.
inter sacrifican- -,
.&,
regent inter lavandum adivit, he came to the
king while he was bathing, Diod. Sic. ;
;
-
q^'^
Clitum inter coenandum interfecit, he killed
Clitus lohile at supper.
.
XXXIII.
,
»'
absolute in the genitive
nQUTTovToc
, A
oi'Str
Kroov,
this, messengers arrive.
substantive
; as,
(, , when God
ifdov^
the
and
,
participle
enemy approaching, he fled,

gives, envy prevails not.
while Cyrus is doing
are put
Obs. 1. The genitive of the substantive or a pronoun is

often understood
'' ,' -
,
as, O.lôiTotp dt (sc. «urajj),
; they hav-
ing come, he said, Xen. (sc.;
'), oJda &f Id. Sometimes the rest of the

sentence
stantive as, ^vQ
;
may be considered
; it having
been fabulously related that the bulls breathed fire, Diod. Sic.
^^',
as supplying the place of the sub-
Sometimes also, thouorh rarely, the genitive of the participle is want-

ing as, »'(/ >,>'>,T<')i Soph. CEd. Tyr. 966., as in Latin quibus duclbus.
-
; ,
Obs. 2. Nominatives and accusatives absolute are

and sometimes datives; as, ^^, 1:
^ ^.',
also used,
6
)'
:, they having entered, Critias said, Xen.
Tty.r" } qarti'T'
having unexpectedly appeared,
'» ',
I
iconder not,
protract my
;
if, my
discourse, Soph.
children
qroouoav ?]/' ', as the

year elapsed, they make another demonstration against Elis,
Xen.
Obs. 3. The absolute case of participles from impersonal
,
verbs is always the nominative ; as,
{)[] {\ tchen it is in his power to have peace,
180 GOVERNMENT.
,
he prefers to he at war, Xen. ;
to rule, Eurip. ;
Aristoph. ;
finitive is
tiQijuirov
uq/hv when it is lawful for me
ivdadi, tvdovnL
Thus also the neuter participle of iiui• as,

it being impossible to give a signal, Thucyd.
omitted; as, oi ' ov
or
although it has been told them to meet here, they sleep and do not come,
', Sometimes an in-

ov
|9;^/•7»?, »• (SC. ôjj-di^nai), tyXtrg

' ,,
anijX-dor, others not having assisted, when they ought, came off sound,
Plato; TTOit'jOoutv tfjv, uiifiror; (. e.
ov shall we make them live worse, when it is possible for
c»/r,)
,
them to live better ? Id. ; which perhaps is the case where a participle in
), /^';
the singular seems to be joined with a noun in the plural ; as,
(so.
they gave orders so to do, Xen.
it having been resolved to do this,
005. 4. The particles &7, &lc. are often put with

most part order to express a rea-
,
absolute cases, for the in
son
(
to
;
?'^»;
him
as,
it
^loi'viov, iyshco
belonged to punish, Plut. ;
fi(v
their brothers, as if friends could be made
brothers, Xen. ;
, /., ^ , '
/. ,he went
y.o'
«»• at(f<ov
to
ix
they neglect
of citizens, and not made of
(sc hiov), ask
Junius, as
,
what you will, in the persuasion that I shall
crossed over,
/.^
news
a(ffa7,when Pericles had already
icas brought him that
tell
Obs. 5. Sometimes the absolute case refers to the same person or thing
'
that is expressed before or after by another case ; as, ^7]
Megara had
the truth. Id.
(;;
revolted, Thucyd.
THE CONSTRUCTION OF VERBALS IN X'cOV.
XXXIV.* Verbals in govern the dative of a
. ,
, ,,
person vvith the case of their primitives
-9^7]
ooi
they must abstain from drunkenness.
young men slimdd imitate the old.
; as,
youmust impart virtue to the citizens.
Obs. 1. Verbals in
before the infinitive, with
the Latin gerund in diim ; as.
,
are used in the nominative, or the accusative
in the sense of necessity or propriety, like
,
'1> >> ,
we must take care of. The verb is commonly understood, instead of which
the participle is sometimes used ; as, ^)-I0) ov ov, Xen. Sometimes
001 ,
they agree with the substantives, like the Latin participles in dus ; as,
the state must be served by you, Xen.
>,
Oo.s\ 2.
a person
y.itl
;
•,
Sometimes verbals
as,
in Ttor
evduluoya rlnu
he wlio Wishes to he liappy must pursue
^^
govern the accusative of
Stoh-
and
cultivate temperance, Plato.
CONSTRUCTION OF CIRCUMSTANCES. 181
Obs. 3. Verbals are often put in the plural, particularly by

the Attics; as, ifwl iaii Tileuaitu, I must sail, Aristoph.
Obs. 4. The
construction of verbals in tmjv is sometimes imitated in
Latin; qua m [viam] nobis quoque ingrediendum sit, Cic;
as, icternas
quoniavi pwnas in inortc tiineaduvi, Lucret.
THE CONSTRUCTION OF CIRCUMSTANCES.

PRICE.
XXXV. The
tive
, ; as,
'
price of a thing is put in the geni-
. ^
T/,»• inqluro he bovght the house for a talent.
, ' ', ui>yv(jov, to exchange silver for gold.
, ^, /, ,
Obs.
-
Tciciov
'^-
;
- >] {)] %•
; TifvTt
This genitive sometimes has

Plato.
' for
Plato;
unt^ri^, Isocr.
before it; as,

/,
Also instead of the genitive the dative is used

aotTi^r
as,
; ',."*'?
Solon.
Af(){)oi;i' /.» /ui/iroc, Chariton. Or .touj with the accusative;

;
as,
Tioj/iirai Atlien.
CRIME AND PUNISHMENT.
XXXVI. The crime and punishment are put in

the genitive
'
; as,
tiif
-^..',
urif^duc
'-, having
he acaiscd me of impiety.
'^
^' ',,
A'.lioiru
ns Aristoph. ; ( --^,{,
convicted Clean of briber
Plato ;
Aristoph.;
Ohs.
.
aasîslug
Demosth.
(/'/, Plato
;
This genitive is often accompanied by substantives or other

1.
^^ ^t &, .Êlian.
words on which it depends; as, in'i
ijii^v, Demosth.
(/ toi'c
>,ii'('; yoli/frai
any one hring an action of impifty against us, Lucian

(
Titoi ûvarw, Xen.
(/ti'yin• t:i'
lest
;
((, '
Obs. 2. The crime or punishment, after verbs compounded
in the genitive as, ;

'' ^^'
with HUTU, is commonly put in the accusative, and the person
xfuruioi•^ '^'"V con-
Thucyd. Sometimes, however, the crime
' ''
(Icinned all to death,
also is in the genitive ; as, nuou%6uu)v xuTTiyoour^ Demosth.
Likewise the person is put in the accusative as, ,«r]
((((''
;
Lvs. qarov,
has the person in the
dative, and the crime in the accusative as, <5' iuol
;
(fat :: ttwqcoov:. Soph.

16
1S2 GOVLRXMENT.
MATTER, AND PART TAKEN HOLD OP.
XXXVI I. The matter of which any thhig is
made, and the part by which any thing is taken,

are put in the genitive
' ; as,
' ,, ^/], a pillar made of brass.
,[
t'/.aûv they took him by the foot,
I hold a icolf by the ears.
it;
tive
Obs.
3, 'The Herodot.
as, OT((fuvovg av^toi
iy. .,/',
genitive of the material often has
The
Theophrast.
or utj'o expressed before
eiucnu cxnh
dative is sometimes used instead of the geni-
Anacr.
,
J
CAUSE, MANNER, AND INSTRUMENT.
XXXVIII. The cause, manner, and instrument,

are put in the dativ e as,
',
;
-voicc tout' he did this from good will.
{, i^kSov, they cavie in this manner.
, he struck rcith his sword.
.^ ,
',
^
TU5' or/
Plato.
Herodot.;
ya?.tf€r'yg
Xen.
Soph.
Also,
'^ '/, Eurip.
''
//
;
;
, '
,
/oJj.i/aOfi•
nuQovai, Isocr.
^
' , ^,)
,
•,
/:,
ti'g/^'i»,
;
Lys.
Xen.
;
Demosth.
?
Plut.
Plato
;
;
;
^,
,
Soph.;
Thucyd. ;
',
^,
>7
Plato;
Lys. ;
Plut. ;
,,
ccyavaovv^ Plato; Aristoph.
Obs. 1. Prepositions with their respective cases are sometimes used in-
-
,
stead of the simple dative ; as, ir
Soph.;
Plato ;
iEschyl. ;
uno
Lys.; ,
Aristoph. ;
Plato;
Anthol. ;
' /,,
",*'</"» moi
ooiwv ((•>
tv
from fear,
Demosth. '
'
,
_{>,
/^
-.
Obs. 2. The instrument of an action is sometimes expressed
by the genitive
ships are burned
; as, elaoxp
loith hostile , Horn.
xftgLoi'jui, until the
MEASURE AND DISTANCE.
sative
XXXIX. Measure
;
»/
as,
stadia distant from Thebes.

> (^tjôyv
or distance
, is put in the accu-
Plataa is seventy
^ CONSTRUCTION OF CIRCUMSTANCES.
[,
IS3
,
iy.xa'iSty.a noûc tiu/.tara un' t.hcy icrre distant about
sixteen feet from each other.
Obs. Measure or distance

Strabo.
is sometimes put in the dative; as, >-[
PLACE.
XL. The question Where ? is answered by tv

with the dative Whither? by ; itc or >^' with the
accusative and Whence ? by ; tv. or with the
genitive
Obs.
dative without
1.
;
fv
as,
'
The
Pcou\i, at
t j',
f/f , Rome.
place where is sometimes

or by the genitive as,
tc ; '^-/.^/'lac, to Athens,
he marched from Sardis.
^^ expressed by the
at Mara-
;
thon, Thucyd. ;
"^-/uyeo; ^f f ; was he not at Argos ?
Horn. Likewise the place lohithcr is frequently expressed by

the accusative alone, or with the termination annexed, &
\3(
^'^
especially
to Marathon Demosth.
in the poets as, r^life^
they came to Telemachus, Id.

^ ;
;
•
Horn. 'inovw
Muoud^m-ude^
;
dauoi'de, to his house, Horn.

;
ichere
Thebes
Adverbs in 'h and
Obs. 2.
;
;
in
the place whence; as,
,
are used to denote the place
^f, and oe^ the place ichithcr ; and in
in the country;
".-id^^rrjdêr,
and ^^
to &,
from Athens.
^
^
TIME.
XLT. Time ichen^ if indefinite and protracted, is
- ,
put in the genitive, if definite, in the dative ; time
how long, in the accusative as, ;
,
yal dfijot'c both in summer and
,
y.u'i ttintcr.
»} '/.»/ ijiton. they arrived the fifth day.
têuai/.evoi ui]rug he reigned screji months.
Obs.
and time how long
utp]y.pr uvroy
John iv. 52.
1. Time when
;
or
having reigned fourteen years, Herodian.
,
sometimes put in the accusative,
genitive or dative as, loom• UdvuiiV
in the
at the seventh hour the fever left him,
is
', ,
;
Obs. 2. All the circumstances of time are often expressed witli a prep-
osition ; as,
Soph.
/
/en/foioc, Xen. t.il iticrg i^ti tQuc, L•v^cian^,
;
~,' iv
i^f/f(jrt, ; t.i' iii]>ug, Herodot.
184 GOVERNMENT.
PAUT AND CIRCUMSTANCE REFERRED TO.

XLil. The circumstance re-
particular part or
ferred to after a general affirmation is put in the
accusative
/,
;
ut
as,
T« co-iia uiyuc
^
he teas large in person.
t^v,
?., he is distressed in his finger.

Thucydides by narne.
a Syrian as to his country.
vwtov, he strikes me on the lack.
diaifiqovoL /., they differ somewhat from each other.
Obs. 1. This accusative is said to be governed b}'
understood, instead of which sometimes fie, ., or
to be supplied as, ^-Q^''!]
; ^
nXeiarov
is rather
(sc. fie),
^
Xen.
' &;
thet/ used the fountain for the most sohmn purposes, Thucyd.
; \4'
; for luhat shall you icish to employ us 7
(sc. ^t"), for such things I

commend Agesildus, Id.
Ohs. 2.
as,
cases are used;
A
y.ai
dative
To^c
as, dtaiftoovTig
, ] '/.
Obs. 3. This is the Greek construction so frequent in the Latin poets
,
might be. and sometimes is, put for the accusative
Xen. In some instances both
Plato.
as, OS humerosqiie deo similis, Virg.
THE CONSTRUCTION OF ADVERBS.

XLIII. Adverbs are joined to verbs and partici-
ples, to adjejctives, and to other adverbs; as,
',
^
^ ,
oQô^c inohjOf, he did rightly.
Obs. 1.
verbs f;/o),
to do and
be phasant
to receive
to
qrC/zi,
all,
favors, Xen.
^
(fQUvYuoc, Tcry prudent.
Adverbs of quality are elegantly joined with the

qtoi»,
Isocr. ;
&.C.
ei)
; as, ^)
as,
Obs. 2.
>
Two or
, ^,
more negatives strengthen the negation
you no iohere did this, Demosth.
'
;
nor let him ever fll any

uof
office, iEschin. ;
jZw SôvTWfy ? >'
,
nothing that is necessary ivill ever be done, Demosth.
when they belong to two different verbs; as, ov
;
' ' '.
Except
//>)
I cannot forbear laughing, Aristoph. So in the phrase

};
)'(:«^ Plato j
'/
^
, nemo non ; as,
Of Id.
Ohs. 3 iM'i, often seems redundant before the infinitive, after words
containing a denial j as, ul^ /(,"/^^«• .
CONSTRUCTION OF ADVERBS. 185
Plato
Obs. 4.
; 7]qriito
^
Lii^
iiintviiv,
/. Xen. niai, iEschin.
;
The modes required by particular adverbs are as follows, with

^ u/ioota
; I'o/fi I//',
ul^ ^,»•, Eurip.

Thucyd.
the exception of the infinitive, for which see Rule XXIX. Obs. 3.
" Eo)g,
1. ,
as long as, take the indicative or subjunctive as, fc? ; ,
,
ftslong as he lived, Demosth. cxfQ' id^tktiTor, as long as you please, Horn.
;
In the sense of until, the indicative, optative, or subjunctive as,

Horn. J 7TfQi(iit%o^sv 'twg deriuwTilfJiov, Plato J
«• ; ' -
oifQu x'
,'
",
nSf ^ ,
,
' , ,
^,
(f(og,
/.^,
Horn.
tWf, as long as, take the indicative as, u/oic iojowv

Athen. In the sense of until, the indicative or subjunctive;
Thucyd. ; uivtiv tors
Miaifu, until, takes the indicative
Xen.
; commonly
;
the subjunctive ;
^ ,• .,
as, uisTuv Apoll. Rh. ; ^^^, Horn.
JIqIv, before, is joined with the indicative, optative, or subjunctive;
, ,
nUQoc, with the indicativse
ccifisaav, nolr
, ,&,
2. ",
as,
o.ToTe,
Xen. J
^,
Demosth.
nQir
; orduuo&tv
Hesiod.
take the indicative or optative, and sometimes the subjunctive ; as, ore
tvTr, when, ,,
', ;
after or 26,
",
Horn. ;
iir'uv,
Thucyd. Horn.;
usually the subjunctive, sometimes the optative,
the indicative rarely; as, /f'y'ic, Plato;
; )';>,
^
axotatjTt,
,; Demosth. xaod Plato.
,
,
; ,
'i2c,
,
ichen or after, take the indicative or optative ; as,
Thucyd.;
?.?. ,
", ',
Herodot. In the sense of o5, Ao?/7, they
take the indicative, optative, or subjunctive ; as,
Theocr. ;
Horn.;
' , Eurip.
, "Ira, where,
as soou as, are joined with the indicative; as,
as soon as I saic him, Herodot.
is generally followed by the indicative ; as, ' iV ,

Aristoph.
3. I,
',
row, speak out, conceal
as,
4. El
', ^.^
when
.
it expresses a wish, takes the optative
tion, the present imperative, or the aorist subjunctive ; as,
,
may Jupiter not make thee hinfr, Worn.)
ojc,
it not in your mind, Id.
vtinam, are construed with the optative

that,
Herodot.; \'^' iio'ov
; \ ,, ; when
'
9
a prohibi-
fiurfiXiâ
</;
Aristoph.
,
Horn.
TTfoc uv
;
^. /, Soph.
Soph. So rrroc
Sometimes
in like manner; as,
is used alone; as, ' i/oi
'
^x'^fj/yoc iv
ns, .'^8
-3
joined with the indicative;
it is ^
Eurip. Hec. 830. is also put with the infinitive ;
Epigr. When the wish relates to any thing past,
,
Xen.
^, . are often prefixed the imperfect and second
as, ^,
(,
Ei y'uq, of
uY^' (: .'• {adui, Horn.;
to aorist
with an
{[ '
'
following
infinitive
lcvtoS' ()/.-&. Id.
tijv,
i)'ti
Xen.
oiTo -ôal
16 *
,
Later writers use
Callim.
;
Sometimes the
as.
;
, ^.
^fov
particles are omitted
riuôo? l^c,
adverbially; as,
Apocal.
;
iii.
as^
15.
186 GOVERNMENT.
XLIV. Adverbs of place, time, cause, quantity,

concealment, separation, exception, exclamation, and
adverbial nouns, govern the genitive as, ;
'
' "^,^,,
,
&) ,
ogovg, as far as the mountain.
until the battle.
on account of Helen.
abundance of such.
without the knowledge of his father.
^ ''
,
•,
avtv
tpti
without labor.
!
except the names.
alas Greece !
,, &,, ^.
like rivers.
,
Xen.
', ,. , ,,
Herodot.
, -^,
;
;
Aristoph.;
Herodot. ;
Hom.
Plato
>
iEschyl.
Matth.
'^
'
it
;
,
^,
64.
'
;
Aristoph.
Soph.;
Plato;
Thucyd.;
, ;
Herodot.
Eurip.
' ^• ;
^tôi;?, Aristoph.
•,
Hom.
- ;
, , ^ '[,
;
^
;
' '. "

Id. ; y.ovifa Thucyd.
, ...
Hom.
<
., Soph. ;
Herodot. ;
-ftonv-
Lucian; Vlut.; ;
Galat. 20.
^
i.
Obs. 1. The genitive is often governed by on account ^
; ,,
of,with respect to, understood ; as,
I esteemed you happy on account of your disposition, Plato
(5' angry on account of this deception, Hom. ;
happy by his fortune, Aristoph.
' (, '
' -,
ot^
To
with respect
to
this place seem
^, as I am with respect
to
being pretty drunk, Herodot.

be well with respect to riches, to be very rich, id.
is understood.
,
belong such examples as the following
to memory, as far as I remember, Plato;
they folloiced as fast as they could run, Herodot. ;
for know not hoiC he is
learning and justice, how learned and just he i5,_Plato ;
to
By some, however,
; •,
;
, ,',
), ^,& ,,
Obs. 2. Some of these adverbs are also joined with the dative as,
, ', Herodot.; Xen. ;

;
-8-
-
, Herodot.
.^schyl. ;
; Pind.
Eurip.
And a few with the accusative; as,
"
;Plato;
Hom.;
;
,,
' Pind.
'
Herodot. ; Hom. ;
Herodot.
Obs. 3, Many adverbs of exclamation are frequently joined

with other cases besides the genitive, and some with other
cases only as, qrf
wretched me ! Soph. ;
: ! Xen.
«V, «V, *'
qav ! ah ;
.
CONSTRUCTION OF CONJUNCTIONS. 187
Lucian
ih
Herodot.
;
, 8.^^
;
««' rhy
odul d^
;
> ^^
Bion
iue
; ;
deilup, Callim.
noAfojc, Plut.
Matth. xxvi. 24.

/? ;
01 with the dative i/oi added to it is often construed with the nomina-
tive ; as, uuioi ihlXiitug, Aristoph.
uoi
«r»;?, Soph.
SfiXuc. Honi.
'irty.a understood
Instead of ouioi,
as, inuoi tojv ikuov

Similarly uoi
;
Eurip. '
uoi is often used ; as,
Sometimes a genitive accompanies, governed by
Eurip. ;
'^,,
iu>;g,
- ^
Adverbs of exclamation are sometimes omitted as, rijg
tpQeron•
') the viisfortune ! Xen.
.'
Jupiter
Ztv fiunt/.EV, /;
! the acuteness of his
;
mind ! Aristoph.
! (for
Obs. 4. Other adverbs have also a government of cases.
,
uu'
1. Adverbs of accompanying govern the dative
tfioi, go in with me^ Aristoph.
as tJic horse did this, Herodot.
together with the cavalry^ Polyb.
uuu ;
;
;
^
as, el'aid•'
^-
, 2. Adverbs of showing are construed with the nominative

;, behold thy son, John xix. 26. ;
;
,
as, iSov 6 via; up-
behold the man, Ibid. v. .
3. Adverbs of swearing take the accusative ; as, v^

by Hercules, Demosth. rul uu ; ^»', by
this sceptre, Hom.
always affirms ulc, on the contrary, generally denies, except when
8'
I, ;
joined with ral. Sometimes ulx is omitted; as, or, "O/.vurcor, Soph.
Antig. 758.
XLV. Some derivative adverbs govern the case

of their primitives ; as,
az'twg iuvTov siQ^xs, he has spoken icorthiJij of himself

I'njs uuoiwg fiioi, you hnmc in like manner as I.
^.,
iuov OS (fiXror, loving you more than me.
the Jiiost of all men.
THE CONSTRUCTION OF CONJUNCTIONS.

XLVI. Conjunctions generally couple similar
modes and cases ; as,
ijTid^ditfi Si
xu'i timv ,
he rose tip
ovTt doit;g, '^ and spoke as foUoics.
.he desires neither glory nor riches.
Obs. 1. To this rule belong, not only the copulative and

ISO GOVERNMENT.
likeness
^
as,
aQSLOCfiv
aoi,
;
J^t'/TfO
^ ^,
Theophrast.
f/Liiv
Horn.
,
disjunctive conjunctions, but several others, as also adverbs of
xovto^roc,
Hom. ; ^
?.^, Xen.
y /if rat
Obs. 2. Sometimes different modes and cases are coupled

together
' y.?.vî
Herodot. ;
;
aov,
as,
mi&Mutv
^^'/
],
^
, , .
]
e. , ^
^,
Orpheus;
«, £
jj Plato;
««/^ ,,
injdfvl
Xen.
XL VI . conjunctions
), commonly take the optative
The
onojc,
the leading
,when
^, ,
verb denotes past time, and the subjunctive when
it denotes present or future
i^/.ûv I'la
as,
^
,
^, ,
ira
I came that I might see.
I come that I may see.
;
I feared that something m,ig]it hefall you.

na^rfci ,
I fear that something may befall you.
Obs. Sometimes these conjunctions take the subjunctive when the
I.
preceding verb denotes past time, and the optative when it denotes pres-
ent or future; as, Thncyd. }(, ') •,
^
/', ;
Lucian. They are hkewise frequently found with the indicative of the
past and future tenses; as, l'i«
o.Twg in
that you might hear, Tlato;
?.',
she fascinates him that he maij forget
^,
Ithaca, Hom. especially ,, which is sometimes put with the present
;
\ *', ] ([,
(
indicative; as, Theocr. ;
lest
'^, ,'
some one appear, Eurip.
^, that, SO that,
, take the indicative or infinitive as,
Dtimosth. /c oitoic
; ^,
;
'
Lucian. But wOTf, therefore,
; is
joined with the modes.
-, , 3'
all
^, that, in quoting the words or sentiments of another, takes the in-

dicative or optative; as, LikeA\'ise ^/,,. • 3,' •
Xen. Also in the sense of because;

' ,
'
as, Plato ; or Id.
,
tive
Obs.
1.
2.
;
2.
Et,
as,
Plato;
if,
"^r, in the poets

,
Other conjunctions are variously construed.
takes the indicative or optative, and sometimes the subjunc-
or
/•>?, Theocr.
,
<', Hom.
is put with all
;
the modes and

,
participles,
'^, ,^,
to which it gives a potential sense.
Wîth the indicative; as, n,if he were p7-escnt hs
,^
tt'
would ash ijon, Lucian ; yuo ' for we should have

perished there, Hom. It often expresses the repetition of an action; as,
intl ^, ichcnevcr this happened, they came imme-
Construction of conjunctions.
); ^^, ^ ISO
,^
diately, Xen. ; }.'iî(i/.s uv "^
tndijTa, as often as he
came, he assumed a Grecian habit, Herodot.
as, -^
blow, Eurip.
y.Tvrcov
With the future
',^'' u»•,
seems
AI30
ability in past actions ;
every one could hear the sound of the
to soflcn the decisiveness of the
,
it
sentence; as, ur I will select these, Horn.; i,5n)v
ttv u<HaTi[aoutv, we shall dine the more pleasantly, Xen.
With the optative; as, oi'y. uv you would
,
not know, if I should tell you his name, Plato. It often expresses volition ;
as, >^Stu>g uv uxovaatui, I would gladly liear, Plato.
yUQ xtv f'Aoi
Or ability ; as, riJv
for now he might take the city, Horn. ; uv
ftdvsiac iMtvf/.ccov could you not tcithstand Meneldus 7 Id.
Also of the imperative ; as,

With
;
gives to the verb the sense of the future ; as, uivoiu' "Uv,
uv ettroj ovv
the subjunctive, to
Sometimes it
icill stay. Soph.
go in quickly. Soph.
which
,
often gives the sense of the future;
it
as, }' St y.ev uvtIic 'fXuhiui, I vfiyself will take it, Yiom. ; uv
',• ; what will
the laws say ? Plato. Sometimes it expresses
ability ; as, uv xtui»,c Ti'qawov, you cannot kill the tyrant, Eurip.
With the imperative, though rarely as, tSoaa' uv, ev tovt' &' uv, I
,
;
loould hare done it, be assured, Soph.
' With the infinitive
uTjuy.n'ivuodui
gias? Plato.
^ With
^ ;
participles ; as, of
; as, in' ovSsvl
for no consideration would they do this, Herodot. ;
«
do you think that you can answer
unoy.TiwvvTtc, y.ul
'foSeiv
•/' uv,
uv
/.
they said that
uv
better tlwn Gor-
' )]nav, icho icould readily kill and bring to life again if they icere able,
Plato.
After the relatives , ', ,
&c. uv has mostly the signification
of the Latin cunqne. soever, in which case it is generally folloved by the
Bubiunctive. sometimes bv the nntatii'p rarplv hv thp iniiif-ntiTJo nc «v;,»
^,
marries her,
,'
Homer
ory. uv,
Hom
^ ".^r is often repeated in the
ovSLtot' uv
icould never hare
;
. '
made Kestor an
aut'
I cannot save you by force, as you
whatsoever he will. Id.
same member of a sentence
«j'oo>;T)',v uv,
orator, Aristoph.
if it
;
;
as,
were dishonest.
uXy.T] Si '
,
fj i'ocr)c, uv,
think perhaps, Eunp.
ovy. }'
Sometimes it is omitted ; as, it
oiSiv, for ovy uv
God, he could do nothing, John ix. 33. S ov Si '
,^ ovro: jtuqU
if this man icere not of
iftnoiEv, which
;
', ;
'^
tico men could not carry, Hom. ; vv nidoio ; indeed icould
you at all obey me 7 Id.
3. 'Eur, by contraction >7v or iv, in the Ionic poets
the subjunctive; as, iuv ;"»;;, ,[,-,,or ?/, takes ,
Demosth. uv tuvtu [<\,
if you examine, you will find,
if ice grant this, he icill
^ ^>\ '-,
,
laugh, Plato ti Si-; St but if they
do not give it, I will take it myself Hom.
^ ^,
Sometimes, however, the indicative is found as, uv
Cebet, Tab. 33.
TTfOi'
stay, Hom.
Also the optative, particularly with
Isocr. ; ui'x' ye
or as, »7
if you voluntarily ,
/, ,,
;
4. ".',
commonly take
inriS'r, ^'reu , t ,',,
the indicative, the optative rarely ;
since, for as
as, 10; ' much
in I
as,
190
Hector, Horn.
" tti/i,
GOVERNMENT.
do not
if^joiv,
kill
Intimq KvQov
me, since am
tôar,
not the brother of
he says they are
, , , &,
;
his, since they belonged to Cyrus, Xen.

Obs. 3. When the relatives 8$, &c. refer to in-
with uv
,
SiSwaiv
if itdenote present or future; as,
uv
i-9^tXij, Find.; ov
ce^yvQlov, Oeraosth.
^
definite persons or things, they commonly take the optative vpithout av if
the verb in the preceding clause denote past time, and the subjunctive
^, , ^
Horn.;
&vwGi,
Thucyd.;
,
^ Sometimes
Plato.
When
lowed by
u?, ,
Herodot.
'iv is put with the optative
Plato;
as,
Also the subjunctive is frequently used without
', ;
definite persons or things are referred to, the relatives are fol-
tlie indicative.
Id.
it; as,
XLVIII.
THE CONSTRUCTION OF PREPOSITIONS.
govern the genitive

The prepositions
; tv,
, , , ,,
ovv, the dative ; and
the accusative ; as,
,^ for.
should
,
For; aQ' aihcu ;
you thank him for Xen.
,
this benefit?
Before ;
tXioSai >^ to choose glory before
wealth, Isocr.
Instead of;
against ' Herodot.

,, having whips instead of arms,
he went against jijax, Horn.
From ;
Jlfter;
itn'
ano
•*'
"
, ]\9,
from.
they came from Argos, Pind.
a.from this day, Plato.
after supper, Herodot.
(),
Of time,
At;
By;
Of:
ano
)
'
Acts
' ,
,
^^,
xxiii. 23.
at the third
they were wasted by war,

of
hour of the night,
Thucyd.
hundred children
For, by rea-
son of;
With ; ij ^ ,,
one only escaped, Herodot.
crowd,
' Luke xix. 3.
and he could not for
the stone with ichich they light

the
,
the fire, Aristoph.
"•, without their arms, Thucyd.
^
,, ,
Without TMv
forty stadia from
.
the sea, Diod. Sic. ;
shalt be farther removed
me,
Stoics,
Hom. ;
Academics,
Platonics, Plut. ;
Lucian
,
from my heart, shah be hated by
the
the
the Pelopon•
thou
nesians, Herodot,
CONSTRUCTION OF PREPOSITIONS. 191
Outof;
From ;
]-^,
iy.
vSwQ ix
out of the well, Plut.
,
i? -^,
out of.
from
ifQtuTog, having drawn up water
sea to sea, JieTodot. Of
,< time, ix our ijovth, Horn.

from
Of; ix mnoirûtra, made of loax, Lucian.
After ; ix tau()Qia, after noon, îschin. Socr. ; ix
after the rear, Thucyd.
For, in conse- ix or i&avwTw-^y], for this he teas condemned to
quence of; death, Xen.
By; ix neia^tioa by which of her friends per-
^,
;
suaded ? Soph.
With ; ii iiO? they cried out with one voice,
Aristoph.
Before, of place -^ ,, ^
77^0, before.
standing before the door, Eurip.
^ ,
;
Of time ; before the war, Thucyd.

Of preference; no?.fuov aiQfioSai, to
choose icar before peace, Dionys. Hal.
For, in behalf of; nuiSon• xu'i to fight for
wives and children, Horn. Instead of; -âvtCv
In;
Among
'
iv -, ,
' ,
xtivov, to die for him, Eurip.
iv
ing in the garden, Plato.
, in.
he sat among
I happened
the suitors, Horn.

to be walk-
Before;
On;
During;
iv
iv
iv
,
thousand witnesses, Plato.
ij
^'^,
he wrote on the
before
,
more than
icalls, Aristoph.
during the
thirty
In the power of ;
With;
Into;
iv
;^
iv
plague they called
Demosth.
iv
.
,',
to
t]^ ,
mind
the
this prediction,
end teas in the
with shields and darts, Xen.

having passed over into Samos,
Thucyd.
power of God,
^
Pausan.
At; /', I• iv after the naval fight at
According
By;
to ; iv
iv
Salamis, ^schin.
^, according to our laws, Isocr.
S^jr^
1^
by ,
^
these magistrates enact no late, Demosth.
Of; »] oi'x iv », /, ; wot ye not what
For ;
the scripture saith of
iv ([ ', ius?
to receive Code Syria for
KolJCr^v
Rom. xi. 2.
[,3,
a doicry, Polyb. account of; On iv t»j
celebrated for his poetry. Herodot. Vit. Horn.
Against iv
TO!
bold against me. Soph.
iv /;. «'
thetj blamed Pericles,hucy. ;
they were angry with,
not iv /, ît
, ^,
^,
»} ;
agreeable to you? Eurip.; iv to

esteem equally. Herodot. ; iv ia(f to
make light of, Id
192 GOVERNMENT.
^, with.
With;
On the side of; avv

With the assist-
SiVQo
Horn.
" ,
I'jXv^s
Minerva, Horn.
avv 3ItvfXaw, he came hither with Meneldus
^]^,
on the side of the Greeks, Xen.
tivui, to be
he overcame with the assistance of
,,
ance of;
.^gainst; that even he himself
would fight against him, Xen.
Besides
According to; avv
in, at the time of;
; ovv
,, besides all these things,

according to the law, Xen.
in drinking, Anacr.
Luke xxiv. 21
Into
To;
Till;
;
,•,
xul
'
morning, Horn.
]
, into.
they drove into the city, Herodot.
he came to Creon, Hesiod.
I could certainly bear
"?., good-will
it till
Towards;
Against;
In;
7;' ^,
evvotu
,
Isocr.
Demosth,
Tiv
towards the Greeks,
they offend against the temple,
sitting in the assembly,
,,
.SLschin.
Within;
Among ", -9-, to come within bow-shot, Xen.
seeking reputation among the
Before
Upon;
;
Greeks, Polyb.
/.?.
, speak before all. Soph.
falling upon one another, Austoph.
;, Of number;
About; about evening, Aristoph. uv-
For;
the
^>],
i:
naval forces, Thucyd.
',
about sixty men, Thucyd.
he furnished money for
On account of; iituivtia-dai, to be praised on account ofjus-

^tice, Aristot.
With respect
Concerning
to ;
;
Eurip.
him, Pausan.
'^,
, to be happy icith
have nothing
respect to children,
to say concerning
, ,,
By "',' neither by Jerusalem, Matth. v. 35.
XLIX. The prepositions vmo, govern

the genitive and accusative ; and the dative
and accusative ; as,
^lu, through, on account of.
Through, ,
, With
»;?
the Genitive.
going through Libya, Thucjd.

By
With
During
;
terpi-eter,
,, Xen.
' he treated with them by an in-
he icrote with ink, Plut.

during the ichole night, Herodot.
,
^CONSTRUCTION OF PREPOSITIONS. 193
^7( •,
"
Jifter'; Sia iiaxQov after a Jong time, iEschyl.
Move, ixhov iiu above all worth seeing, Herodot,
in; have in one's hand, Athen.
,
f'/eir, to
Among;
Si'a
' ^(), Hom,er
has honored him
among men, Find.
-
êar;
diu ,
yaTianûTo.ThUvat Sile
city, Polyb.
continually, Isocr. ;
third ijear, Herodot. ; di'u
he encamped near the
SiU^tqItov trove, every

ilrui, to fear, Thucy
yniadut, to be suspected, Plut. ; Sl' ] .
ii'
Ttv'u, to be angry with any one, Thucyd. ;
'
(}, to commiserate, Eurip. Uraiy
aifixiaâi ', to give battle, Herodot.
On account of; ,
Jay.fnovlov
With the AccusatiA'ê.
of the L'lcedemonians Xen.

they icere banished on account
,
,
By means of; Silx iycfuyti, he escapes by means of Croesus,

Herodot.
By;
Through;
/n,•
toi)c
Aristopli.
,
: £/,
six folds, Horn.
' ut»ii>u
^^
he is honored by the good,
the spear penetrated
laios made
through
in heaven^ Soph.
,
,^ ,
at, according to.
,
With the Genitive.
At y.uTu axortov to shoot at a mark^ Hetodian.

Of; TO)• ] the stcvte must be said
Against:;
Upon ;
In;
Under ;
From
Through;
;
'
'
?,/.»
xutU
uiov
yijc
xutu
,,
of virtue, Plut.
.,
against me, Plato.
] >],
nloov
to fall
.)^<,
upon
to
the grt^înd,
produce
living in iftf icater, Lucian.

to go under the ra-rth, Plato.
they leaped from the wall,. Xen,
they icere dispersed throuo-k
witnesses
Dionys. Hal.
,
t>Jc
*
the islatul, Polyb.
By; iôoxi^w I adjure thee by God, Matih.
xxvi. 63.
With the Accusative.
According
During;
to ;
In the time qf ; >

xa&' "Otir,Qor,
urXiovoi xar'a
voyage, Herodot.
according
xarie
,
to Homer, Plato.
they pipe during the whole
(fy;ni, he sa^s
that Mrges governed
the Echinades in the time
of the
Trojan rear, Strabo.
Through
In;
^mong ;
' ', , ,'^,
xaTix TyjTOXiv o/»,»! through the whole citu, Dionys.
ornavov he dwells in heaven, Eurip.
zee
Hal.
lay among the thick husltes,

*
Horn,
17
194
By ;
JVeaj'
'
' ' , ,
GOVERNMENl•.
by land and by sea, Isocr.

near the tomb, -Eschyl.
^,
Before;
Opposite to ;
^t
'fore your face, Aristoph.
' ^,
jtaxtSaiuoi '
that he Tnay speak to you be-
IlfQaag, he placed the Persians

opposite to the Lacedcemonians, Herodot.
aiiv oâ, he continually looked at them, Horn.
To ;
Towards ; ^
' ' [,
they came to the army, Horn.
mild toicards the citizens, Herodot.
uviâivov, after him others ascended,
•,
After;
{',
Herodot.
[
On account of;
Concerning ;
'
,
account of his youth, Thucyd.
»,»•
having slighted him on
questioning the en^
,
Toy concerning his coming, Herodot.
With; he comTnandswith authority, Mark
About; ' i. 27.
It is often
avSgag, about six thousand men, Herodot,
put with the accusative to denote the end of an
,
action; />;£»;»• having sailed out in
order to collect plunder, Herodot. Also to serve as a
^ }^,
,
circumlocution of the genitive
the rising of the sun, Polyb.
xa9^' by himself, Demosth. ;
month, Aristoph. '; %,,
; i^
every
every year,
Plato;
time, Xen. ; , four thousand at a
bij tribes, Horn.
'Ynkoj above.
Above;
Over ; •-& vSwo

With
tmi• ' ((,
the Genitive.
appeared above their breasts, Xen.

the water of the rivei
vjitn, leaping over the trenches, Soph.

Beyond; i| Arno,from
Ethiopia which is
"^
^^^,
'
beyond Egypt, Thucyd.
{•
^ ,
For ; to fight for the Greeks, Plato.
On account of; '-^ di r/jtQ (7), being hated by Seuthes
on account of you, Xen.
By ;
Concerning ; oaa
my
r-iQ,'^v7jg ,
I pray by the gods, ApoU. Rh.
what he falsely laid
to
^,
charge concerning the peace, Demosth.
Above ;
Over;
iv
Xen.
With
Of number;
,,
in order not to suffer, Demosth.
tlie Accusative.
above twenty thousand men, Herodot.
Herodot.
vni^
.7*0
in the plain above Selymbria,
Se
they throw it
-9:,
over the house,
Beyond; ipqavtiv, to have a sj/irit beyond his purse,

Lucian.
Against; tintQ ^, against destiny, Horn.
upon, through.
^
'-//'(i,
With the Dative.

Upon; ava uxoo) Jwiior, sitting upon tiie summit of
mount Gargar us Horu.
In;
With;
ctvu ', ^.,
avu
J
in ships, Eurip.
with a golden sceptre, Horn.
Through;
During
In;
,
>] ',,
avu
itv'a
With
nor.fuor
ar'u
the Accusative,
through the armij, Horn.

during this war, Herodot.
having kings in your mouik,
Am^ng ; ava,
Horn.
» ([, they loere among the first, Herodot.
,,•,
At at the hollow ships, Horn.
To ;
«»' )]?.&s,came to the Latmian forest, Theocr.
Up ava to sail up the river, Herodot.
Upon; ^>Jxfv avu he hung them upon a tamarisk, Horn.
According to ; avU ui'tov /.,according to the same manner, Polyb.
By reason of; ava
cevU , ?•
reason of the darkness, Thucyd.
they not discovering them by
7cith all his might, Xen.

turns, in succession, alternately, Eurip. ;
the midst, between, 1 Cor. vi. 5. ;
ava by
ava uiaov, in
ava rcav avu
,
,
hia, yearly, Herodot. wf/i* avu di'o
;
f/£tv, neither have two coats apiece, Luke ix. 3-
(),
L.
,The prepositions /, ,
govern the genitive, dative,
, naqa, neql,
and accusa-
tive ; as,
^
*Ju(fl^ about.
With^the Genitive.
About;
Concerning;
For;
By ;
^ ^,'
Herodot.
atlSeiv aiufl
tain,
,
Horn.
Tyjg no?.tog, dicelling
^,
to sing concerning love,
by Phoebus, Apoll. Rh.

they fight for a
about this
Hem.
little
city,
foujl•
About; : '• , With the Dative.
([ he rends the robes ahout his
'.
body, M.sc\\j\.
Concerning; umfl m'trrd fyofnftai, I intended to inquire concern•
ing my husband, Horn.
/'
,
For; you fought for Helen, Horn.
With;
Jêar
Upon;
; . '£/.ii(j
.»/)•»;
Tjotnt ' ('
! : ^'-
ovr'/tam, pierced with his talons, Hesiod.
he fell near him, Horn.
his back a Sidonian woman, Anacr.

for he carries upon
196
against i
, , GOVERNMENT.
Tot^c iitv 'u4tqsiS<ov

he uttered speeches, some against the
against Ulysses, Soph.
, S' atnp' ÔSvff-
Mrldx, some
With
,
the Accusative.
,
About
JVear
uuifl
'-,( -,
stove,
cutpl
y.uinvor
i'/v)
Lucian. Of time
I
setting of the Pleiads, iEschyl.
$f
;
about sixty stadia, Xen.

am commonly
Of number
the
j
sword teas broken

about the
about the
,/
near the hilt, Horn.
-8
,
To ; au(p' u'f.u '^-i /uivuc,to confine the Greeks to the sea, Horn.
fAoui
Concerning f uk'/.o 6 '(' urrîiu >]i' ui'-dvjv Ton• auai
there ictis no other memorial here of the fables
concerning Jason, Arrian.
For; uu(f'i a contest arose for driving
away the oxen, Horn.
', upon.
With the Genitive.
Upon ;
Over inl toj'twv
' (, ',
tiiey stand upon an cininence, Herodot.
over these he left ^îcarchus,
• ,
,
Polyb.
In;
Herodot.
^ having in his hand a mouse^
By ;
Before;
inl 9?. they stood by the sea, Polyb.
uuotvowv, before so many witnesses, Lucian.
Towards
Against
In the time of ;
t/rt
, ', Mik/Tov,he sailed toicards Aliletus, Thucyd.
he went against Phrygia, Xen.
in the time of Saturn, Hesiod.
7Tui6oc, speaking <f the beautiful boy,
Of;
Plato.
'
^,-
From; Jvyioi tnvnvul^v, the Lycians had
"*
their ruime from Lycus, Herodot.
' «»•, by themselves, apart, Yieroaoi.;
' inl
Qo)v,four deep, Thucyd. ; ^ j, the
descent was by one at a time, Xen.
Upon; \, ?, ^ With the Dative.

having a vessel upon her
Over;
In;
or
V»'*''
*'< , ,
head, Herodot.
leave a keeper over

>('
irci
my possessions, Hom.
inl both in
for I did not
war and in
, ^,
any other business, Hom.
With; iadlovaiv inl oItco oi/or, they eat meat icith their bread,
Xen.
At; inl Tv> "^- at the river Halcx, Thucyd.
To; inl created to good works,
Ephes. ii. 10.
'^-
Against;
Before;
After ;
' trt'
toi'c
athco
inl >7 --»;, stirring up the
',
Arcadians against Sparta, Herodot.
', before these judges, Aristoph.

after him Pheraulas rose up^ Xen.
Besides;
For;
CONSTRUCTION OF PREPOSITIONS.
fered
iSui'uuLov avTov tnl
dom, Plato.
',
many
other misfortunes, Horn.
9
,
yuy'a, besides these we suf-
they admired him for his wis•

197
Concerning ; /»;/;(» inl /?;, they consulted the oracle con-

cerning the country, Herodot.
Jn the power of
ini
Also design;
,
êoi: ' forl, it is in the potcer of the gods, Plato.
It is often put with the dative to express condition ;
come on condition of receiving presents, Horn.
inl
depart in order to make war, Aen.
,
we shall seem to
^Qo
(' With
,
the Accusative.
Upon;
Over
To;
j
Towards ;
against
•i/rt tI^v
Horn.
,,&,
house of Jacob,
inl
oixiuv
Luke i.
he leaped upon his horse, Xen.
'luxaifi, he shall reign over the
33.
ice are come to the /toiiê, Aristoph.
looking towards the purple sea,
he marched against the
Among
By;
exAi' in'
Horn.
inl y.ouvav , &^,
.Ethiopians, Herodot.
you became celebrated among meUf
sitting by a fountain, Theocr.

For, during;
TiU;
About inl , ^
iSt'lovv Ti^v
^two days, Thucyd.
inl '
in' 7), I slept till morning, Horn.
ijitQag, they
about three hundred, Herodot.

It is oft!en put with verbs of_ motion, in order to show tbe
object of them ; ai
ravaged the country for
in aqyvqiov , I came to
^
you to gt.t money, Xen.
With
Among ;
; T« ^
>
day with him, Plato.
',
,
With
with, among,
'(
'
the Genitive.
after.
we commonly spent
; why seek
the
ye the living
By means
Against
of; '
(>\) '
among
ii. 16.
the dead
, ? Luke xxiv.
to be first
.
by means of virtue, Xen.
I will fight against iAem, Apocal.
With the Dative.

Among 9' , I am the youngest among
In; '
you, Hom.
'^,
ifinovaa,carrying you in her arm5,Callim.
,
fif
With; iovociKTo him

caught witn his hands, Hom.
By; ' iooioovTo their manes were
,
shaken by the blowing of the wind, Hom.
With the Accusative,
Afnr; trie after the death of Darius,
Herodot. Of rank or degree »• ; ai,
whom I love the most after you, Aristoph.
17*
198 GOVERNMENT*
To; tofitv (Ion. for IWiv) ' hiov,letus go to my soitf

Horn.
,/.
In ;
Into;
Amcmg
QonaXov
"S2iog
?,
sea, Dionys. Per.
^'
having a club in his hands, Alciphr,
^'
, the Oxiis falls into the Caspian
you are
' & ^,
oi (paaiv aQiOTov, they say that
Besides;
the best
oloi y.al
among your
Jaruotaiv
chiefs there are among
co&vals, Horn.
the
y.al ' 'yi
Greeks besides Achilles, Horn.
?., wlutt
Against ;
By; ,
gods, Hesiod.
Plato.
&' ,,
he sinned against the immortal
neither by night nor by day,
Sometimes it is put with the accusative

of an action} .', to express the end
he sailed in or-
,
der to get the golden fleece, Theocr.
froniy at, to.
From; rtaQa
Agamemnon,
With
Plato.
the Genitive.
daiQa , to receive presents from
Xfear
By;
; naqa
'&,
<3(, near the Cyanean
let this be
rocks, Soph.
shown by you, Xen.
At
With ;
In;
naqa
naq'
, ,
]^ /.\ ,
With the Dative.
remaining at the ships, Horn.

they lodged with you, Demosth.
in Homer Diomedes sa?/s, Plato.
,,
To; thai naqa Tiaaaifiqvsi, to go to Tissaphernes Xen.
,
To, t]Xe •naq' {, he came to us, Plato.

they slept near him, Horn.
JVear ; Tiaq'
During ; naqa yqovov, during the tohole time, Demosth.
At; naqa they do these things at their
rough;
, ,
entertainments, Herodot.
aqva, through the whole army, Thucyd.
^• ,
naq'
Against naqa against the laics, Demosth.
more than
jiftore, } naqa he labored above the others,
Xen.
Below; (ôa/f' Tt naq' thou hast reduced
him a beloio the angels, Psa. viii. 5.
{
little
By reason of ; naqa », nqiav, they have confidence by

reason of their experience, Aristot.
From; naqa oqav, I think that safety is from
Besides ;
this, Plato.
naqa ', there are not others besides these,
Aristoph.
oaaqova .,
,
Except naqa I received forty stripes except
naqa q'
(or save) one,
1-9 -9,
2 Cor.
{qav,
xi. 24.
every fourth day, Polyb. ; naq'
I came within a little of dying, Isocr.
-
naq' they esteemed Cleander
of little consideration, Xen.
CONSTRUCTION OF PREPOSITIONS, 19d
//fot, about.
With the Genitive.
Ahout what do you say abotit Ackillesl
^,
Tt ;
Plato.
For ; Tijads let us fight for this land, Tyrt.
From;
Above ;
nus, Lucian.
ntqi
ci Ttsn'i
Plato.
,
\,
Jty.^mvov, I brhig letters from Decria/•
to be above all others, Horn.

they will greatly esteem youy
' ,,
(, With the Dative.
Aboiit TTiot about their necks, Herodot.

For; fearing for PotidcBa, Thucjd.
Through;
, TVi
they fled through fear, Pind.
,
By transfixed by the spear, Horn.

' ,
About;
Of time;
, ,
dwelling about the marshes, Herodot.
they overtake
-
,
them about dinner-time, Thucyd. Of number;
Towards;
Aristoph.
. aboui forty talents, Lys.
they are just towards the people^
Against; -^ to offend against the gods, Isocr.
, from, near, to.
From ;
By ; ^ --,,
,
,
Jibg
With the Genitive.
allare from Jupiter, Horn.

to begoverned by one man, Eurip.
For
JVear
;
Towards ;
;
, In obtestation
*.»;
9
; -^, by the gods, Soph.
you seem to Speak for me, Plato.
they are near the sea, Herodot.
inhabiting towards the icest, Herodot.
-,
Against;
Before
Under
;
; .
9'
other,
^,
Horn.
,,, ,
against an enemy, Dionys. Hal.
/,
impious before the gods, Xen.
giving his vote
you may weave the web under an-
it is the part of a man of sense,

Aristoph.
mother's side, ^schin. of ',
on the father's,
the relatioris
'
by blood, Soph.
With the Dative.
,
Xfear;
Jî
Upon;
' nence, Thucyd.
in their arms, Plut.

KsivTo ^,
,
they encamped near
to carry the children
they lay upon the ground, Horn.

a certain emi-
200
Besides
tOT
GOVERNMENT.
been said answer this also, Plato.

i'Ou'llovol ti^v «/,
,9 ,
they do not think that virtue is naturally calculated for
besides what has
their good, Xen.
To
Towards
',
Xaav
With
/.,
the Accusative.
they went to Olympus, Hesiod.
,
he sailed towards the west, Herodot.
Of dispositions ; ai ; how is he dis-
,
posed towards you ? Plato.
against; (: ^ do not kick against the pricks,
According
In comparison
with ;
to ; ^
& ,iEschyl.
,
a\iav
to his desert,
will appear
-9^
an
Xen.
they gave to
in comparison with a
each according
god he
,
ape, Plato,
On account qf ; ^ vision I hastened the nuptials, Herodot.
on account of this
', , ^ ,
With; they made an alliance
with the king, Thucyd.
Between;
^,
that is between us, Isocr.
, a proof of the friendship
,^
Besides; ihcv if besides this you teach
For
them, Xen.
Thucyd.
^, they used it for the trophy,
About; t^v ^, it was about day-break, Lys.

about seven hundred, Xen.
Of number;
under.
Under ;
From ;
from
&,
^ ?/
With
under
the darkness, Horn.

,
the Genitive.
,,
the earth, Hesiod.
deliver the sons of Greece
,
By ; they are praised by the multi-
tude, Plato. he was slain by
'
Nicander, Xen.
According to ;
For, by reason of;

With;
To .,
' , , Horn.
'
',
according to the
to
command of Jupiter,
to dance for joy, Aristoph.

convey with pomp, Herodot.
to sing to the piper, Theog.
they dug under the strokes of whips,
Herodot.
Under ;
JVear, close
In;
'
',,
under;
,
, ^,
Horn.
»7
With the Dative.
under the earth, Horn. Subject to;
vno
Jaxs-
they are under the Lacedcemonians, Isocr.
near the city, Thucyd.
.,concealing them in her bosontf
Before ; before such a witness, Herodian.

By ; struck by my spear, Horn.
^,
For ;
With;
To; vnb ,
^, crifing out for fear,
he went forward with
dancing to the lyre,
ApoU. Rh.
Anacr.
muck light, Plut.
Under ;
To
'
$ "
horse's feet, Herodot.
uvi^Q
that came to Troy, Horn.
With
tov ^,
the Accusative.
]-&, he was the

dog ran under
most abject icretch

the
Behind ; xai uiv

behind the door, Herodot.
^ -,
and she c07iceals him,
Mout ;
^
Ohs.
came
1.
'
Tor yquvov TorTor, about this time, Thucyd.
. IS
me, Demosth.
often used for nqbg or fig
--^ as,
,- \4^-
^ /, ',
lie to ;
they sent ambassadors to the Athenians, Thucyd.
Ohs. 2. Prepositions are sometimes separated from their

cases as, ' eig (for eig
,"^ Hom. ;
;
' tuvttj (for
,
'
',) Herodot. . 69. They are also frequently placed after;
,
as, //(////»'
Plato.
^c, Hom, ; Hfui Eurip. ;
Obs. 3. The poets sometimes join a preposition with the

latter only of two nouns, where it should stand with both as, ;
t) iilog T\ inl yr^;^ Horn.
a case
Obs. 4.
, ; as, ,
Prepositions are frequently used as adverbs, without
^g, Eurip. ;
^
Obs. 5.
Herodot.
-',
'',
Prepositions are often understood
(sc. ,\ Herodot.
; -
, as,
(sc. ,^ Horn. (sc. ,^

', yon shoot at
,
;
this man. Soph. ;

al avroTg (sc. *•,)
the ships were lost with all on board, Xen. ;
(sc. ovv,) he rrturned with the army, Thucyd. ,»

]; (instead ;) why are you angry with me
;
? Xen.
LI. A preposition in composition often governs

the same case, as when it stands by itself; as,
Ta '
,,;(^«
avriy.i'^fve Tij Jil^njot, he
.,
Tor aoiucTo:, he leaps from the chariot.
throwing the leaves at one another,
played at dice with Ceres.
V (inrty ladfiov, having carried their ships over the
uthmus.
202
^\ [,-,
/.
y.uTtyvwaav
GOVERNMENT.
Thucyd.
Herodot.
ntQitiaTi]y.ii, Plato.
hSUTQixpa
, ^'/',,
Ohs. 1. This rule takes place only when the preposition would have the
Plato
Lucian
j
,
same sense and the same case if standing immediately before the noun.
Sometimes the preposition is repeated ; as, y.aTtjYOQovvTwv otqu-
'
Xen.
.
/. ,,
in composition is used; as,
Herodot.
6' ,
nQto^vTtQovg
^,/^ ^
JJfQotSa . -
^,
Obs. 2. Sometimes a case different from that required by the preposition
Id.
Plato;
^ , ?.' )
Soph.; Eurip.
'
Obs. 3.
they are compounded ; as, auvvat, (for ,)
Prepositions are often separated from the verbs with which
.
Herodot.
Hom.
33.
Obs. 4. The
tvi for
' ' , ]&,
prepositions with which some verbs are compounded are
not unfrequently used for the compounds themselves ; as,
for
•
or arise thou.
for .
GRAMMATICAL FIGURES.
Figures which relate to Orthography and Etymology
- ..
I.
Prosthesis is the prefixing of one or more letters to a word ;
as, for ^(> Epenthesis is

'
for
the insertion of one or more letters in the middle of a word ;
as, for •
for Paragoge is the
addition of one or
for • ^ more
for
letters to
.
the end of a word ; as,
'
Aphceresis is the taking of one or more
beginning of a word
end of a word
•.
•
as,
;
for
Syncope is taking from the middle of a word
as,
for
;
, for
Apucope
•
•
is
for
letters
;
3,
^
as,
from the
;;).
for
taking from the

from
for
. .^
Tmesis is the separation of the parts of a compound word
by the insertion of another as, cino
nOQQot'
for
Metathesis is the transposition of letters
for
for •
from
tithesis is the putting of one letter for another; as,
for
as,
An-
for
;
&^ -. ;
SyncBresis is the contraction of two syllables into one, with-

.
.
out a change of letters; as, for
different words, either by dropping vowels

or by contracting them as, for
as,
Crasis is the
contraction of two syllables into one, with a change of vowels;
as, for Syjialoepha is the uniting of syllables in
for
;
ov ;
•
•
'.
for
for . DicBresis divides one syllable into two ; as,
II. Figures which relate to Syntax.

is when one or more words are wanting to com-
Ellipsis
plete the sense. The following, with what have been else-
where given, are some of the principal examples of this figure;
, ,. ,&^, , ,
but its limits are far from being accurately defined, some al-
lowing it a wider field than others, and indeed than seems to
belong to it.
,
Ellipsis of substantives. ]
//,) Thucyd. ^,
(sc.
,) or
,
*/tj ;
(sc. or Plato; -^^, (sc.

or ,) ^Hom. ^
; (sc. &^,) Thucyd. ;

Trj
tcTBQuLri, (sc. ^^]],) Herodot. ;

204
,,,
^^
(sc. y.aiqco,')^
-
Thucyd.
GRAMMATICAL
; uye 7]
FIGURES'.
' XomiiU
•'
,
^)•!]^
\,•^^
yac,)
Xen.;
,
Luke
^^ ,'^
,
Demosth.
(sc.
xii.
(5',) Xen.
47,
;
48
iv
; ngbg
;
Kvqov (sc.
(sc.
, (sc.
'/'/,) Plato;
(sc.
ep
, ,))^,
,'^
(sc. , ,^ (sc.
JEiSchm.
{», or
(sc.
;
^,) Herodot.
Thucyd.
;
(sc. Andoc.
, ^ > ,) , -
,) Plato
^
Ellipsis of verbs, (sc.
-^ ;
,
(sc. •
, ,
-,
(sc.
-,) ,
Plato; ri^v •
,,
(for ffra Aristoph.
,
;
]
) ,)
// (for ««i
Lucian ; ft (for
,
(i. e.
(i. e.
, ,^,
/
or the like,
Hom.
,),),) ,
(for
must be supplied before
In some cases, however, instead of

Xen. ;
Horn.
Plato
ft
;
Horn.
;
,
el
/ ,
Frequently
. Thus,
)
,
being supplied, is rendered otherwise, alioqui ; as,
,
you will be blnmed, Xen,
The participle
(sc. ,) Lucian;
,
'
•
is sometimes omitted; as, nov
(sc.
,
do not do this; otherwise,
,) Id.
^
, ^,
or
An
(i. e.
ellipsis wof the
, ,)
•
as,
adverb
Hom. ;
)
& ,
often takes place before ^
, ,
Asyndeton
, , ^,
Id.
is the omission of conjunctions vv^here they are

,,-
,,) .^
usually inserted; as, uv
Demosth, ;
)-
tyovvTO, Xen.
Synesis is when the construction is referred, not to the gen-
)
der or number of the word, but to the sense as,
Zeugma is when two or more substantives have

"^',
;
Thucyd.
a verb in
. ,
common, which is applicable only to one of them
' (sc. (,, yEschyl. Prom. 21.
; as,
;
'
Pleonasm is the use of more words than are necessary to
express the sense
Soph.
Lucian.
;
^& ;
GRAMMATICAL FIGURES.
as,
^
Polysyndeton is the use of conjunctions where they are not

grammatically necessary; as,
iv^î'
Horn.
&^; ^ ^
; ,-^
vvi'
Horn. ; }.
(^
205
^y
*^^
*'
Horn.
Xen. '^ ; \4((1
as if there
(for '( '// ;,)
'
Ilendiddys is the expression of that which
were two; as,
Thucyd.
€: ^ is in reality one,
xul
, ^)
Periphrasis, or circumlocution, is the ".ca oi stvêral words to
express one thing 2.)^
',
,
as, ; (for ^schyl. ;
?,)
/^«<
^schyi,
f'^y", (for ^,) Herodot.
\-1yuim'^ (for
;
" ,^ Horn.
(for
], ,
; I'ffc,
Pind. 3( ; Hom. (for

but with the collateral idea oi^ strength or power.)
Hypcrhaton is the transgression of the common order or
arrangement of words as, (for u ; ]&,) ^^ •,
Thucyd.
((,
word last which should be first ?i.s, ^^. ,
Anastrophe is the inversion of words, or the placing of that
^ , ^^
,
(for ;
Plato; (for Hom. ;
Soph.
' , ' ,)
Hysteronproteron
to the sense, should be first; as,
(for
Hyp(illas;e
is Avhen that
when two words mutually exchange

is
Hom.
put last,
'/.,
which, according
^,
their re-
',)
'
is
spective cases ; as, vff^', (for Soph.
<( ',^,)
Synchysis is a confused arrangement of words, by which
the sense is obscured; as,
(for
"
'/
Pausan.
Anacoluthon takes place, when the
does not agree in syntax with the former
•,) ^ '-;, the

,
Syracusans were surprised ichen
(for ,
latter part
;
or
as,
ot
of a sentence
they
)
~saw,
\4, \4 ^)
Thucyd.
i/if/, or
;
oJuai,
hut the Assyrian, who
possessed is
,
(for
of Babylon and the rest of Assyria, I think will bring not less
than twenty thousand horse, Xen.
18
PROSODY.
QUANTITY.
The quantity of a syllable is the space of time taken up in
pronouncing it.
Syllables, with respect to their quantity, are either long or

short.
A long
a short one
Some
syllable in
; as,
syllables
.
sometimes short; as the second syllable
are
pronouncing requires double the time of
common ; that is,
in
sometimes long, and
-^.
A
vowel is said to be long or short by nature, which is
always so by custom, or by the use of the poets thus and ;
are always long, and always short.
,
to
^,
some
The
i, and
syllables,
, are called doubtful, because they are long in
short in others, and common in others ; as,
qr^yXiOg, "vdojo or
rules of quantity
syllables long by nature or by position
""vdojg.
may be
to the doubtful
divided into those which apply
;
vowels in the ..first and middle syllables, 1. before vowels or

diphthongs, 2. before single consonants and to the doubtful ;
vowels in final syllables.
SYLLABLES LONG BY NATURE.

Circumflexed syllables, diphthongs, and single
I.
vowels produced by contraction, as well as ty and ,

are long by nature ; as,
?., ',
ceya-duj for
oaSiog,
tuu.
for , , ^' 0(pTg for for
Exc. A long vowel or a diphthong is generally shortened

at theend of a word, and sometimes at the beginning, before
another vowel or diphthong as,
'
>;'
ivi ») 6
;
iv ^
(&, ^,
Hom.
Id.
QUANTITY. 207
a consonant as, ft' J* xer oiy.ud-'

; (/('/>;» ig '' /. .^ ,
Obs. Sometimes also a long vowel or a diphthong is shortened before
Horn.
But such readings are generally thought to be false, and others have been
substituted for them; thus, di
SYLLABLES LONG BY POSITION.

II.
long by position
,
A syllable in which a short or common vowel
precedes two consonants, or a double consonant,
as, ;
.(}. , , Hom.
is
^', ,
Exc. 1. A short vowel before a mute and a liquid, or before
^ Ttx, y.T, the last even with q following, is common
-^
as, ;
Â7.xiit]vri, &;
short vowel before a middle
•
, and before a smooth

mute followed by
Hesiod.
Phocyl.
or rough mute followed by any liquid, generally continues short in the

comic writers.
as,
Ashort vowel before a mwZrf/e mute followed
made long both in the comic and tragic writers.
^ '^,
Exc. 2. A final short vowel sometimes remains short before
a Avord beginning with a double consonant or two single ones
Hom.
by a word beginning with a consonant ; as,

Arat. But such passages are differently read;
Qcjvt], being used adverbially.
;
Also a short vowel sometimes continues short before a

, by
thus,
, «, r,
Id.
final
is generally
,
followed
-
;
Obs. 1. A short vowel is often made long before a single

^,^
consonant,
Horn.;
particularly before
liuoautyog, Id. ;
a liquid
iTieidrj^
;
Id.;
as,
aiolop . Id.
^:,
Ohs. 2.
digammated vowel
(for
A
/',)
short syllable
; as,
Id. ;
; &, is sometimes made long
ol, (for io<,) Hom. ;
(for /'^^»',) Id.

before a
Obs. 3. When three short syllables come together, one of

them must be made long
measure
Sog,
as, aitafuTog,
Hom.
; ;, ^^
in heroic verse for the sake of
' -
THE DOUBTFUL VOWELS IN THE FIRST AND
MIDDLE SYLLABLES.
1. Before Vowels and Diphthongs.
III. A doubtful vowel before another vowel or a
diphthong is generallj^ short.
208 PROSOBT,
Exceptions.
A is long in
1.
2.
Words \\here it is used in Doric for
The oblique cases of yootuc, vuv;^
as,
for luug.
for
;
•
,
3. The vEolic genitives in «o and oiotv as, yiirelao^ • -^.
The second and third persons singrilar present indicative
.
4.
''
Ionic of verbs in «, if the preceding syllable be long ; as,
but otherwise it is short; as,
5. The present and imperfect of verbs in aoi^ when the di-
^.
6. Nouns in
OTtucov^ aoroz •
, ';
gamnia is supposed to be inserted as, J^«oi or
•,
whether they increase short or long as,
•
Except and a few
;
others.
. .
8.
7. Most feminine proper names
masculines are short
^ '^-, :, noxious,
, , '^ , , ^^
tives and compounds, as, au,
and several other compounds of «t»,
; as,
, ,,,,
asr'oc
, ,
, ', ,
,
or
in u^g •
ai^Q,
as, Qaig,
with
&c.,
its
^, ?.
But
deriva-
,
), ,
,
and other compounds of
and
of
, ^,
, , '^ its
«f/oui,
(fiUQUog,
derivatives, as, &c., ruoc,
,
with other compounds of ?;oo« the perfect middle
good,
KvTciixbc,
A
and other compounds of ^
, ?.:,
§, -^
XQvauwQ.
^,
', and
'', ?..
for
is common
and «, , », in
gen. of uij, '^
^
cioo or Icon,
•*
I is long in
1. Nouns in io)y increasing short as, '^ oro;
., ,, ,
•
;
ovo;. KqopIdiv and ^Slgloii' are common.
,
2. Comparatives in io»?', but in the Attic dialect only as,
,
;
,, ,
3.
,
compounds,
Ja/TiToc,,
are short),
,
/, ,
-dnJu'i,
as,
>:<,
of Chios,
Tunikioc,
&c. (but Tor, a
^', ^', ',

Chian,
J
?,
is
(but
common
violet,
Toe,
Chios,
in
an arrotc, poison with
and its compounds, as,
is short).
,
^^-,
its
u (fToc^
9ôy
Nouns and
1.
2. Verbs
in la
in lo) •
as, . .
as, y.oylu.
, - ^^^^
,
3. The improper reduplication of verbs in • as,
', ,
4. artULou anuoog, »;, or -dniov, ict'iro), il^, an adverb
of exclamation, ^, or
QUANTITY. 209
,,
nvixia,
ytQUvSûov, ttXvog or
'vtrog, ^^, ,, ,^, ,
is long in
', '. ^(^

is common in
^,
1. Most verbs in as,
,,
•
2.
3. , , ',
The oblique cases of
^•.
some nouns in vc, vog •
as,
2. Before Single Consonants.
IV. A doubtful vowel before a single consonant

is short.
Exceptions.
, 1. ^ , .^ ^^
Nouns
derived from verbs in
in ,, (^
«
is long in
pure and
«, «??,
^
quoj •
as, Sêuaa, ogaaigy
^;, »,
, ,
î/OarTjc^
,
, , ., ,
,
2.
, -^
Tiie oblique cases of masculines in av -uvog •
as,
,
-, ,
Tuavog
,
Also of Kug^ V^«?,
•
, (,
'5,
,
^^
^,
, , ,"^
^ 3.
and some
",
^,^,,
Gentiles and proper
, ^,
- •
as,
others, as also
and
•
all others in «I pure.
names
Except the gentiles

in avog, and gentiles in
. ^ , , ,,-
'
likewise the proper names and several more,
.
with all those in as also and a
few others.
4. Nouns in • as,
5. Numerals in with
•
as, •
8•.
6.
singular
, 7. , ,
»
.
The
The,, , is
third person
long by position as,

first future in
of verbs
plural in
as,
Likewise the dative plural of nouns whose dative
;
first aorist in
;
and perfect in
((.
8.
9.
.
of verbs in
The feminine in
Words which have
18*
pure and
of participles
« Doric for
•
as,
•
;
as,
),
as,
for .
210 PROSODY.
)^
^, ^,
'
. ', ', ,
.,,, , ^,
^,,-^,
to break,
is
and
,
also long in the following words, before
its derivatives, with those of to lead, aS^
In
, -, , ,
yiT»;c,
.^,
is common.
,
&C.,
^,
fCQU-
,
^ •
to satiate, xqsudiov,
, , ,•
'
, ,
, ^., , ,,,
, , Kqa&ig,
,,,,, ,.,
, for uminlling, -^}, -dâxog, -^-
',,^.,
'^,
'
to collect,
&^ ?., ICOod,
,
.
'Eqvu-
, ,
, ,
^
But is
common in .', as also in
,
, ,,
.
,,,^,, ,
^,,,
•
^ \,
^,
'^, ^^,
, ,,. ^
, ' , -, -^,
' or beautiful^
', ?.., ^, or JTiQ-
, ,,, , ^
common
,
'
is
.
in the nominative singular, but long in the oblique cases : Likewise
,
-9-
^^,
,
is long in Homer, but short in the Attic writers.
' ',
, , , ,,
'^^,
is common.
,
,,, , ^,,
^,
],
, ,.
•
, , ', ',
,
.',^,
'\], }\],
breakfast,
agreeable,
^'
'-
-
,
,Ja.o,
,
/Toc,
^,
mon
, ,
,
,
'., ', , &, ,
:
,' , ' , .
,,, Jaoic,
prayer, imprecation, or
The following
,^'^.
^'^.,",
are com-
,, ,..
•
31,
, , , ,"^^
, ^,
,• .,
• ,Dor. for ', -^', '^
or /^~
for
for
in
1.
2.
Nouns
The
-i&oZj
in derived from verbs in lo) as,
and in iv or-^
,
is
^
oblique cases of monosyllables, of nouns in
ig
long in
•
as,
•
Qlxp, •
it. -lyog^
• ogyig, oqpTOôg
',
•
, dnXcplv and •
Except
j^lg,
3.
aiplg, ,
The
•
y.ijxlg,
•
oblique cases of the following nouns in

xijllg, xh/'lg, , ^,• Tic, rii'oc.
^?, ^.
ig -idog •
,- ^
^ ^^^ ,,
^ ^ ^ -,
,
Quantity.
^:, );,
311
^ ^ . y.uvovl;,
âqaflg^ ' Also of those
^, ^,
ill
t|
The
^
', ;^ ^ ^
4.
^^
^
^
, ^
^
'
Nouns
',
oblique cases of
/'/^^ '/,
in tJ'?/, ivof^
vbSqU,
tvo; •
as,
are common.
•
^ :, ^ ^ -
Except ^ XQti'or, XXrov^
squalidness,
'' ;^ sometimes
-^
;,
,^ ,:, ^^ ^ -
' ;,',
Except also adjectives of matter, time, and some
*
others ; as, '?/, Xtof S-egX^dg^ •

', •
ti'r), '
but a few of those denoting time are sometimes
long ; as, Xt'of, sometimes ', ^'.
-,,-
?*;,
, .
5. Nouns in <t?/c, trig' as,
QiTtg •
Except and their compounds.
6. Diminutives in from genitives whose last syllable is
, , ,/
pure as,
^5, )^
; ,
7. Verbs in tyw, id-ai, •

as,
-), ), •
Except and -), which are
long in Homer, but short in the Attic writers,
,. , , The
,
8. first future in and first aorist in of verbs in
(
,
,., ,
•
. ,
%\ , , , ,
,
jB •
as,
, ^,;,"^
,
),
I is also long in the following words, before
^,
, ,,, ,, -,,,. ,-
•
}, //,"
?.,
^. ^, ,», ,,
//
.' These
05, ",
•
^?.\
common --
?.',
-^,
- TiTSaz, iSa,
&, ^, and -9'•,

are or
^, -9-,
:
^,-9}^, ^, /9o(\9-oc, 'fQTdôg, T^r'w,
/, ,
from others
, ,
^
,
many
/.,
,, .
. ', '',',
,
•
compounds
', ,,',
other
;, <,
common.
of /;<»/,
with
, ,, -
A ', ',
In
', , ?., is
",
),, ,:^^ ?.,
^, ?.,
?.(0), ?.,
-, ,'/., "?.,?.. or aiuAoc,

T?.vbCf
niSlXov,
., ,
nuT/.yj,
";, ', ',

/.oc, /'Tijc,
?.(, '/.,
oifi'c,
,,
,
, , ,,,
, ,
,
, ,
, ,,
'^/,
•
3,
}^,
,
is
uru/oc,
common.
1'(-9,
', ),
and many more of the same beginning with
3n?.7jTog, OT?.tvg,
,
'•
this last.
But is common
2153
,' ,
,,',,,',
,
, ,
,
, , ?., ,
'., ,
,
^,
axQo&Tviov,
PROSODY.
?., 0 i^Troc, -^,
31,
II
,
others in
"
,
;,
' ,
(, • .
xauTvtvTi^Q,
,^/?,,, ,, , ',^, ^^,

'^?
,
^,
for
6!^, '^,
(^, '^
].
»;(,
?.i'qog,
~
'SixTvaQog.
,,
KuuuqTvu,
mousetrap,
or
is common.
~Iqi9, ~lQog, KauTqog, NTQtvg,
and
, '^,,,.,,2, . , 7;,
*OaTqig, uT(Jaug, TTqvv&og, Tlqvvg.
' /oc, Laog, nioog,
',
, ,
'^1 SQTavg, "Iauv§Qog,
, , ,,,, ,
', ,
JViaa, Niaog, NlovQog, These are com-
,
'
',
mon
•
', ,'^,
', ,
•,
iaog or
_,
:
' , ,
u8i[qTtoc,
^^
,
simple, mean,
"•,
?, , /?.
, 7], ', ,,, -
,,., , , , .
', •
Siiftjcio, i<fi,
with
and
many others beginning with
are common.
are common.
2(},
'
, .,^ ,, .
is long in
1. Nouns ^ ^ ^),^, )^
, , , ^,
in derived
from verbs in
^^
particularly of derivatives from verbs
•
as,
But there are some exceptions,
which shorten the penul-
^^, ^ ^. ^ ^ , ,
tima of the perfect passive ; as, -d-viriQ^
2. The oblique cases of nouns in vi^ or vg -wog •

as,
and Also of
^, -, is common.
3. Diminutives in
pure as, ^-^ --^
, ,
, ^. from genitives whose
^
last syllable
.
is ;
4. Verbs in •
as, 1&)•^ «^
, ,
, , ,^
5. The first future in and first aorist in of verbs in
), But with some exceptions as,
, ><
vo) •
as, • ;
6. The first and third singular and third plural present

active of polysyllables in •
as, and in •
\
dissyllables throughout.
,,
is also long in the following words, before
- '.
• ^, SovYavuto, ;, .}^, 6?.>,
^) /, , ' ^-, ] ,, , ., , QUANTITY. 213
,
IS
common.
. ',
/'^,
^•
^, , , , ', , - iQtxddl^g,
^,^, •9
-^,-9,
In
&. -9, ^, -9, --^,

is common.
-9,
,, , ,,,, , ^
•
tQUxurw and xr^qvxtvta,

(.
,, ,., ,
long in
, ,,,,,
GaufiOxi], is
,,,,,
Dionys. Perieg. 855., but elsewhere it is always short.
A •
?., &?.,
',
-
'),
^4, ^-,
",,
"'
^
], //, /.^
',
,,
, ,
"»;,
8•,^,
.
,
, ^,
', , ^.], , ,, , -
,
-^, -^,
', •3,
'
',
, ctTQUuwv,
?.), ^, nooSZui
d^duaQiw,
, 7],
, ,
In the penultima
,
is
&,, , ,
common.
iV*
, ,
,,, ,,
jroQTOvlg,
common
•
,-9,
,
,, ,
. . ^,&,
:
^^, --,
Dor. for
Jixrdva,
,
},
^, |», tpqvvog,
These are
>),
, }^, ,,
, , ,
, , ,
'Fvnaior.
'
, , ,, , ,
,
, , ,
, ,
round, curved,
?.,
,
, ,
:, ,
', ,
,
,. ;
circle,
,
', ,
, , , hammer,
,,
^,,,
,
common.
,, ,
^, , , ,,, ,
,, ,,-
But and are
,
.2"
',
•
, "^,, , . ,
(-
,
tooc,
,,,,,.
•
, , ',,, , • /;,
^;,
^, ,.
the reins, a bridle, our»,,
,• , , , , ,*,,
,
- , , , , , 6, and
214 PROSODY.
THE DOUBTFUL VOWELS IN FINAL SYLLABLES.
V. The doubtful vowels in the end of a word

are short.
Exceptions,
A is long in
&, ,
&,»,, (, , . &, ^^
. -
Nouns
-, '
\. in ^«, qa, e«, la, oa^ and polysyllables in «<« •
as,
.^ -^, with
, , ^,&,.^. ^
•
and the adverbs But the

following are short: verbals in jqiu, as some proper
, ^,
names of more than two syllables in «<«, as,
and nouns in preceded by a diphthong, a long v, or
with
as,
except
,
,, .
2.
3.
in og
4.
'
Duals of the first declension as,
Feminine adjectives in « pure and
as,
Nouns in
Except
•
;
if of two syUables, or from verbs in

, ,,,
from masculines
. '
.
as,
5.
6.
7.
^^, from
Accusatives in from nouns in
Vocatives from proper names in ag

Words in « Doric for »/ or as,
as,
'
firom
/^, .^
•
as,
for ^,
for •
But those in a Êolic are short ; as,
Hom.
,,.
1. The
I is
demonstrative additions of the Attics

long in
; as, ,
2. The names of letters ; as, |r, • with .
is long in
1.
2.
The imperfect and second
The names of letters as, ; ,
aorist of verbs in
•
with •
is
• as,
common.
.
VI.
are short.
, aQ, IV, , vv, , in the end of a word,
Exceptions.
Av
1, Masculines
pounds are short,
in av
as, . as,
is long in
Tnav > with ^ whose com-
QUANTiTY. 215
,.^ ^
2. Accusatives of the first declension, whose nominatives
are long ; as, Jllvelav^
3. The adverbs nioav.
Aq long in
is
KoLQ and ûq "/«» is common.

•
1.
2.
3.
Nouns
Words of two
in iv -ivo; •
Iv is
as, ^'//'^'.
terminations; as, delcfTv and
and '^^, when circumflexed.
long in
.
/
^,
is long in
1
2.
3.
Monosyllables as, xic but
Words of two terminations;
Nouns in increasing long;
;
•
as,
as,
;--^
is short.
and »'.
1.
2.
Nouns
Words
in w -wo;
of two terminations as, and
•
is
as, , • .. long in
3. Accusatives in vr from long nominatives in v; •

as,
4. The imperfect and second aorist of verbs in
idelxrvy with ,
but ^»' enclitic is short.
•
as,
is long in
1.Monosyllables as, with
2. Words of two terminations as,
;
and
; •
;
;. ;.
^
3. Nouns accented on the last syllable, and declined in og
pure as, O-v;
; But some of them are common, as i/O-ig.
•
4. The second person singular, as also participles, of verbs

in via •
as, df-ixi'vc.
VII. and vo final are long.
Exceptions.
1.
ttvxoz
Nouns
'
increasing; as,
as, TUhl:, Hlaz.
is
'
short in
except those in and
2. Accusatives plural of the third declension as, Tuavu;

'^
•
;
Likewise of the first in Doric as, li/rri; Theocr. ;
3. Second persons singular of the first aorist active, and of

the perfect active and middle
4. Adverbs in «;, as, :.
as, srvifiug Ttn-gra;, Ttrvrtag. ;
H VI 1 1 The last syllable of e\erj verse is
common.
5^16 PROSODY.
THE QUANTITY OF DERIVATIVE AND COM-

POUND WORDS.
I. Derivatives.
IX.
tives; as,
^
'
fxori'OJ',
"?/!', from
from
^ , ^
Derivatives follow the quantity of their primi-
, . , ^ ^,
, ,
-aat, -rat •
from
from
xqTvo)
•
•
), from
the second aorist of
Exc. 1. In verbs of the fourth conjugation, the
lengthens the short penultima of the first future as,
In verbs of the first and second conjugation, the penultima

; .
first aorist
as, ,
of the perfect is short, if the vowel in the penultima of the
from .
first future be long merely on account of the y^ or I following
In some verbs also of the third conju-
gation, the long vowel in the penultima of the first future is
shortened in the perfect passive as, from ; ).
;
Exc. 2. In some verbs which are long in the penultima of
^),
^&^
, ^ •
the present, the perfect middle lengthens the short penultima
^ ,
of the second aorist active
^ ^
^ )^ ),
), ^,
as, ot; w, to break, eayoi•, tayu
•
;
•
-,
•
,,.
.'
Obs.
'^
'
short doubiful
augmented tenses
vowel
•
at the beginning of a verb

"-^ "ixuvor.
'
becomes long in the ; as,
2. Compounds.
-
)
X. Compounds follow the quantity of the simple
^ ';
; ^;^ ,
words which compose them as,
frbm
from
'
;
from //
the second aorist of
•
).
from , •
, );, ;
-
from the perfect middle
,
Oh.•^. The inseparable particles « privative, , ^, fof,
.
are short ; as, •
Unless « be made
^;
long for the sake of measure before two short syllables as,
or before a consonant which may be supposed to
•
have been doubled in pronunciation as, as '\ ; :^

;
VERSE. 217
VERSE.
A verse is a certain number of long and short syllables dis-
posed according to rule.
Verses are divided into parts of two, three, or four syllables,

called feet^ of which the following are the most common.
The Spondee, consisting of two long as,
Trochee^ a long and a short as,
;
..:.
.
;
Iambus, a short and a long as, ;
Pyrrhic, two short as, loyoz. ;
When
Dactyle,
Anapest,
Tribrachys,
a single
a long and two short as,
two short and a long; as,
three short
syllable
as,
is taken by
; . -.
itself, it
;
is called a
ccESUra, which is commonly a long syllable.
SCANNING.
The measuring of verse, or the resolving of it into the several
feet of which it is composed, is called scanning.
When a verse has just the number of feet requisite, it
is called versus
acatalectus, or acntalecticus, an acatalectic verse If a syllable be want- :
ing, it is called catalecticus ; if a foot, brachycatalecticus : If there be a

syllable or foot too much, hyper catalecticus, or hypermeter.
'
Frequently two vowels meeting together in different syllables
, ^ /,
/)
are pronounced in scanning as one syllable, which is called
'^/<A7joc, Hom. ;
synizesis, or synecphonesis ; as,
',
XQvaeov
,
as five
and 'r\ ,
Hom.
syllables ;
as a monosyllable
DIFFERENT KINDS OF VERSE.

Id. ;
In these examples,
as
:
also
thus, ,.
t'j
Soph.
pronounced
is
as two syllables
;
I. Hexameter.
The hexameter or heroic verse consists of six feet. Of
these the fifth is a dactyle, and the sixth a spondee ; all the
may be either dactyles or spondees
-
rest ; as,
— vyv/| — — |— vyv^l — — —
'- -- I
\^ yj — —
xtt-uit'ui, Hom.
A
verse
spondee
"
is
— —
is
called spondaic
|—
-
often admitted in the
19
vyvy|—
; as,
\J
-' -)•,
'^\'~ ^^
fifth
""""
place,
—
Hom.
whence the
218 PROSODY.
What deserves particular attention in scanning hexameter

verse is the ccEsura.
Csesura Avhen after a foot is completed, there remains a
is
syllable in a to begin a new foot.

word It is called triemimerisy
penthemimeris, hephtJiemimeris, or enneemimei'is, according as
it falls on the third, fifth, seventh, or ninth half-foot of the
--
hexameter verse in which it is found. All these different
--
species of it sometimes occur in the same verse as, ;
— — — — —
vy \j \j \ \j\J vy y>
-, Hom.
But the most common and beautiful csesura is the pen-
themim on which some lay a
; particular accent or stress of
the voice in reading a hexameter verse thus composed, whence
When
^
they call it the ccBsural pause ; as,
the caesura
9"-,
falls on a
''^^
syllable naturally short,
Hom.
it ren-
ders it long ;
''
as,
^^ Hom.
II. Pentameter.
The pentameter verse consists of five feet. Of these the
two first are either dactyles or spondees the third, always a ;
— III
spondee and the fourth and fifth, anapests
'^ - --
;
^- &, vy
as,
Vy
'
I
— — — — K> KJ~ \ \J \j
;
—
Solon.
But this verse is more properly divided into two hemistichs
or halves the former of which consists of two feet, either
;
dactyles or spondees, and a caesura ; the latter, always of two

dactyles and another csesura thus,
- )^-
;
— vj w — "~
I I
— '-'^
ijili-og
"
-,— vy vy
III. Iambic.
The iambic, trochaic, and anapestic verse, is measured by

metres or pairs of feet, and is therefore called dimeter when
consisting of four feet, and trimeter when consisting of six feet.
On the other hand, the Latin names quaternarius and senarius
refer to the number of fact.
The iambic verse, which is most usually trimeter acatalectic,
consisted originally of iambic feet only, but afterwards ad-
VERSE. 219
mitted a tribrachys, spondee, dactyle, or anapest, in the odd

places, thatis, in the first, third, and fifth and a tribrachys, ;
or sometimes an anapest, in the even places, that is, in the

second and fourth, for the last foot must always be an iambus ;
thus,
-
oda - - -^ --
-I . -ji-
-J
. -11 .
-dâvtlv ^ Soph.
The
' 7] - '-^
TTUQucpQO-velg
" / /
tetrameter catalectic is also very common in the comic

^ ] Aristoph.
and admits nearly the same variations as the senarius
-
writers, ;
' --
thus,
-_
,
. - I
--1I -
anevaoi-uev,
-I - -lU-
-^ I-
Aristoph.
IV, Trochaic.
The most common trochaic verse is the tetrameter catalec-
tic,consisting of seven trochees and a syllable, but admitting
-
a tribrachys in the first, third, fifth, and seventh places and ;
a tribrachys, spondee, or anapest, in the second, fourth, and

sixth as, ;
-^
o"EL•
-^ ;
fV Tf xul Aristoph.
— — — — — —
*" 1^ »^ \j\\ \j\
II
\j v^
II
5-» -' \j \
; Eurip.
dactyle of proper names is admitted in the first, second,
third, fifth, and sixth places.
V. Anapestic.
The anapestic verse properly consists of anapests only, but
admits a dactyle or spondee in all the places, though an ana-
pest rarely follows a dactyle, on account of the concurrence of
short syllables which would be thereby produced.
The most common
The
' is
dimeter catalectic, called a paroemiac, of which the

the dimeter acatalectic
-&^
;
Soph.
as,
third foot must be an anapest, closes a series of anapestic
) —&
verses ; as.
\j \j — —
5' inaxov~aor, Soph.
220 PROSODY.
The mononieter acatalectic, called a base, for the most part

precedes the paroemiac as, ;
\j \j
yuQ
— ——I
^
The
" " 7
y.u^âg&g
tetrameter catalectic
h -||
-, ^ " -
is also
1
-
Eurip.
frequently used by the

comic writers
OTt - /oeiuf,
; as,
y.ul ^
e-ooojv^
onoS^sv
' -^
-^ Aristoph.
Aristoph.
VI. Anacreontic.
The Anacreontic verse is iambic dimeter catalectic, consist-
- -;, ^
ing of an iambus or spondee, two iambuses, and a syllable ; as,
-: -11- -I
-
-
-vui^ Anacr.
Another kind of Anacreontic verse differs from the above by
having an anapest in the first place as, ;
&' -, Anacr.
But this last"* verse is also divided into a pyrrhic, two tro-
chees, and a spondee
-- .
vj
;
w[
thus,
— yj\ —
Sapphic and Adonian.

''
— — —
VII.
The Sapphic verse consists of five feet, a trochee, a spondee
or a trochee, a dactyle, and two trochees ; as,
•-(( •; -; --^ Sappho.

An Adonian verse consists only of a dactyle and a spondee
as,
— —
\
—
-^
%j\
Sappho. ^
ACCENTS. 221
ACCENTS.
There are three accents, tne acute ('), the
I.
grave ('), and the circumflex ("), one of which must

stand on some syllable of every word.
Exc. The ten words
),
o, ->], ol^ ui, d, fL-, iv, (or ), (
or ;, called atonies, have no accent Unless they stand
at the end of a sentence, or after a woxa to which they are
naturally prefixed as, yuo ov ; S-eug
unless they precede an enclitic
;
;
or
as, ft' ;.
:
, ^ •
Obs. An
enclitic is a word which throws its accent on the
last syllable of the preceding word, in which case alone can
word have more than one accent as, at'S-Qomog, but ^-
â
.
;
II. The
acute stands on one of the three last
syllables grave, on the last only
; the and the ;
circumflex on one of the two last.

Ohs. 1. The acute on final syllables is changed into the
grave, when other words follow in connection, and in no other
case is the grave expressed ,but when such final syllables are
;
Obs.
as,
2.
^ ' &.
followed by an enclitic, or by any stop besides the comma
(and, according to some, even by the comma), they retain the
acute;
Words acuted on the last syllable are called by the
.
Greek grammarians oxytona; on the penultima, j;«ro3:3/id?ia
and on the antepenultima, proparoxyiona; as, ^fo,, t£7w//,u£ioc,
,
Those circumflexed on the last syllable are called
;
perispomena ; and on the penultima, propcrispomena ; as,

amtu. All words which have no accent expressed on the
last syllable are called barytona ; as,
and hence the barytona comprehend the paroxytona, pro-
xftaua- ,,
paroxytona, and propcrispomena.
of
III.
Obs.
itself,
acute and the grave stand on long and
short syllables
The
the circumflex only on syllables long
by nature as, dtvreqoQ,;
;
Hence it appears that the « in

and not merely by position, as in
, ,. ].
(-,
^, is long
19*
222 ACCENTS.
IV. The acute can stand on the antepenultima,
avOQdonov •
,
and the circumflex on the penultima, only when the
last syllable is short by nature
],
as, avUQomog, but
but
;
, ^
Exc. The 0) in the Ionic genitive in
sion, and in the Attic terminations ojc,
of the first declen-
of the second and
third declensions, as also in the compounds of
', ^ );.
£0)
c-;r,
fowc, and '?,
^ .,
'>«?, admits an acute on the antepenultima as, ;
no).eo)g from
Obs. The terminations «t and ot are considered as short in

accentuation
tives ; as, ^^ .^
as,
distinguish it from
;
jEivcfOL
upd-Qomoi,
and the adverb
houses.
•
Except opta-
at hoine, to
V. If the last syllable be short by nature, and the

penultima long by nature and accented, the accent
must be the circumflex as,
,^
; ij)vxoq.],
Obs. 1. This rule shows that the last syllable is short by
nature in and others increasing short, and long
,
by nature in )•^
''^^Q^^, and the like.
Obs. 2. This rule does not apply to those cases where an

enclitic forms a part of the
made long by
word
synaloepha;
as, o{!rf
as,
;
nor,
according to the best critics, to those where a short syllable is
for aul
, ,
.
•
VI. Oxytons of the

first and second declension cir-
,
cumflex
as, S.
the last
.
,
,,,,,
syllable
), ,, ,
of the genitives and datives
:], ']» D.
Exc. Attic oxytons of the second

acute in the genitive singular as, ; ^. declension retain the
VII. Nouns of the first declension always cir-
cases ; as, , ,, .
cumflex the last syllable of the genitive plural,
whatever be the place of the accent in the other
•
Likewise ^, ^ ^,
Exc. The feminine of baryton adjectives in og accents the
penultima of the genitive plural; as, ^.
ayla^
^^.
•
ACCENTS. 233
VIII. Monosyllables of the third declension ac-
, .
cent the last syllable of the genitives and datives,
and the penultinia of the other cases as, S. xelq,
Ezc.
{)1,
Xei()Cov, xtQoi,
Participles
{),
D. ;<t^>e, xtLQOlv, P.
and interrogative are accented on the

;
,
penultinia in the genitives and datives, as well as in the other
cases; as, ^,êVroc,
,^Îhf, bfiog.
•
Likewise dug, ,
S-(hg, y.Qug, lug, nalg,
genitive plural
in the genitive
;
?,
a pustule, (fibg, light, in the
olg in the genitive dual and plural
and dative, dual and plural
and nag
; as, ,.;
IX. and polysyllable nouns of the

Dissyllable
, ' ^, ^,
third declension retain the accent throughout upon
the syllable on which it stands in the nominative,
when not prevented by the nature of the final syl-
^. ^^^, , ^-, ,
lable;
Ezc. 1.
as,
are accented on
but
^,
the penultima in all the cases and numbers, except the three
first in the vocative singular
yuTsqa.
as, d^vyaziqog,; -d-v-
, , , , .' ,^, , ],\4, ^, ^,

Etc. 2. The following nouns throw the accent back as far
as possible in the vocative singular, in which the last syllable
of the nominative is shortened : "',
-,
,
^
proper names in rjg, and some other words as, aveg,
.
^'^,
;
Likewise yvvrj
,
makes
Obs.
, ,,.Nouns which suffer syncope conform in some measure
- xwog, •
to the analogy of monosyllables; as,
7«, 7ag' as does also as,
«
. ^,
But the dative accents the penultima; as,
plural in
In the syncopated cases of the accent is thrown
vocative; as,
page 26.)
-, -,
upon the antepenultima of the nominative, accusative, and
S^vug, &vuug. (See
X. A contracted syllable is circumflexed, when

the former of the two syllables from which it re-
^4
suits
fore
(piXti
;
•
is
as, ,
,, ^
acuted ;
(^
otherwise
•
Exc. 1. In words compounded with nouns in oog,

ACCENTiS.
the
it remains as
(fiXoiOL•'
it
but
^ ^,
,
was oe-
,
contracted syllable is not circumflexed as,
uvovg.
from
So ad-qoog makes ui^govg. Also the accusative
;
of feminine contracts in oj and

tains the acute as,
Exc. 2, Adjectives in
; ^. foc,
,
of the third declension re-
having anacute on the ante-

penultima, circumflex the last syllable contraction
after as, ;
XQvGeog^ -/Qvaovg. Also y.ureov when contracted becomes yarovp.
XI. When prepositions are placed after their

cases,
Exc.
as, ; ntQi, /
or put instead of verbs compounded with
them, they throw back the accent upon the penul-
tima
' for
and retain the accent on the
. last syllable
when placed
the vocative of ^
after their cases, to distinguish
and Jlu, the accusative of Zevg.
them from cipa,
XII. When oxytons lose their final accented
.
tima ; for ,
vowel, the accent is thrown back upon the penul-
as, odv for • ',
Exc.
with the
Prepositions and the conjunction
final vowel as, ûg" //,
;
'. lose the accent
Obs. On the contrary, when verbs lose their initial accented

syllable, the following syllable, if short, receives the acute, if
long by nature, the circumflex, as, , • ^^, ^.
,^, ,
XIII. Compounds in of perfects middle with
nouns, accent the penultima when their significa-
as, (),
tion is active, and the antepenultima when passive ;
that brings forth for the first time ;
the first-born ; feeding the
people; fed by the people,
Obs. If they are compounded with a preposition, they draw
back the accent to the antepenultima ; as, y.malo-ôg.
ACCENTS. 225
,,
,'
/', , , ,
XIV. Nouns compounded with
, throw
.
will
&6,
permit;
In like manner
as, ,
the accent back as far as the last syllable
•
^()6,
*
vntQVUQog
«, ev,
, •
&c. these may be
, ]>.
added the compounds of two nouns ; as, (fildoo-
\, ^
, ;,^ , ,
Exc. Most adjectives in of the third declension, verbals
in , and many other compounds which cannot be reduced to
particular rules, have the accent on the last syllable as, ;
Obs. The accent is likewise on the last syllable of verbals
, . .^ ^, , ,
in to;, adjectives in ixog, diminutives, patronymics, and other
derivative substantives in tc, as also of substantives in from
the perfect passive as, ;
But compounds in draw back the ac-

cent as,
; except those which are derived merely from
•
a compound verb as, Verbals in

; always accent
the penultima as, yfjunxtu^, yâniia, jfjumtoy.
;
XV. Verbs generally throw the accent back as
?
cc, , , ,
far as possible, but those of one or two syllables
,
compounded with
throw the accent upon the preposition
- •
•
^,
prepositions
•
•
for the
•
;
most part
as,
(pevye,
•
,&
ment
,
', ^.
(ptvye.
' '.
Exc.
or
;
1.
as,
The
•
•
temporal augment
•&.
retains the
So a^'vo^' and
accent
Also the syllabic

^-
; as,
auo"-
Exc.
infinitive
The second aorist accents the last syllable of the
2.
and participle active and of the imperative middle, and
the penultima of the infinitive middle; as,
'&.
evQt, i(5f, ,
Also the last syllable of the imperatives
to distinguish them from the second aorist in-
, ',,, &,
dicative But the second person singular only of the imperative
226 ACCENTS.
^ as do also
•
in the second person singular.

^ &^ , ,&),
middle has the accent on the last syllable, the other persons
and numbers throwing it back as far as it will go as,
even
;
Exc. 3. The second future active, the first and second aorist
subjunctive passive, and the subjunctive of verbs in
circumflexed on the last syllable as,
first future active of the fourth conjugation, as,
are
So the
;
which,
, ^,^,
.,
^ ^^ ,
as also the second future, retains the circumflex on the same
syllable through all the modes and participles of the active and
middle voices, where the nature of the final syllable does not
^
prevent; as,
-,
^
through
second
-,
all
&c.
&c.
,,,
aneqeZv,
aorist optative, passive

-^ '^^•&, &c.
The
the persons and
which
accent remains on
is
numbers ; as,
the
likewise the case in the present and

and middle, of verbs in jt/t as,
same syllable
,
&
&, .
^, ^ ^ , &,
Exc. 4. All infinitives in ,,
with those of the first aorist
active and perfect passive, are accented on the penultima ; as,
•
iaiavui,
Except the old or Doric infinitive in •
as,
-, , &^ , , . ,
Exc. 5. All participles in and ctf, as also the participles
active of verbs in ,
are accented on the last syllable, and the
-
^ -
participle perfect passive on the penultima ; as,
Exc. 6. Participles have the accent on the same svllable in
, ^,
the neuter as in the masculine ; as, •
ENCLITICS.
, , ,, ,,
,,
The
indefinite
following are enclitics.
-,
2. The
i, ',
through
verbs
^ ^^The^,
,
all its
and
1.
^ ,, ,, ,
pronouns
cases, as well as toC,

in
with the
the present indica-

for
tive,
7, 7, ,
except in the second person singular.
, 7, tjo&I^ -^ , 3.
which are
The adverbs
distin-
guished only by their enclitic accent from the corresponding
,^ ^
^. ,,,
interrogatives.
or vvv^
4. The conjunctions /t, or
with the inseparable particle
d^v^
as,
,
ACCENTS. ^27
XVI. Enclitics throw their accent as an acute

on the last syllable of the preceding word, if that
word have an acute on the antepenultima, or a
,
circumflex on the penultima; as, {)6 ,
Exc. When the last syllable of the preceding word ends
.
with a double consonant, the enclitic retains its accent ; as,
XVI . Enclitics lose their accent after oxytons,

which then resume the acute accent, and after
as, avii]Q , .
words which have a circumflex on the last syllable
XVIII. Enclitic monosyllables lose their accent

after words which have an acute on the penultima,
but dissyllables retain it ; as, , ,
XIX. If several enclitics succeed each other, the
preceding always takes the accent of the following,
ip]oi .
so that the last only is unaccented as, ;
Obs.
,
Enclitics retain their accent in the beginning of
1.
"
.
clause, as,
qI':l( uf, Rom. xi. 18.
and when they are emphatical, as,
Also the pronouns retain their accent
after prepositions, and after trexu or ^, as, nuga ivey.u ^
Obs.
follows
cented ;
\ , ., , , \
2.
as,
When begins a sentence,
or its
is
first
emphatical, or
syllable is ac-
DIALECTS.
Ancient Greece, with its dependencies, comprehended,
besides the different districts in Europe, part of Asia, and
several islands in the Mediterranean. In these several coun-
tries the inhabitants, besides the common language, had
different dialects, of which four were principal, viz. the Attic,
Ionic, Doric, and jEolic ; the last comprehending the Boeotic.
The poetic style admitted all the dialects, and had certain
peculiarities of its own.
ATTIC DIALECT.
The Attic dialect was the most refined, and peculiar to
Athens and its neighborhood. It is admitted by the poets and
writers in the Ionic and Doric dialects.
PROPERTIES.
I. Contraction.
1. Of syllables in the same word ; as,
aa )
into Of. See Obs. 19, page 233.
)
)
\ 7/ 10.
}
9.
ao
«
fa
ATTIC DIALECT. 229
2. Of syllables in different words by synaloepha, of which

there are six species ; viz.
230 DIALECTS.
. .
, ? Attic
C
^
.
.
.
'.
into }
xttl &
,
.^
.
Before
Ofr
]
\
^
Attic
^
.
^.
,
'.
Before an aspirate is changed into •
as,
"i
" ).
^.
, ^.
\ Attic < '^.
} ( --^
.
Before
.,
,
.
. Change of letter or syllable
— , ,
; as,
.
.
.
, .
into , as ^^^',
\q,
,
,
. ^.
.
'-{ ,
^
.
-,^
. ^,
.
",
,
.
.
Obs. 2.
2.
u^c,
Fern. Art.
. 2. 5.
3Several of these contractions are more properly written without the

t subscript.See pawe 6., near the top.
* Busby, after Joh. Grammaticus, reverses this instance, making ^-
otiv for &aoQHv but greater authorities are against them.
'
ATTIC DIALECT. 231
into 0,
at
01
,,
232 DIALECTS*
VI. Apocope.
for
-
-, ^. in the imperative active of verbs in •
as, and ,
OBSERVATIONS.
1. It makes the vocative like the nominative in all declen-
sions.
DECLENSIONS.
2. In the 2d, the vov^êl or diphthong in every termination
is changed into • and the penultima of nouns in «og, if long
?, ?, .
is changed
wise; as,
3. Some words of the 3d in
, ;. into •
as,
See Clarke's Homer, a', 265.
-;
it declines after the 1st;
plur. «, )^ not other-
and some in -^
after the 2d. (Page 35.) -^
.
pure
sion
4.
5.
ia contraoied into «
Proper names of this form
and one appellative
;
as, ivOeia^ *
.
In the 1st form the accusative singular of adjectives in
(Page î3.)
it declines after the
In the 2d and 3d forms it makes the genitive singular in

wg, contracting that from pure as, ;
(Page 35.)
^^
first declen-
6. In the 3d form it contracts the accusative singular into ??»

and the N. A. V. plural into ] but
tives in « •
as, ^ ^.
pure has both accusa-
•
'
also OCCUrs..
- 7. It
•
forms comparisons by
and, in common veith the Ionic,
ADJECTIVES.
-?, -,
-^
-^^
•
8.
It uses in the 2d person, and,
See Rule V. on the preceding page.
PRONOUNS.
for
,,,^ ^
VERBS.
9. It contracts and
by after the Doric manner.
into
J}
10.
ri
It
in the
contracts «at, ^ ,
made by the Ionic syncope,
second person singular of the present indicative
ATTIC DIALECT. 233
passive and middle of verbs in in

}^ -, &.
•
as, '^ ^, &^
ofbarytons; as, ^, '^.
And
11. It contracts the Ionic ao into

sometimes
• oo, into in
in that of the perfect passive
(Page 110.)
,, ,
the 2d person singular of the imperfect indicative ; and of the
.)
. &, ^^
present and second aorist imperative passive and middle of
verbs in as, i'arw,
•
,,
),
12.In the first future of polysyllables in
middle
it drops
It does the same by those in

which are afterwards contracted as,
as,
But ; 3.
,
•
uncontracted occurs, Joel, ii. 28. (Page 76, bottom,

and Obs. near the top of page 97.)
13. It affects the augment several different ways. (Page 73.)
14.
(Page 96.)
It syncopates the first aorist ; as, for [.
15. In dissyllable perfects in «, , it changes into o.
(Page 78.)
-,
16. It changes into
in the perfect active of obsolete verbs;
o,
,
according to some grammarians,
as, /, mi\9m,
,
inserting
List of Defective Verbs.
^ 17.
and the middle
-, in
v. But they are better derived
In the perfects active and passive

^,
it changes
which the
,^ ^^
into • as,
often retained ; as,
as in the
««,
f «*6^.
&
t is
According to some this is not a change, but an insertion of w •
.
an opinion which seems
In the reduplicated perfect «/'?/«, from
to sanction.
,^
•
18. ajoj, it inserts
as,
19. In the perfect and pluperfect active it syncopates , as
',
also the following vowel
- ^ - - ^',
-
; as,
,.
Except in the third person plural perfect, and
ciple, which contract the two vowels; as,
20. The Ionic f «, ff c,6 for ft»', f/c, ,

tf,
1st, 2d, and 3d sing.

»',
,
, ^; vui.
in the parti-
'
of the pluperfect active and middle, it contracts into , j;;, •
as, eO.Yf-'/, -'/;, -.
6 The contraction is used in the 2d person, though usually limited by

grammarians to the 1st and 3d only.
20*
234 DIALECTS.
• Tt syncopates
for ^,.
t in the third plural of the same tense ; as,
21. From
.
the
rejects the last syllable,
2d person imperative
-t,^ , active of verbs in
•'^
^^^ ^^ it
•
^,^
22. It changes into )
in the third person plural of
the imperative active, retaining the preceding vowel in the
1st aorist only of barytons, and in both the tenses peculiar to
verbs in in the rest
•
is changed into o, except in the con-
tracts, where is changed into , into and ,

of the third ,
remains; as,
Barytons.
1st Aor. -^ -,
Pres.
Perf.
2d Aor.
\
>
)
-, -.
Contracts.
1st Conj.
not
\-
-
\'
>
-.
-.
-, -.
)
} -
Verbs in »
Pres. ^ &
-. -.
.
2d
[
\
it syncopates as, •
Pres.
Perf.
1st A.
'
23. In the 3d plural of the imperative passive and middle
&
Passive.
-
Middle.
V-aav, -v.
7 In this case the long vowel is restored, but it is not always in verbs
from aw.
8 ^ in this place becomes by reason of the preceding ^.
ATTIC DIALECT. 235
24.
changed into '
as,
^ .
In the optative active of barytons and contracts, «t
^^ .
, .
is
The persons are varied in all the tenses as in the aorists

passive of this mode :
\ -, -^ -^
> -, -^,
) -^ ~^^) -.
25. It uses the 2d and 3d singular, and the 3d plural of the
ôlic (Page 71.)
,.
aorist.
26. It changes oi, the penultima of the optative active of

,
verbs in
27.
from
It syncopates
optative of barytons,
same mode, also in
into
^^ in
•
,,
as,
and peculiar tenses of verbs

of the aorists passive
of the latter
in of the
and, in both,
;
changes in the 3d plural into e •

as.
1st Aor.
2d Aor.
Pres.
-
&
Common.
'
--^
'-
Attic.
d-
2d Aor.
Pres.
•^ -^ -. S
f -, - -.
2d Aor.
Pres.
2d Aor. )
WRITERS.
Thucydides, Lysias, Plato, Xenophon, Iscbus, Isocrates,
Demosthenes, JEschines, Lucian. ^schylus, Sophocles, Eu- —
ripides, Aristophanes. —
This dialect was divided into ancient
and more recent. Thucydides, Plato, and Aristophanes used
the former.
. 9 The Doric moreover changes oi of the pentJtima into «• as, yt/.oim,

236 DIALECTS.
'
IONIC DIALECT.
The Ionic dialect was peculiar to the colonies of the Atheni-
ans and Achaians in Asia Minor and the adjacent islands,
the principal of which were Smyrna, Ephesus, Miletus, Teos,
and Samos. It is admitted by writers of the Attic dialect,
often by those of the Doric, but most frequently by the poets.
PROPERTIES.
It delights in a confluence of vowels; hence it is distin-
guished from the common dialect by
I. The resolution of diphthongs
into
' ^.
.
.
and contractions,
£» ^
& &.
..
-, .
'
SV
} .
.
,.
ov
&[ .
^-.
, ,.
?, (Maitt. . 103. b.)
,
V
.
^, ^,
^.
.
al•.
Obs. 5.
4, 5.
II. Syncope of
, t
imperf of
and
in
in
in oblique cases.
-, ^, -.
many words
many words
tao>.
;
;
as, ,,,
particularly those in •
as,
for
,
in 2d persons of verbs.
X in the perfect active.
lON'lC DIALECT. 237
IIL Epenthesis of
a before terminations of verbs,
•
in all cases; as,
in dual cases and many nouns; as,
as,
,,,&,,...
before terminations of nouns and verbs, of some
. for
I, 4.
5.
before « and j?
•
as,
IV. Prosthesis of
before many words ; as,
Reduplication in many tenses.
,. 12.
^,,
,
V. AphcBresis of
•
'
•
as,
as, .
as, T\ynvoy.
12
Augment.
VI. Paragoge of
« in ine pertect middle as, yi'âa. ; See, however, page 78.
in the third persons of verbs.
VIL Change
.
of letter or syllable
^^-
:
'
&.^
!C ^ .
y \ into <
-
.
.
.
, / nolo
,
jt > Ionic <
^,
. (
xa&OQd
^.
The smooth and
-- .
; aspirate mute reciprocally ; as,
& -,
&.
>y
i
\ Ionic ^
V
'
•
V
#
V
&,
&.
1 Change of vowel and consonant. See onward.
2 The rouffh into the smooth.
238 DIALECTS.
•• .
--»
&
( 9.
,
.
4.
ded-Xov.
.
.
' .
.
j. Ionic ^ .
.
.
,
.
.
^
j
"
,
.
,
. a
4.
4.
Contraction in a few instances.

.^
OS
oa
into ov
( ^.
.
OBSERVATIONS.
. 3.
1. It inserts" in all genitives plural.
^, 2.
3.
It annexes
In the
t to the dative plural
article, 6 or before
DECLENSIONS
of all parisyllabic nouns.
is contracted into ov as, •
4. In the 1st it changes the a of all terminations (the dual

and the N. A. V. plural excepted) into , subscribing the
subjunctive vowel ov of the genitive of nouns in «? and
;
into eo), av and of the accusative singular into «, and

the plural into .. — G. D. A.
of
G. D.
1. Sing.
.
1-^ -^,
.
-/, -
G.
or
D.
-.
.
PI. -, - or
G. D.
-rpt
-aiat, -. 2. Sing, -, -, -/?, -. 1. -^ -] or -rpt

or -.
3
* ,
See Article in the
in
Jlttic
Hesiod, by syncope for
Dialect.
^.
IONIC DIALECT. 239
5. In the 2d
changes of the genitive singular into oio
it
(and in the article, which is of this declension, into whose ,

dative also is in and oi of the ,)
dual into *
G. G.D. G. D. G.
Sing. )'-, Dual, -otiv, Pi. ~^ -. Sing, &
D.
^, '.
-,
-ctg,
6.
-,
In the 3d by syncopating and it makes
of the 2d and 5th forms of the contracts. -^

-ig,
Contracts of tJte Third Declension.

In the
7. 1st and 2d forms, the genitive and dative sing., in
the 3d form, cases, have of the penultima changed into .
-^
all
1. Sing.
G.
''Aq-rjOi,
D.
-. 2. -, G. D.
-. 3. Sing,
G.
D.
-Tji",
8.
9.
.
-.
G.
Dual,
In the 4th form
In the 5th form
D.
N.A. G.D.
-,
it
-rfiiy.
it
makes the
Plur.
.
-?, -', -^, -.
accusative in ow as,
changes a of the penultima into
G. D. A.
•
, •
as,
niq-Bog, -, &/C.
ADJECTIVES.
10. In the feminine from vc, t is syncopated in every
N. G.
case ; as, 6- or -, -eug or -g.
with
11.
compounds
is changed into
the compounds D.
It inserts
its
;
;
,
,, ,
G. .
•^
PRONOUNS.
before every termination of
, .
D.
but
. ',
';,
and
Seldomer when
particularly in
and its con-
tracted form for also occur.
xf/,
only
On
as,
12. It
uy.ovGF,
removes the augment 5yZ/«&ic and temporal;
'• '&
sometimes both; as,
;
and from the pluperfect both augments

the contrary it
•6 Herodot.
VERBS,
'
Sometimes the reduplication
reduplicates the present, imperfect, and both

; as,
for ^.
as,
for
:-
5 See Rule I., Example 1st.

On the supposition that is an insertion and not a change of «. The
augment of this verb is i.
240
)^
the futures and aorists
^ ^^ ^ &^
;
DIALECTS.
13. It forms the 1st, 2d, and 3d sing, and the 3d plur. of
the imperfect, and both aorists active, by annexing
to the 2d persons singular respectively, dropping the sub-
as,
(Page 74.)
,^^
junctive vowel in oontracts, and shortening the long vowel in
verbs in
Imperf.
.
^
,
, -
-
Common.
-
Ionic.
"^
,
& ,
, -
, -
' - -.
-
1stAor.
', xec, -,
2d Aor.
^-
^ -^
-, -.Hence in the passive and middle ^
14. In the first future indicative active of the 4th, and the
2d future of every conjugation, it inserts before the three
terminations sing, and 3d plural also in the infinitive and ;
participle, resolving and ov into fo in the dual and
--,--.-^ -, -.
into
.
-^ -^ -,-^
plural, except in the 3d plural and the participle feminine
Part,
-^ -,-^-
•
^
•
In the middle voice it

;
Inf.
, -, -^ ', -'^
onli/ resolves
into
-^^
,
subjunctive
and
into
•
the latter in the 2d sing, indicative
•
as,
- •
,
• •
-,
15. In the perfect active
penultima
16.
;
In the pluperfect active and middle

•
it
-, -.
syncopates
it
and shortens the
changes ^,
, into f«, ,^ .
17. resolves and in the 2d persons of passive and
It
middle tenses into eai, to •
in the subjunctive .
(Page 88.)
18. To
the. 3d sing, of all tenses active, of the perfect
middle, and of the aorists passive, of the subjunctive mode,
.
it annexes •
as.
''
'^^ retains the augment in the infinitive. Herodot.
s This form is more frequently found without the augment ; as,
8 See Mtic dialect, p. 233., Note to Obs. 20.

IONIC DIALFXT. 241
Active.
Pres. .
. 1st Aor.
Passive.
(f&r^^^
^}'^
Perf.
1st Aor.
2d Aor.
2d
.
reivcprjai. 2d Aor.
Perf. ].
Middle.
middle resolves
19. In the
into «0 • as, -, sing, of the
-uo.
1st aorist it
20. In all tenses of the indicative and optative, whose 3d

sing, ends in * ,
or it forms the 3d plur. by inserting u
before those terminations respectively, and, of the next pre-

ceding letters, shortening the long vowel, dropping the sub-
junctive of the diphthong (except in the optative), changing
the smooth mute into the rough, and into the characteristic
of the 2d aorist, <J or '" as, •
Pres, & Perf. Sing.

242
always in the aorists as,

DIALECTS.
-), .
Also in the 3d plur.
^ , ',^.^ ^.
;
of the present indicative of verbs in from and the present

and 2d aorist subjunctive of those from and f «
in the active ,
voice ; as, Sometimes
in the 3d person middle voice as, ;
23. It syncopates in the 2d persons passive and middle of

verbs in . (Page 110.)
.
tw,
-^ & ^
24.
25.
In the 3d plural of the present active of verbs in
,,
^ ,,.,^ , ^,
;
It contracts 07,
•
from
•
into
from
it inserts «, syncopating the subjunctive vowel of
diphthongs as, vvvlJ

•
as,
•
^ It
rodotus.
,^
Instead of the regular tenses of
those of their primitives it and
,
&/C.
makes borrow
WRITERS.
its
&^
•
tenses as
Herodotus^ Hippocrates, Arrian, Lucian, AretcBus, Homer,

and
as,
if from
&,C. OCCUr in
it uses
and
He-
Hesiod, Theognis, Anacreon.
'
DORIC DIALECT.
This dialect was used first in LacedcBmon and Argos ;
afterwards in Epirus, 3Iagna Grcecia, Sicily, Crete, Rhodes,

and Lyhia. It is seldom used by Attic, but often by Ionic
writers and the poets.
PROPERTIES.
I. Contraction of and «, when prefixed to vowels and
diphthongs.
,
,
Common.
, .
.
.
Doric.
6
6
,, .
.
^
,
^ .'.
^,
.
DORIC DIALECT. 243
Xfxl
,"^ .
&.
^ '.
Other contractions
.
.
. ,
into >
q^^ '
^2.
'^'
J]
^Q^?,
S-^
^,
"'^,
)
gen. 5.
«
. Change of letter
'', or syllable as,
,
;
,
^
into
'.
. ^^^ --.
,
t ^
\ 4.
,
,
^ ,
^
^ . . by Metathesis
.
5 also ./Eolic.
^. ^',
'^
^
- /
,
, ..^
.
,"^ .^
,
\
^2 ,
^
.
,.
^ .^
.^ '.^
&^
,^
for
for
^ (.
,
. . for
f^^^9} also jEolic.
), , .
,
-,
y
C
', "
^.^ ^ 23.
17.
11.
Words to which the figure ^ is affixed, undergo some change of an-

other letter.
2 When or ^ follows.
3 See yivTo in the .SEolic.
244 DIALECTS.
, .^
into
^
, , . also Ionic.
,
^^,
., .
(),
,,
,^
16.
.
,
'.
.^
.
^,,
, ^^ , .
^. ^
«.^
2, 13, 19.
2, 22.
^
8i
^
(,
^
,
.
^,
^
^^ ^
'.
r^&aXoV\.
24,
14.
^ ^
OL
;^
^
,^
'.
^ .
^
. .
,^
Gen.
Accus.
Ace,
nvby
\
}
3, 24,
19
*
18
*
0) ^.
III. Syncope of
^ .
^,
, ^&. &.^
^-^^
.^ }•for
15, 17.
17.
' *
^
Plato says that wo«t
xutQoj'c.
This seems
dialect.
to
was used
come from verbs

for the ancient
in
and
« made « by the
Attic oqui,
Attic and Ionic
^ By another syncope for -5^£»

DORIC DIALECT. 245
IV. Epentliesis of
,
^.
-^ .
7)'.~
'"^
• 16.
20.
V. Aph(Eresis of
^ , -^^ in Irj.
OBSERVATIONS.
.
1. It makes the nominative plur. of the article , . F.
DECLENSIONS.
2. In the 1st it changes ov of the genitive singular, o) of the
genitive plural, and of every termination, into u. Sometimes
also the genitive plural of the 2d and 3d ; as,
-, N.
-a,
G. D.
-a,
A.
-av -«.
V.
)^ »
G.
~
,^
,
>-, '
-a^j
' '
-a, -u ::} -rlur. OLV.
3. Proper names in aog have syncopated, and are declined
after the
D. A. V.
1st ; as, for &c. -^ N. G.
-«,
-f^ -, -.
In this declension it changes ov into that of the accusa- ,
tive plural sometimes into o, and rejects the subscript of the
dative ; as,
G. D. G. A.
Sing. Aoj'-oj, -. Plur. -«*',8 -ojg or -oc.
It also changes N. and A. sing, and

into o) in the
N. A. V. plur. contracted of the 3d as, N. /?, A. ; 8.
, , \^-.
Plur. N. A. V. ^coc.
4. It changes into in nouns in •

as,
Gen. S-e
changes and of the N, and V. of the 1st and 3d
,
5. It
forms reciprocally
genitives in into
7
; as,
''-'
"^, -
*
as,
N.
Third sing. 1st fixture middle.

V.
•
^ ^.^
-, N. V.
-. or of
ov into
all
^ This is infrequent.
9 Odys. tu'.397.
21 *
246 DIALECTS.
in the genitive sing, of the fourth form; as, G. '^. of

the nominative plural into without the subscript, of all
genitives into « • This last but seldom.
PRONOUNS.
6. To nom. sing, it annexes v^
in the
penultiraa of the dual and plural it changes
vya. In the
into a^ and often
^^
uses the singular accusative for the dual and plural. (See
Table at the end of Dialects, page 255.)
7. In the pronoun of the 2d person it changes into , and
annexes ya, .
(See Table, page 256.)
8. In the 3d personal pronoun, for the accusative it uses
^
the accusative of /'c, G. ioc, obsolete, with or prefixed ; as,
-^ -, ,
^-,
viv^ which often stand not only for , but for
and also for the plural ag, .
, .
For the plural dative
it uses the dual which by aphseresis becomes
,
For the plural accusative
.
it uses the dual by meta-
-, -),
thesis hence As the demonstrative is often used
for the reflectives ot> and
-dg,
and
-,
are
(contracted from
used respectively for
genders sometimes
so
-^
the
•
accusative
singular -,
in all
-r^v, -.
; for
In the possessives it
6
changes
into .
.
.
.
.
, , )^ ^ ,
9. Itchanges
VERBS.
the characteristic of the present into
/,
crd, ,
. , ,,^).^ ,^^
). 10.
, and
It
as, •
makes new present tenses from perfects by changing

« into •
as,
11. It changes the future characteristic of verbs in , and
12.
^.
of some in
It
1st aorist of verbs in
pure, into I
changes
^^
as,
From
*
in the penultima of the

pure into ot
for
•
.
as,
1st future and
DORIC DIALECT. 247
^,
13.
14.
It
1st aorist perfect
It
without a subscript
^.
changes
changes et,
;
in the penultima of the
and pluperfect, into « as,
the
as,
augment formed by annexing
^^^ \.
*
,,
1st future
t, into
and
15. It syncopates t in the 2d and 3d persons sing, of the
16. It
•
as,
circumflexes the
-,
present indicative active, and in every tense of the infinitive
ending in -s,
first
^,. future active and middle, and
forms it like the 2d as,
-
;
Act. -, -fi?, -EL •

-, •
Oiill )
^ > -, - .
^^'^
IQ . - I
>
-
Mid. -, - ^^ -, •
^ ^
--, -^, &C.

)
17. It changes into in the first person plural of all tenses
^
as, ^ ^ ^
indicative and subjunctive active, and of the aorists subjunctive
passive also
-,
into
; in the 3d plural, dropping the subjunc-
tive vowel of the preceding diphthong, except in the futures ;
. &^ .
',^^ ,^^ ^^•^ ^^.^•^ ,^^
Pass,
&/C. ,^^
, ^ . ^ ^-^~
18. It changes into in the penultima of barytons and
contracts of the optative active, whose termination the Attic
had before changed into as, Attic, •
'
Doric,
-
It
,
-. -.
^
. . .. .
also often
-^. -, -
and barytons
,
or
Imp.
changes
into
Part,
,
of the penultima both of contracts
sometimes into oi as, Act.
-,
Pass,
•
— Also
-'^^
and Midd.
Fut.
-^ - •-,
1st Fut.
Particip.
the subjunctive; as,
Archimedes.
Imperat.
is sometimes inserted in
• -,
Iftt
11 See Obs. 18, and note to the same.

12 See Obs. 18.
13 This person is like the dative plural of the participle of the same
tense, but the Doric dialect makes it like the dative singular.
1* The 2d future commonly retains the v, if the penultima be not changed
into tv or oi, but not always.

us DIALECTS.
19.
optative, passive
as,
It changes into in most tenses of the indicative and
and middle also of verbs in
-^ &-
ending in
;
^ •
-
^ ^ , ^
.
in the 1st person plural passive
^, 20. It inserts ; as,
21.
future,
In the perfect passive of verbs in
changes into as, ,, , making in the
.
•
it
«
Ionic ; as,
•
as, ,-^
22. It contracts verbs in
-; -riv
into v, in common with the
and changes the , contracted into•
particularly in participles ; as,
23. In verbs in
indicative active into
into
24.
•
25. It also changes

as, ^
In the infinitive
and vat, into

junctive of the preceding diphthong; as,
it
•
changes
Qiywv.
as,
it
of the 3d person sing, present
*, &, &c.
sometimes changes
^
"^
et into «,
dropping the sub-

and ol
'
- V '.
,
,, ,^^26.
Ionic writers.
this form it frequently annexes
&/C.
as, «
These often OCCUr in
• ,
PARTICIPLES.
27.
participles
It inserts
; as, -^ -.
after in the masculine and feminine of
15
15
ôlic for
Sometimes
(. after the ôlic manner of compensating the
loss of the subjunctive vowel of the diphthong. See ôlic dialect.
^
iEOLIC DIALECT.
28. It changes via the feminine termination into

cording to some grammarians; as,
ac-
but they rather belong to present tenses formed

from perfects. See Obs. 10.
WRITERS.
^^ «,
249
Archimedes, Timmus, Pythagoras, Pindar, Theocritus^

Bion, Moschus, Callimachus , and the tragedians in the
choruses.
MOUC DIALECT.
This dialect was used in Boeotia, Lesbos, and JBoUa in
Asia 3Iinor. It is a branch of the Doric, and has some
changes in common with it.
I.
•
Change of the rough
PROPERTIES.
and removal of the accent back,

into the
as, , .
smooth breathing ; as,
, , ,,.
To compensate the loss of the aspirate it sometimes prefixes
to, when the next syllable begins with , , , or as,
,
•
vowel ; as, for Doric for

It
,
sometimes prefixes y to a
by syncope for
,
which is by the Ionic dialect for
^
II.
into { ^
Change of
\ .
,
letter
,..
<^<^^,
or syllahh.
^
.
/^^*/
••
,,
).
,.
, . for
,
for See Rule IV.
^ ,^ ,•^ .•^
if , ^.
1 For dtXtao.
Ct is
^
2 An iEolic resolution of < c — > by metathesis < ax
(_ — Tta J ^
3 Words that undergo a complicated change.
250
into ,
.
^
,
^ ^,^
DIALECTS.
^
, ^^ . &^ ^^ for
.
^
&, .&^
--.
.
&,
, ^ , -^"»*-.
added.
&,
-^ ,
^.^^, ^,^
^.
'. hence
'^.
^ .
,, ^ ^ ,
.
-^
6^^ '
.
--^ .
^
^ . ,
^ ^ ^
G. -,
^.
Acc. -,
^
, . ^.^ ^
.
-.
'^
^-.^
^
III.
,^
Prosthesis of
/for the same purpose;

,
before » instead of the aspirate
as, ^.
;
,
as,
Also in other words ;
.
^^ whence '. 411.
^,
as, II.
IV.
changing
jôlic, , ,.
Epenthesis.
Epenthesis of
into
It transposes the letters in the syllable »*,
and doubling •
as,
•
^ ^
^
a in the genitive plur.
in •
participles in
and vuiraioc are of ôlic extraction, from

•
alsoof the
yov»; and
subscript.
/.
5 In the augment, according to Priscian.
. V after •
^
.
as, , , , ^ ',
iEOLIC DIALECT. 251
^ . ^, after as,
•
a consonant to compensate the loss of the aspirate ; as,
.,. a consonant
shortened ; as,
when the
^^^, , , ^^ -,
vowel or diphthong preceding is
in futures in ,.
in
, ..
, V. Syncope of
.
,,,
y in
VI.
—
—"
—
— '
Paragoge of
'|,
to the accusative sing,

. ".
•
also subscript ; as,
of the 4th form of contracts

,
; as,
OBSERVATIONS.
DECLENSIONS.
1. It changes
nouns into « as,
into «0
nouns of
•
as, .,
•
this declension ; as,

accusative plural of those in « and /;
in the
as, t'cucfaig.
nominative of the first declension of
and in the
and ov of the genitive sing,
It inserts a in the genitive plural of
.)>^•
• t,
2. In the dative singular of the 2d it omits the subscript

and changes ov; of the accusative plural into oig.
•
3. In the 1st form of the contracts it rejects

voo-ative sing, in pc •
as, , ^-.
as,
from the
In the fourth form it makes the genitive sing, in ojc, and

;
^,,
4.
the accusative in o*»• as, G. A. -cof.
•
-;^
It makes of genitive cases a new nominative of another
declension from which it forms its cases as, of the ;
geuitive, it makes a nominative, from which

dative plural. So (•
from utlitro;, and t/oc, G.
is the
D. r/oi, (Si/C. from the genitive rtjo;, which has sometimes the
y syncopated.
It changes into in the genitive sing, and accusative
plur. of nouns in « and of the 1st declension, the nominative
sing, of the 2d, the nominative and genitive sing, of the 3d,
252 DIALECTS.
3d, ^,
of all five ; as, 1st, G.
contracts, G.
G.
A.
Plur.
2d, G.
2d, , .
the genitive and accusative sing, of the 1st form of the con-
. ..
2d form, and the accusative plural
tracts, the genitive of the
1st form of
.
•
VERBS.
.
. ^.
5. It changes the et of the 2d and 3d sing, of the pres-
ent indicative active, and of the infinitive, into as, •
-,
-, -.
6. It annexes ^ to the 2d persons in • as, râd-a^ &.
,
as,
7.
', It inserts
. in futures of the fourth conjugation in •
8. It
&, -&.
changes « of the penultima of the perfect passive into
^.
in the infinitive ; as,
changes af and ovv in the infinitive of contracts into
^
9. It
'
at? and oig •
as,
with and without a reduplication ; as,

hence the third plurals
,
, ,, ,
^
10. It gives many contracts the form of verbs in ,
Imperf
both
and participles present

11. It changes
into ai,
&/C.
from
&.^ -, -.
•
&lc.
as, , ^ ^,
in the present of verbs in
into , doubling
from
'
-, -,, "^, ^, ^^.

12. It often changes the short into the long vowel in these
--,
verbs
. 13.
; as,
In ( it makes the 3d sing, , and the 3d plural
WRITERS.
Alc(EUS, Sappho.
BCEOTIC DIALECT.
Under the jEoUc is comprehended the Bceotic dialect, which
has the following distinct peculiarities :
It changes
into .
'^ for yvv^.
1 The which the Doric changes into a, the Bacotic does not change
into £t •
and, on the contrary, what the Bceotic changes into ti, the Doric
B(EOTIC DIALECT. 253
X into
{:
6
V
254 POETIC PECULIARITIES.
6. In the 3d plural of both the aorists passive, and of the

imperfect and 2d aorist active of verbs in it syncopates , ,
,
shortening the preceding long vowel as, ;
^^
Common.
.
&.
,
Boeotic.
.
,
^,
, .
-.
. ,
Bt
7.
•
It changes , in the penultima of verbs
and uses the Ionic reduplication as, ;
^, ,.
in from into
No Writers extant nor would this dialect have been ;
known, nor the Cretan, Spartan, 3Iacedonian, Tarentine,

Pamphylian, and others, had not writers occasionally intro-
duced them as, in Aristophanes we find a Boeotian woman
;
speaking in her own dialect.
Superadded to the use of all the dialects and figures of

orthography and prosody, the POETS have a few peculi-
arities :
'^. ;, , '',,-.
I. They make nouns indeclinable by adding to the nom-
inative of parisyllabic nouns, and to the genitive of impari-
syllabics, rejecting and from the terminations ; as,
duy.ovuffi, for
Neuters of the 1st form of the contracts reject only from the
genitive ; as, ooeog, To the Attic genitive in they
add
ing
II.
oip into
t
•
into
as,
They form
oii'v
G. Mivoto
or ,
for Nlvo).
in the dative dual.

as, or ^
the dative plural from the singular by chang-
&«, 7] •
and change
, ) ,,
,,. ,
III. In verbs they
before o, if the penultima
penultima be short.
insert
Thus
«
be long
before
; but
—
contracted, and o)
Poet,
before o> if the
•
position
IV.
^
—
Hence 2d
Poet,
They redouble
; as,
-^
aor. act. subjunctive,

for ^
letters to
-,
—Poet.
make
-, --
a short syllable long by
1st aorist active
-curor,
and also
:
-»• -wutv,
-, -.
DIALECTS OF THE PRONOUNS. 255
change the quantity of vowels by inserting t to form a diph-

thong
o* as,
V.
as, ; lonice,
They change
for ',
poetice ; and by changing o< into
subjunctive active.
barytons into verbs in ^ • as, ', -
&, from , (Jl^.
,,, ,,", .
VI. From regular verbs in are formed by the poets verbs
defective
^, ,, in ^^,
,&,
^,
, o)
j^, ), |, (^>,
DIALECTS OF THE PRONOUNS.

*
,
Singular.
.
Ionic.
-
\
'
Doric. ôlic.
Bmotic.
Poetic.
G.
(
.
&.
\ ,&.
D.
.
Dual.
..
G. D.
256 DIALECTS.
.
Singular.
Ionic.
G.
D.
..
G. D.
.
G.
D.
G.
D.
.
DIALECTS OF THE PRONOUNS. 257
258 DIALECTS.
DIALECTS OF THE VERB SUBSTANTIVE

INDICATIVE MODE.
.
Present Tense.
Sing. Dual.
1 2 2 3
I.
D.
P.
. "fi &'
^
Imperfect Tense
D.
. -^ - it
Future.
.
.
D.
. ^
DIALECTS OF THE VERB SUBSTANTIVE . DIGAMMA. 259
SUBJUNCTIVE MODE.
I. ^
Present Tense.
^^
.
D.
P.
I.
D.
^,
^ .^^ INFINITIVE MODE.
Present Tense.
Î^^Vj ^M^S) ^^f^^^•
-. -,
^^ Future.
D.
P.
PARTICIPLE.
»
Present Tense.
I. .
Future.
P.
DIGAMMA.
Theancient Greek language had a sound similar to that of
a V or a ,
which was called the yEolic Digamma, because it
remained longest in use among the JEolians, and was de-
noted by a character resembling two gammas, placed one
above the other, thus, F or f. It was prefixed to several words
beginning with a vowel, which in the more familiar dialect
had the smooth or rough breathing, and was sometimes also
inserted in the middle between two vowels. It is supposed
that the digamma, which had the force of a consonant, was
', ,
of which
,
oi>, oi^ , ')^
are
,
more or less frequently employed by Homer in certain words,
elrceif, ', ;^^'
some of the most common, but

ojroc^ .,
that it
, / Hence
was neglected by the transcribers of his works.
the
reason appears
them ; as,
why such words so often have a hiatus before
for JfAojOi«, ' for
^ ^
and also why they are so rarely preceded by long
•
vowels or diphthongs shortened as, «i ao ; for

and so often by short syllables made long, as if
•
by position, even where the caesura does not fall upon them;
as,
for
\^7)
6 foTda.
kxaroio for fexajoio, el• ^
ABBREVIATIONS.
^337) CCTTO
WJ
58
St
et
i
A TABLE, exhibiting the pages of the First Edition of the Grammar to
which reference is in the Notes appended to the Exercises, and
made
the corresponding pages of the Second Edition.
The large figures denote those Examples of the Exercises, which have notes referring
to the Grammar; the small figures in the next column show the pages of the First
Edition referred to in the respective notes ; and the small figures in the third column,
the corresponding pages of the Second Edition.
No. of
262 TABLE TO BE USED WITH THE EXERCISES.
No. of Page, Page, Page, No. of Page, Page,

Exarap. 1stEd. 2d Ed. letEd. 2d Ed. Examp. 1stEd. 2d Ed.
122 19 22 19 22 417
]25 5 5 17 21 432
127 5 5 14 16 433
133 62 74 63 75
63 75 111 130
40 46 62 73
135 17 20 19 22
136 63 75 16 19
61 73 11 12
140 62 74 119 138
16 19
66 78 61 73
141 86 104 248 19 22
60 72 10 10
94 113 254 96 115
15 18 255 61 73 17 20
19 22 74 90
63 75 260 10 10
15 17
9 9 19 23
7 7
117 136
9 9
74 74
519
62 63
521
65 77
15 17
15 17
7 7
9 9
19 22
107 126
5 5
113 132 63 75
21 25 9 9
108 127
15 17
17 20 85 103
106 125 64 76
109 128 59 71
111 130 16 19 20 24
196 110 129 60 72
198.^ 106 125 322 117 136
199 68 80 118 137
76 92 65 77
333 63 75
344 110 129 637
65 76
113 132 639
358 107 126
66 374 85 103
5 5 384 113 139
117 136 389 107 126
94 113 118 137
115 134 108 127
9 9 111 130
20 23 15 17
107 126
TABLE TO BE USED WITH THE EXERCISES. 263
No. of
'^.

Grammar of Greek La 00 Fisk

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Grammar of Greek La 00 Fisk

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

^^ -Ik':

BENJAMIN FRANKLIN FISK.

Kec m^nore curil

Perhaps no elementary work has so long and so justly

much important matter, or by the incommodious disposition

and accordingly, with a labor to be appreciated by those

afford any thing of service to his undertaking.

In particular he read over all the more popular Greek

haeuser, Sturze, Schleusner, Sanxay, Beck, Reiske, and

general lexicons, from the smallest up to the voluminous one

of Stephanus. In perusing these works, all of which were

tion from a large number of the most pertinent examples that

The parts preceding the Syntax required less attention

when baryton verbs are divided into four conjugations, the

the denomination of the second perfect and second plu-

be incontestably so, seemed not in this case a sufficient rea-

The Prosody also, which next to the Syntax demanded

presented in the form which seemed most convenient for

reference ; and that every proper facility might be afforded

which the more advanced student may have httle occasion.

Considerable pains likewise have been taken with the

him in procuring the books necessary to be consulted ; and he

regrets that its appearance should convey so inadequate an

detail the obligations laid upon him. He must, however, be

It has long been the opinion of the compiler, and one

but such as, by the simplicity and pertinency of the exam-

by their not presupposing a knowledge of what has not

Waltbiim, Massachusetts, June, 1830.

The compiler of this Grammar, by a maturer consideration

form better adapted for use ; complete synopses of the mod^^s

posed ; and numerous other additions and simplifications have

ficed without hesitation ; as we have no regard to them in

antepenultima. Of the polysyllables not marked, compara-

The Exercises promised in the Preface to the first edition

the Grammar be first committed to memory, and a portion

Exercises refer to the pages of the first edition of the Gram-

Waltham, Massachusetts, October, 1831.

The Greek Language is written by means ol

The old Greek alphabet consisted of sixteen letters only, a (i d t

/. Q V, which were sufficient to express all the sounds of the

The divided into seven vowels and

There are twelve diphthongs

six proper, ai,

All diphthongs end with t or hence these vowels are •

The iota subscript, in the diphthongs n, ,

At is commonly represented in Latin by a;, as,

but serves only to indicate the derivation of the word. It was

Each smooth mute has corresponding middle its

and aspirate, into each of which it is frequently

smooth, a middle before a middle, and an aspirate before an

The poets often drop the final vowel of the preposition

as, iyyqacpb) for

double consonants are three

except where the two simple letters

4 ACCENTS. MARKS OF READING.

TON was written for

The acute stands over one of the three last syl-

only and the circumflex over one of the two last.

distinguished from the semicolon, is a point at the

the English semicolon.

from oTt, that.

CHANGE OF FINAL SYLLABLES. 5

vowels, to show that they do not form a diphthong

CHANGE OF FINAL SYLLABLES ON THE MEET-